Bo Applied Science PDF

Bachelor of
Applied Science
Academic Session 2012/2013
USM Vision
Transforming Higher Education for a Sustainable Tomorrow
USM Mission
USM is a pioneering, transdisciplinary research intensive university
that empowers future talent and enables the bottom billions
to transform their socio-economic well being
i
STUDENT'S PERSONAL INFORMATION
Full Name
Identity Card (IC)/Passport No.
Current Address
Permanent Address
E-mail Address
Telephone No. (Residence)
Mobile Phone No.

(if applicable)
School
Programme of Study
ii
CONTENTS
SECTION A
ACADEMIC INFORMATION
VISION AND MISSION i
STUDENTS PERSONAL INFORMATION ii
CONTENT iii
ACADEMIC CALENDAR iv
1.0 BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE
1.1 General Information 1
1.2 Areas of Specialization 1
1.3 Programme Structure 2
1.4 Courses Offering 2
* Core Courses 2
* Minor Courses 2
* Elective Courses 3
* Optional Courses 3
* Audit Courses 3
1.5 Course Codes 4
1.6 Classification of year equivalent 4
1.7 Graduation Requirements 4
2.0 ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION

2.1 Information on Course Registration 5
2.2 Interpretation of Unit/Credit 12
2.3 Examination System 13
2.4 Unit Exemption/Credit Transfer 18
2.5 Academic Intergrity 22
2.6 USM Mentor Programme 27
2.7 Student Exchange Programme 28
3.0 UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS 29
3.1 Summary of University Requirements 29
3.2 Bahasa Malaysia 29
3.3 English Language 31
3.4 Local Students - Islamic and Asian Civilisation/Ethnic Relations/ 33
Core Entrepreneurship
3.5 International Students - Malaysian Studies/Option 34
3.6 Third Language/Co-Curriculum/Skill Courses/Options 35
SECTION B
DEGREE PROGRAMME INFORMATION
* School of Chemical Sciences 40
* School of Physics Sciences 84
* School of Biological Sciences 179
* School of Mathematical Sciences 229
* Students Feedback 283
iii
ACADEMIC CALENDAR 2012/2013 SESSION
[ 10 SEPTEMBER 2012 8 SEPTEMBER 2013 (52 WEEKS ]
FOR ALL PRGRAMMES [EXCEPT IN THE MEDICAL AND DENTAL SCIENCES PROGRAMMES
New Student Registration = 1 2 September 2012
Orientation Week = 3-9 September 2012
WEEK SEMESTER ACTIVITY DATE
1 Monday, 10/09/12 - Friday, 14/09/12
2 Monday, 17/09/12 - Friday, 21/09/12
3 Duration of Monday, 24/09/11 - Friday, 28/09/12
4 SEMESTER I Teaching and Monday, 01/10/12 - Friday, 05/10/12
5 Learning Monday, 08/10/12 - Friday, 12/10/12
6 Monday, 15/10/12 - Friday, 19/10/12
7 Monday, 22/10/12 - Friday, 26/10/12
8 Monday, 29/10/12 - Friday, 024/11/12
9 Monday, 05/11/12 Friday, 09/11/12
10 Mid Semester Break Saturday, 10/11/12 - Sunday,18/11/12
11 Monday, 19/11/12 Friday, 23/11/12
12 Duration of Monday, 26/11/12 - Friday, 30/11/12
13 Teaching and Monday, 03/12/12 - Friday, 07/12/12
14 SEMESTER I Learning Monday, 10/12/11 - Friday, 14/12/12
15 Monday, 17/12/12 Friday, 21/12/12
16 Revision Week Saturday, 22/12/12 Monday,01/01/13
17 Wednesday, 02/01/13 - Saturday,05/01/13
18 Examinations Monday, 07/01/13 - Saturday, 12/01/13
19 Monday, 14/01/13 - Friday, 18/01/13
20 - 23 INTER-SEMESTER BREAK I & II Saturday, 19/01/13 - Sunday, 17/02/13
24 Monday, 18/02/13 - Friday, 22/02/13
25 Monday, 25/02/13 - Friday, 01/03/13
Duration of
26 SEMESTER II Monday, 04/03/13 - Friday, 08/03/13
Teaching and
27 Monday, 11/03/13 - Friday, 15/03/13
Learning
28 Monday, 18/03/13 - Friday, 22/03/13
29 Monday, 25/03/13 Friday, 29/03/13
30 Monday, 01/04/13 Friday, 05/04/13
31 Mid Semester Break Saturday, 06/04/13 - Sunday, 14/04/13
32 Monday,15/04/13 - Friday 19/04/13
33 Monday, 22/04/13 - Friday, 26/04/13
Duration of
34 SEMESTER II Monday, 29/04/13 - Friday, 03/05/13
Teaching and
35 Monday, 06/05/13 - Friday, 10/05/13
Learning
36 Monday, 13/05/13 - Friday, 17/05/13
37 Monday, 20/05/13 - Friday, 24/05/13
38 Monday, 27/05/13 - Friday, 31/05/13
39 Revision Week Saturday, 01/06/13 - Sunday, 09/06/13
40 Monday, 10/06/13 - Friday, 14/06/13
41 Examinations Monday, 17/06/13 - Friday, 21/06/13
42 Monday, 24/06/13 - Friday, 28/06/13
Inter-Academic Session Break/
43-52 Saturday, 29/06/13 - Sunday, 08/09/13
Industrial Training/ KSCP
COURSES OFFERED DURING THE INTER-ACADEMIC SESSION BREAK (KSCP)
43 - 45 3 weeks Break Saturday, 29/06/13 - Sunday, 21/07/13

46 - 47 2 weeks Duration of Teaching Monday. 22/07/13 Friday, 02/08/13
48 1 week Examinations Monday, 05/08/13 Friday, 09/08/13
49-52 4 weeks Break Saturday, 10/8/13 Sunday, 08/09/13
iv
1.0 BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE
1.1 General Information
The Bachelor of Applied Science programme with Honours is offered by the School of
Pure Sciences (Physics, Biology, Chemistry and Mathematics) to increase the intake of
Applied Science students as well as to instill the aspects of Applied Science in the offered
courses.
In line with the governments aspiration and emphasis to expand heavy industries and the
transfer of technology, a strong training in all fields of applied science and industrial
technology is needed. Due to increasing demand, a Bachelor of Applied Science
programme is offered by the School of Pure Sciences to produce graduates who are
capable of carrying out research and development works in industries. All efforts are
carried out to fulfil and to provide manpower needs at the degree level in all fields of
applied science and industrial technology.
1.2 Areas Of Specialization
Type of Course School

Applied Physics Physical Sciences
Engineering Physics Physical Sciences
Medical Physics Physical Sciences
Geophysics Physical Sciences
Aquatic Biology Biological Sciences
Environmental Biology Biological Sciences
Biotechnology Biological Sciences
Agrobiology Biological Sciences
Biology & Management of Vector &
Biological Sciences
Parasites
Analytical Chemistry Chemical Sciences
Industrial Chemistry Chemical Sciences
Applied Statistics Mathematical Sciences
Operations Research Mathematical Sciences
Computer Modelling Mathematical Sciences
Mathematical Modelling Mathematical Sciences
Mathematics and Economy Mathematical Sciences
1
1.3 Proramme Structure
Students from the School of Physics, Biological Sciences, Chemical Sciences, and
Mathematical Sciences can choose a Major-Minor or a Major-Elective specialization
programs. Both specialization programs require a minimum total of 105 credit units for
graduation, to be accumulated in the duration of 6 10 semesters. The units requirement
is divided into several parts as follows:
Type of Course Code Type Credit Units Required

Basic
T 70
Core
Minor M 0/16
Elective E 4/20
University U 15 - 18
Total Number of units 105
1.4 Courses Offering
Students are required to register for the undergraduate courses in two semesters, that is
Semester 1 and Semester 2. Courses are offered and examined in the same semester.
Courses offered are categorized into three levels, viz levels 100, 200 and 300, suitable to
the requirements of a three-year study program.
Courses offered according to the needs of the degree program structure of the Pure
Science Schools are grouped as Basic course, Core course, Minor/Elective course,
University/Optional course and Audit course.
Core Courses
Core course is a compulsory course package which aims at giving a deeper understanding
of an area of specialization /major. Students need to accumulate 70 units of the core
courses which have been identified by each School.
Minor Courses
Students are allowed to take a Minor (16 units) in any of the area of Minors offered by the
University. In addition, students are required to take 4 units from the Elective courses to
corroborate the Major component. Examples of Minor packages include Management,
Computer Sciences, English Language and Journalism. Please refer to the Minor
Program Guide Book for a complete list and further details.
2
Elective Courses
Students who do not choose a Minor area are required to take Elective courses. In this
case, students need to accumulate no less than 20 units from other courses which are
acknowledged by the School.
Optional Courses
Optional Courses are courses chosen by students from among those that are outside their
program of study. For Science students, an Optional course is a course that is outside
those that are offered by the Pure Science Schools.
The main objective of an Optional Course is as a substitute course for students who do
not take Cocurriculum courses, and Skill/Analysis courses.
Audit Courses
In principle, the university allows students to register for any courses on an audit basis for
the purpose of enhancing the students knowledge in specific fields during the duration of
their study. However, the units of any such audit courses will not be taken into
consideration for graduation purposes.
The registration procedures for courses on an audit basis are as follows :-
[a] Students can register for courses on an audit basis for the purpose of augmenting
his/her knowledge in specific fields. Registration for the said course must be done
within the course registration week.
[b] Only students of active status are allowed to register for courses on an audit basis.
[c] Courses registered for on an audit basis are designated as code Y courses. This
designation will be indicated on the relevant academic transcript. A space at the
bottom of the academic transcript will be reserved for listing the courses registered
for on an audit basis.
[d] Courses registered for on an audit basis will not be taken into consideration in
determining the minimum and maximum units of courses registered for.
[e] Students must fulfil all course requirements. Students who register for courses on
an audit basis, are not obligated to sit for any examinations pertaining to that
course. A grade R will be awarded irrespective as to whether the student had or
had not sat for the examination.
3
1.5 Course Codes
Every course offered in USM is given a code in the form XYZ klm/n where
X -
represent each school of sciences as follows:
B School of Biological Sciences

K School of Chemical Sciences
M School of Mathematics
Z School of Physics
Y&Z - represent classification of courses in each school

k - digit that signify the course level
l&m - digits according to the course series in that level
n - number of units for the course
1.6 Classification of year equivalent

Students [according to their respective Programme of study] are classified by the year
equivalent to first, second, or third year based on the number of credits accumulated,
as follows: -
Program of Study Year equivalent based on
[Total credits for graduation] Total Credits Accumulated
First Second Third

Pure [100] 0 - 35 36 - 71 >72
Applied [105] 0 - 35 36 - 71 >72
Professional [110] 0 - 37 38 - 75 >76
1.7 Graduation Requirements
Students must fulfil the following requirements to graduate:
[a] Fulfil the minimum required residential requirements during the course of
studies.
[b] Fulfil all the credit requirements of the course and required units for each
component [Core, Elective, Option and University Courses].
[c] Obtain a CGPA of 2.00 and above for Core Components.
[d] Obtain a CGPA of 2.00 and above for the programme.
[c] Achieve a minimum grade C or a grade point of 2.00 for Bahasa Malaysia,
English Language, Islamic and Asian Civilization and Ethnic Relations course.
[d] Achieve a minimum grade C or a grade point of 2.00 for certain courses [if
required]
4
2.0 ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION
2.1 Course Registration

Registration is an important activity during the period of study at the University. It is
the first step for the students to sit for the examination at the end of each semester.
Sign up for the right courses each semester will help to facilitate the graduation of
each student from the first semester till the final semester.
2.1.1 Course Registration Secretariat for the Bachelor Degree and
Universitys Diploma Student
Student Data & Records Section (SDRP)

Academic Management Division
Registry
(Level 1, Chancellory Building)
Tel. No. : 04-6532925/3169/4195

Fax No. : 04-6574641
Website : registry.usm.my/updr/
SDRP office is the secretariat / manager / coordinator of course registration

for the Bachelor Degree and Diploma of the University.
Further enquiries about course registration activities for the first degree and
diploma can be made at any time at the office of the Student Data &
Records Section.
2.1.2 Course Registration Platform
i) E-Daftar (E-Registration)
E-Daftar is a platform for course registration through website. The

registration is done directly through Campus Online portal
(campusonline.usm.my). Only students with active account are allowed
to register for courses in the E-Daftar.
Registration under E-Daftar for Semester 1 usually starts 1-2 days after
the release of 'Official' examination result of the Semester 2 from the
previous academic year. The system closes a day before Semester 1
begins (usually in September). E-Daftar registration for Semester 2
usually starts 1-2 days after Semester 1 Provisional examination result
is released until a day before Semester 2 begins (normally in February).
The actual timing of registration under E-Daftar will be announced by
the Student Data & Records Section usually during the Revision Week
of every semester and will be displayed on the schools/centres/hostels
bulletin board and in the USMs official website.
5
Under E-Daftar, students can register any courses offered by USM,
except co-curriculum courses. Registration of Co-curriculum courses is
still placed under the administration of the Director of the Centre for
Co-Curriculum Programme at the Main Campus or the Coordinator of
the Co-Curriculum Programme at the Engineering Campus and the
Coordinator of the Co-Curriculum Programme at the Health Campus.
Co-Curriculum courses will be included in the students course

registration account prior to the E-Daftar activity, if their pre-
registration application successful.
ii) Access to E-Daftar System
a)E-Daftar System can be accessed through Campus Online portal

(campusonline.usm.my).
b) Students need to register in this portal to be a member. Each
member will be given an ID and password.
c) Students need to use the ID and password to access to their profile
page, which includes the E-Daftar menu.
d) Students need to click at the E-Daftar menu to access and register
for the relevant courses.
e) Students are advised to print the course registration confirmation
slip upon completion of the registration process or after updating
the course registration list (add/drop) within the E-Daftar period.
f) E-Daftar system can only be accessed for a certain period of time.
g) Guidelines to register/access to E-Daftar portal are available at the
Campus Online portals main page.
iii) Online Course Registration (OCR)
OCR activities are conducted in the Schools/Centres and are applicable

to students who are academically active and under Probation (P1/P2)
status. Students, who face difficulties to register their courses in the E-
Daftar can register their courses during the official period of OCR
alternatively. Each school is responsible for scheduling this activity.
Students must refer to the schedule at the notice board of their
respective schools.
Official period for OCR normally starts on the first day of the semester
(without the penalty charge of RM50.00). After this official period, the
registration will be considered late. (The penalty of RM50.00 will be
imposed if no reasonable excuse is given.) During the non-penalty
period, OCR will be conducted at each school. After Week Six, all
registration, including adding and dropping courses will be
administered by the Examination & Graduation Section Office
(Academic Management Division, Registry).
6
2.1.3 The Frequency of Course Registration in One Academic Session
i) Normal Study Semester

- 2 times per year (beginning of Semester 1 & Semester 2)
ii) Long semester break (about one month after the final examination of
Semester 2)
- Once per year
- Applicable for relevant students only.
2.1.4 General Guidelines Before Students Register for Courses

i) Matters / Information / Documents Required to be noted / considered /
referred by students before course registration:
- Refer to the respective schools website to get updated information
for courses offered or course registration.
- Decide courses to be registered according to the semester as
stipulated in the Study Program Guide Book.
- List courses to be registered and number of units (unit value) for
each course.
- Provide Cumulative Statement of Grades (Cangred).
- Construct Teaching and Learning Timetable for the registered
courses (to avoid overlapping in timetable).
- Read and comprehend the reminders regarding policies/general
requirements for the course registration.
ii) The number of maximum and minimum units that can be registered in
every semester are stated as below:
Academic Status Minimum Unit Maximum Unit

Active 9 21
P1 9 12
P2 9 10
- Determination for an academic status in a semester is based on the

academic performance of the students in the previous semester
(Grade Point Average, GPA):-
o GPA 2.00 & above = Active Academic Status
o GPA 1.99 & below = Probation Academic Status (P1/P2)
- Students who meet the minimum period of residency (6 semesters
for 3 years programme, 7 semesters for 3.5 years programme or 8
semesters for 4 years programme) are allowed to register courses
with total units below 9. The semester in which the student is on
leave is not considered for the residency period.
7
iii) Type of course codes during registration:-
T = Core courses Grade and number of units

E = Elective courses obtain from these courses
M = Minor courses are considered for graduation
U = University courses
Two (2) other course codes are:-

Y = audit courses
Z = prerequisite courses
Grade and number of units obtain from these courses are not considered
for graduation
iv) Advice and approval of the Academic Advisor.

- Approval from the Academic Advisor is required for the students
under Probation status before being allowed to register during the
OCR period. Probation students cannot assess E-Daftar for
registration.
- Approval from the Academic Advisor is not required for the students
under Active Status to register courses through E-Daftar.
v) Students are not allowed to register and to repeat any course that has
achieved a grade 'C' and above.
2.1.5 Information/Document Given To All Students Through Campus Online

Portal (www.campusonline.com.my)
i) The information of Academic Advisor.

ii) Academic information such as academic status, GPA value, CGPA
value and year of study.
iii) Cangred and Course Registration Form.
iv) List of courses offered from all schools/centres.
v) Teaching and Learning Timetable for all schools/centres/units from the
three campuses.
vi) List of pre-registered courses which have been added into the students
course registration record (if any).
vii) Reminders about the University course registration policies/general
requisites.
8
2.1.6 Registration of Language and Co-Curriculum Courses
a) Registration for Language courses through E-Daftar is allowed.
However, if any problem occurs, registration for language courses can still be
carried out / updated during the official period of OCR at the office of the
School of Language, Literacies & Translation.
All approval / registration / dropping / adding of the language courses are under
the responsibility and administration of the School of Language, Literacies &
Translation.
Any problems related to the registration of language courses can be made to the
School of Language, Literacies & Translation. The contact details are as follow:
General Office : 04-6534542 for Main
Malay Language Programme Chairperson : 04-6533974 Campus
English Language Programme Chairperson : 04-6533406 students
Foreign Language Programme Chairperson : 04-6533396
Engineering Campus Programme Chairperson : 04-5995407

Health Campus Programme Chairperson : 09-7671252
a) Registration for Co-Curriculum courses through E-Daftar is not allowed.
Registration for Co-Curriculum courses is either done through pre-registration

before the semester begins or during the first/second week of the semester. Co-
Curriculum courses will be included in the students course registration account
prior to the E-Daftar activity, if their pre-registration application successful.
All approval / registration / dropping / adding of the Co-Curriculum courses are

under the responsibility and administration of the Director of the Centre for Co-
Curriculum Programme for Main Campus (04-6535243/45/48), Coordinator of
the Co-Curriculum Programme for Engineering Campus (04-5995091),
Coordinator of the Co-Curriculum Programme for Health Campus (09-
7677547).
b) Dropping of Language and Co-Curriculum courses, if necessary, must be

made within the first week. After the first week, a fine of RM50.00 will be
charged.
9
2.1.7 Registration of Audit Course (Y code)
Registration for the Audit course (Y code) is not allowed in the E-

Daftar. It can only be made during the official period of OCR in the School
or Centre involved. Students who are interested must complete the course
registration form which can be printed from the Campus Online Portal or
obtained it directly from the School. Approval from the lecturers of the
course to be audited and the Dean / Deputy Dean (Academic) [signed and
stamped] in the course registration form are required.
Registration on Audit courses (Y code) is not included in the calculation of

the total registered workload units. Grades obtained from Audit course are
not considered in the calculation of CGPA and total units for graduation.
2.1.8 Registration of Prerequisite Course (Z code)
Registration of the Prerequisite courses (Z code) is included in the total

registered workload (unit). Grades obtained from the Prerequisite courses
are not considered in the calculation of CGPA and units for graduation.
2.1.9 Late Course Registration / Late Course Addition
Late course registration or addition is not allowed after the official period of
the OCR ends without any reasonable excuses. General information on this
matter is as follows:
i) Late course registration and addition are only allowed in the first to
the third week with the approval of the Dean. Students will be fined
RM50.00 if the reasons given are not reasonable.
ii) Application to add a course after the third week will not be
considered, except for the special cases approved by the University.
2.1.10 Dropping Courses

Dropping the course is allowed until the end of the sixth week.
For this purpose, students must meet the requirements set by the University
as follows: -
i) Dropping Course Form must be completed by the student and signed by

the lecturer of the course involved and the Dean / Deputy Dean of their
respective schools and submit it to the general office of the
School/Centre which is responsible of offering the courses involved.
10
ii) Students who wish to drop a language course must obtain the signature
and stamp of the Dean of the School of Language, Literacies and
Translation, as well as the signature and stamp of the Dean of their
respective schools.
iii) Students who wish to drop the Co-Curriculum courses must obtain the
approval of the Centre for Co-Curriculum Programme and the signature
and stamp of the Dean of their respective schools.
iv) The option for dropping courses cannot be misused. Lecturers have the
right not to certify the course that the student wish to drop if the student
is not serious, such as the record of attendance at lectures, tutorials and
practical is unsatisfactory, as well as poor performance in course work.
The student will be denied to sit for the examination and will be given
grade 'X' and is not allowed to repeat the course during the period of
Courses during the Long Vacation (KSCP).
2.1.11 Course Registration Confirmation Slip
Course registration confirmation slip that has been printed / obtained after
registering the course should be checked carefully to ensure no errors,
especially the code type of the registered course codes. Any data errors for
course registration must be corrected immediately whether during the period
of E-Daftar (for student with active status only) or during the period of OCR
at the Schools.
2.1.12 Revising and Updating Data / Information / Students Personal and

Academic Records
Personal and academic information for each student can be checked through
the Campus Online portal (campusonline.usm.my).
Students are advised to always check all the information displayed on this
website.
- Any application / notification for correction / updating of personal data

such as the spelling of names (names must be spelled as shown on the
Identification Card), Identification Card number and address
(permanent address and correspondence address) must be notified to the
office of the Student Data & Records Section.
- Any application / notification for correction of academic data such as

information on Major, Minor, MUET result and the course code should
be reported to the office of the Student Data & Records Section.
11
- Application / notification for correction of the examination/results data
should be reported to the office of the Examination and Graduation
Section.
2.1.13 Academic Advisor
Each School will appoint an Academic Advisor for each student. Academic
Advisors are comprised of academic staff (lecturers). Normally,
confirmation from Academic Advisors will be made known to every student
during the first semester in the first year of their studies.
Academic Advisors will advice the students under their responsibility on the
academic-related matters. Among the important advice for the student is the
registration planning for certain courses in each semester during the study
period. Before registering the course, students are advised to consult and
discuss with their Academic Advisor to determine the courses to be
registered in a semester.
Final year students are advised to consult their respective academic advisors
before registering via E-Daftar to ensure they fulfil the graduation
requirements. Students under the Probation status (P1/P2) should obtain the
approval from the Academic Advisor before they register for courses in a
semester through OCR at the School and they are not allowed to register
through E-Daftar.
2.2 Interpretation of Unit/Credit

a) Unit
Each course is given a value, which is called a UNIT. The unit is determined by
the scope of its syllabus and the workload for the students. In general, a unit is
defined as follows:
Type of Course Definition of Unit

Theory 1 unit is equivalent to 1 contact hour per
week for 13 - 14 weeks in one semester.
Practical/Laboratory 1 unit is equivalent to 1.5 contact hours per
week for 13 - 14 hours in one semester
Language Proficiency 1 unit is equivalent to 1.5 contact hours per
week for 13 - 14 weeks in one semester.
Industrial Training/ Teaching 1 unit is equivalent to 2 weeks of training.
Practice
12
b) Contact
Contact is defined as formal face-to-face meeting between an academic staff and

his/her students and it may take the form of lectures, tutorials, seminar,
laboratory and field work.
c) Accumulated Credit Unit
Units registered and passed are known as credits. To graduate, students must
accumulate the total number of credits stipulated for the program concerned.
2.3 Examination System
Examination would be held at the end of every semester. Students have to sit for
the examination of the courses they have registered. Students are required to
settle all due fees and fulfil the standing requirements for
lectures/tutorials/practical and other requirements before being allowed to sit for
the examination of courses they registered. Course evaluation will be based on
the two components of coursework and final examinations. Coursework
evaluation includes tests, essays, projects, assignments and participation in
tutorials.
Duration of Examination
Evaluated Courses Examination Duration

2 units 1 hour for coursework of more than 40%
2 units 2 hours for coursework of 40% and below
3 units or more 2 hours for coursework of more than 40%
3 units or more 3 hours for coursework of 40% and below
Barring from Examination
Students will be barred from sitting the final examination if they do not satisfy
the course requirements, such as absence from lectures and tutorials for at least
70%, and have not completed/fulfilled the required components of coursework.
Students will also be barred from sitting the final examination if they have not
settled the academic fees. A grade 'X' would be awarded for a course in which a
student is barred. Students will not be allowed repeating the course during
Course during the Long Vacation (KSCP).
13
Grade Point Average System
Student academic achievement for registered courses will be graded as follows:
Alphabetic
A A- B+ B B- C+ C C- D+ D D- F
Grade
Grade
4.00 3.67 3.33 3.00 2.67 2.33 2.00 1.67 1.33 1.00 0.67 0
Points
Students awarded with grade 'C-' and below for a particular course would
be given a chance to improve their grades by repeating the course during the
KSCP (See below) or normal semester. Students awarded with grade 'C' and
above for a particular course will not be allowed to repeat the course whether
during KSCP or normal semester.
The achievements of students in any semester are based on Grade Point

Average (GPA) achieved from all the registered courses in a particular
semester. GPA is the indicator to determine the academic performance of
students in any semester.
CGPA is the Cumulative Grade Point Average accumulated by a student from

one semester to another during the years of study.
The formula to compute GPA and CGPA is as follows:
n
Ui Mi
Grade Point Average = i=1
__________
n
Ui
i=1
where
n = Number of courses taken
Ui = Course units for course i
Mi = Grade point for course i
14
Example of calculation for GPA and CGPA:
Course Unit Grade Point Grade Total

(GP) (G ) GP
Semester I ABC XX1 4 3.00 B 12.00
ABC XX2 4 2.33 C+ 9.32
BCDXX3 3 1.67 C- 5.01
CDEXX4 4 2.00 C 8.00
EFGXX5 3 1.33 D+ 3.99
EFGXX6 2 2.67 B- 5.34
20 43.66
GPA = 43.66 = 2.18

20
Course Unit Grade Point Grade Total

(GP) (G ) GP
Semester II ABCXX7 3 1.00 D 3.00
ABBXX8 4 2.33 C+ 9.32
BBCXX9 4 2.00 C 8.00
BCBX10 4 2.67 B- 10.68
XYZXX1 3 3.33 B+ 9.99
18 40.99
GPA = 40.99 = 2.28

18
CGPA = Total Accumulated GP 43.66 + 40.99 84.65
Total Accumulated Unit = 20 + 18 = 38 = 2.23
From the above examples, the CGPA is calculated as the total grade
point accumulated for all the registered courses and divided by the total number
of the registered units.
15
Courses During the Long Vacation (Kursus Semasa Cuti Panjang) (KSCP)
KSCP is offered to students who have taken a course earlier and obtained
a grade of 'C-', 'D+', 'D', 'D-', 'F' and 'DK' only. Students who have obtained 'X'
or 'F*' grade are not allowed to take the course during KSCP.
The purpose of KSCP is to:
i) Give an opportunity to students who are facing time constraints for

graduation.
ii) Assist students who need to accumulate a few more credits for graduation.
iii) Assist "probationary" students to enhance their academic status.
iv) Assist students who need to repeat a prerequisite course, which is not
offered in the following semester.
However, this opportunity is only given to students who are taking courses that
they have attempted before and achieved a grade as stipulated above, provided
that the course is being offered. Priority is given to the final year students.
Usually, formal lectures are not held, and teaching is via tutorials.
The duration of KSCP is 3 weeks, i.e. 2 weeks of tutorial and 1 week of

examination, all held during the long vacation. The KSCP schedule is available
in the University's Academic Calendar.
The Implementation KSCP
a) Students are allowed to register a maximum of 3 courses and the

total number of units registered must not exceed 10.
b) Marks/grades for coursework are taken from the highest marks/the best
grades obtained in a particular course in the normal semester before KSCP.
The final overall grade is determined as follows:
Final Grade = The best coursework marks or grade + Marks or grade

for KSCP examination
c) GPA calculation involves the LATEST grades (obtained in KSCP) and also
involves courses taken in the second semester and those repeated in KSCP.
If the GPA during KSCP as calculated above is 2.00 or better, the
academic status will be active, even though the academic status for the
second semester was on probation status. However, if the GPA for KSCP
(as calculated above) is 1.99 or below, the academic status will remain as
probation status for the second semester.
16
d) Graduating students (those who have fulfilled the graduation requirements)
in the second semester are not allowed to register for KSCP.
Academic Status
Active Status: Any student who achieves a GPA of 2.00 and above for any
examination in a semester will be recognised as ACTIVE and be allowed to
pursue his/her studies for the following semester.
Probation Status: A probation status is given to any student who achieves a GPA
of 1.99 and below. A student who is under probation status for three consecutive
semesters (P1, P2, FO) will not be allowed to pursue his/her studies at the
university. On the other hand, if the CGPA is 2.00 and above, the student
concerned will be allowed to pursue his/her studies and will be maintained at P2
status.
Without any prejudice to the above regulations, the University Examination

Council has the absolute right to terminate any student's studies if his/her
academic achievement do not satisfy and fulfil the accumulated minimum credit
in line with the number of semesters completed by the student as given in the
table below.
Total Accumulated Minimum

Number of Semesters Credit Units
Pure Applied Professional
nd
End of 2 semester 15 15 16
th
th
th
The University Examination Council has the right to terminate any student's
studies due to certain reasons (a student who has not registered for the courses,
has not attended examination without valid reasons), as well as medical reasons
can be disqualified from pursuing his/her studies.
Examination Result
A provisional result (pass/fail) through the Tele-academic line: (600-83-7899),

Campus Online Portal and short message service (SMS) will usually be released
and announced after the School Examination Council meeting and presumably
one month after final examination.
17
Full result (grade) can be enquired through the Tele-academic line: (600-83-
7899), Campus Online Portal and short message service (SMS) will be released
and announced after the University Examination Council meeting and is usually
two weeks after the provisional results are released.
The official semester results (SEMGRED) will be issued to students during the
second week of the following semester.
2.4 Unit Exemption/Credit Transfer
Definition of Unit Exemption
Unit exemption is defined as the total number of units given to students who are
pursuing their studies in USM that are exempted from the graduation
requirements. Students only need to accumulate the remaining units for
graduating purpose. Only passes or course grades accumulated or acquired in
USM will be included in the calculation of the Cumulative Grade Point Average
(CGPA) for graduation purpose.
Regulations and Implementation of Unit Exemption
a) Diploma holders from recognised Public and Private Institutions of Higher

Learning
i) Unit exemption can only be given to courses taken at diploma level.
ii) Courses for unit exemption may be combined (in two or more
combinations) in order to obtain exemption of one course at degree
level. However if the School would like to approve only one course at
the diploma level for unit exemption of one course at degree level, the
course at diploma level must be equivalent to the degree course and has
the same or more units.
iii) Courses taken during employment (in service) for diploma holders
cannot be considered for unit exemption.
iv) The minimum achievement at diploma level that can be considered for
unit exemption is at least 'C' grade or 2.0 or equivalent.
v) The total number of semesters exempted should not exceed two

semesters.
18
vi) In order to obtain unit exemption for industrial training, a student must
have work experience continuously for at least two years in the area. If
the student has undergone industrial training during the diploma level
study, a student must have work experience for at least one year. The
students are also required to produce the report on the level and type of
work performed. Industrial training unit exemption cannot be
considered for semester exemption as the industrial training is carried
out during the long vacation in USM.
vii) Unit exemption for university and option courses can only be given for
courses such as Bahasa Malaysia (LKM400), English Language,
Islamic and Asian Civilisations and as well as co-curriculum.
b) IPTS (Private Institution of Higher Learning) USM Supervised/External

Diploma Graduates
i) Students who are IPTS USM supervised/external diploma graduates are

given unit exemption as stipulated by the specific programme of study.
Normally, unit exemption in this category is given as a block according
to the agreement between USM (through School that offers the
programme) with the IPTS.
c) Students from recognised local or foreign IPTA (Public Institution of

Higher Learning)/IPTS who are studying at the Bachelor Degree level may
apply to study in this university and if successful, can be considered for unit
exemptions subject to the following conditions:
i) Courses taken in the previous IPT are equivalent (at least 50% of the
course must be the same) with courses offered in USM.
ii) Students taking courses at advanced diploma level in IPT that is

recognised to be equivalent to the Bachelor Degree course at USM may
be considered for unit exemption as in c) i).
iii) The total maximum unit exemption allowed should not exceed one third
of the total unit requirement for graduation.
19
Total Number of Exempted Semesters
Semester exemption is based on the total unit exempted as below:-
Total Unit Exempted Total Semester Exempted

<9 -
9-32 1
>32 2
Application Procedure for Unit Exemption
Any student who would like to apply for exemption unit is required to complete
the Unit Exemption Form which can be obtained at the counter of Admission and
Enrolments Unit or the respective schools.
The form must to be approved by the Dean/Deputy Dean of the School prior to
the submission to the Admission and Enrolments Unit for consideration.
Definition of Credit Transfer
Credit transfer is defined as the recognition of a total number of credits obtained

by USM students taking courses in other IPTA (Public Institution of Higher
Learning) within the period of study at USM, and is combined with credits
obtained at USM to fulfil units requirement for his/her programme of study. The
transferred examination result or grades obtained in courses taken at other IPTA
will be combined in the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) calculation.
Category of Students Who Can Be Considered for Credit Transfer
USM full-time Bachelor Degree level students who would like to attend specific
Bachelor Degree level courses at other IPTA.
USM full-time diploma level students who would like to attend specific diploma
level courses at other IPTA.
Conditions
a) Basic and Core Courses
i) Credit transfer can only be considered for credits obtained from other
courses in other IPTA that are equivalent (at least 50% of the content
are the same) with the courses offered by the programme.
20
ii) Courses that can be transferred are only courses that have the same
number of units or more. For equivalent courses but with less number
of units, credit transfers can be approved by combining a few courses.
Credits transferred are the same as the course units as offered in USM.
Average grade of the combined course will be taken into account in
CGPA calculation.
b) Elective or Option Courses
i) Students may attend any appropriate courses in other IPTA subject to

permission from the School as well as the approval of other IPTA.
ii) The transferred credits are credits obtained from courses at other IPTA.
No course equivalence condition is required.
c) Minor Courses
i) For credit transfer of minor courses, the School should adhere to either
conditions (a) or (b), and take into account of the programme
requirement.
d) The total maximum units transferred should not exceed one third of the total
number of units for the programme.
e) Credit exemption from other IPTA can be considered only once for each
IPTA.
f) The examination results obtained by a student taken at other IPTA will be

taken into account for graduation purpose. Grade obtained for each course
will be combined with the grades obtained at USM for CGPA calculation.
g) Students who have applied and approved for credit transfer are not allowed
to cancel the approval after the examination result is obtained.
h) Students are required to register courses at other IPTA with not less than the
total minimum units as well as not exceeding the maximum units as
stipulated in their programme of study. However, for specific cases (e.g.
students on extended semester and only require a few units for graduation),
the Dean may approve such students to register less than the minimum and
the semester will not be counted in the residential requirement. In this case,
the CGPA calculation will be carried out as in KSCP.
i) USM students attending courses at other IPTA and if failed in any courses
are allowed to resit the examination if there is such provision in that IPTA.
21
j) If the method of calculation of examination marks in the other IPTA is not
the same as in USM, a grade conversion method will be carried out
according to the existing scales.
k) USM students who have registered courses at other IPTA and decided to
return to study in USM, must adhere to the existing course registration
conditions in USM.
Application Procedure for Attending Courses/Credit Transfer
USM students who would like to attend courses/credit transfer at other IPTAs
should apply using Unit Exemption Form.
The application form should be submitted for the Dean's approval for the
programme of study within three months before the application is submitted to
other IPTA for consideration.
2.5 Academic Integrity
"Integrity without knowledge is weak and useless. Knowledge without integrity

is dangerous and weak" Samuel Johnson
Being a student of the University Sains Malaysia requires a firm adherence to the
basic values, integrity, purpose and meaning of a university education. The most
essential values in academia are rooted on the principles of truth seeking in
knowledge and honesty with regards to the intellectual property of oneself and of
others. Thus, students must bear the responsibility of maintaining these
principles in all work done in their academic endeavour.
Academic dishonesty violates the fundamental purpose of preserving and

maintaining the integrity of university education and will not be tolerated. The
following, although not exhaustive, are examples of practices or actions that are
considered dishonest acts in academic pursuit.
(a) Cheating
Cheating is the unauthorised use of information or other aids in any

academic exercise. There are numerous "infamous" ways and methods of
cheating including:
Copying from others during a test or an exam.

Using unauthorised materials or devices (calculator, PDA, mobile
phone, pager, etc.) during a test or an exam.
Asking or allowing another student to take a test or an exam for you and
vice-versa.
Sharing answers or programmes for an assignment or project.
22
Tampering with marked/graded work after it has been returned, then
resubmitting it for remarking/regrading.
Allowing others to do the research, writing, programming, or other
types of assignment.
Submitting identical or similar work in more than one course without
consulting or prior permission from the lecturers involved.
Below is an excerpt from the University and University College Act 1971,
Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding conduct
during examination (Part II, Provision 8):
Conduct during examination
8. No student can-
(a) take any form of books, worksheets, documents, pictures or any
other materials, other than those authorised by the examiner, into or
out of any examination room, or receive any form of books,
worksheets, documents, pictures or any other materials from
outsiders when in examination room. Students can receive any form
of books, worksheets, documents, pictures or any other materials
recommended by the examiner or the Board of Examiners, and
authorized by the Vice-Chancellor
(b) write, or have somebody else to write, any information or to draw
diagrams which can be related to the examination taken by the
student, on any parts of the body, or on the clothings worn by the
student.
(c) contact with other students during an examination through any form
of communication, or
(d) cheat or try to cheat or act in any way that can be interpreted as
cheating.
(b) Plagiarism
Plagiarism is "academic theft". It violates the intellectual property rights of

the author. Simply put, it is the use, in part or whole, of other's words or
ideas and claiming it as yours without proper attribution to the original
author. It includes:
Copying and pasting information, graphics or media from the Internet

into your work without citing the source.
Paraphrasing or summarising other's written or spoken words that are
not common knowledge, without referencing the source.
Not putting quote marks around parts of the source that you copy
exactly.
Using someone else's work or acquiring papers, assignment, project or
research you did not do and turning it in as if you had done the work
yourself.
23
Giving incorrect information about the source of reference.
Not acknowledging collaborators in an assignment, paper, project or
research.
Plagiarism is, however, often misunderstood. There are numerous sources in

the Internet that describe plagiarism and explain acceptable ways for using
borrowed words. Students should explore the relevant materials.
Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding
prohibition against plagiarism (Part II, Provision 6):
Prohibitions against plagiarism
6. (1) A student shall not plagiarise any idea, writing, data or invention
belonging to another person.
(2) For the purpose of this rule, plagiarism includes:
(a) the act of taking an idea, writing, data or invention of another

person and claiming that the idea, writing, data or invention is
the result of one's own findings or creation; or
(b) an attempt to make out or the act of making out, in such a way,
that one is the original source or the creator of an idea,
writing, data or invention which has actually been taken from
some other source.
(3) Without prejudice to the generality of sub rule (2), a student

plagiarises when he/she:
(a) publishes, with himself/herself as the author, an abstract,

article, scientific or academic paper, or book which is wholly
or partly written by some other person;
(b) incorporates himself/herself or allows himself/herself to be
incorporated as a co-author of an abstract, article, scientific or
academic paper, or book, when he/she has not at all made any
written contribution to the abstract, article, scientific or
academic paper, or book;
(c) forces another person to include his/her name in the list of co-
researchers for a particular research project or in the list of
co-authors for a publication when he/she has not made any
contribution which may qualify him/her as a co-researcher or
co-author;
(d) extract academic data which are the result of research
undertaken by some other person, such as laboratory findings
24
or field work findings or data obtained through library
research, whether published or unpublished, and incorporate
those data as part of his/her academic research without giving
due acknowledgement to the actual source;
(e) uses research data obtained through collaborative work with
some other person, whether or not that other person is a staff
member or a student of the University, as part of another
distinct personal academic research of his/her, or for a
publication In his/her own name as sole author, without
obtaining the consent of his/her co-researchers prior to
embarking on his/her personal research or prior to publishing
the data;
(f) transcribes the ideas or creations of others kept in whatever
form, whether written, printed or available in electronic form,
or in slide form, or in whatever form of teaching or research
apparatus, or in any other form, and claims whether directly or
indirectly that he/she is the creator of that idea or creation;
(g) translates the writing or creation of another person from one
language to another whether or not wholly or partly, and
subsequently presents the translation in whatever form or
manner as his/her own writing or creation; or
(h) extracts ideas from another person's writing or creation and
makes certain modifications without due reference to the
original source and rearranges them in such a way that it
appears as if he/she is the creator of those ideas.
(c) Fabrication
Unauthorised invention, alteration, falsification or misleading use of data,

information or citation in any academic work constitutes fabrication.
Fabricated information neither represent the student's own effort nor the
truth concerning a particular investigation or study thus violates the
principle of truth seeking in knowledge. Some examples are:
Making up or changing of data or result, or using someone else's result,

in an experiment, assignment or research.
Citing sources that are not actually used or referred to.
Intentional listing of incorrect or fictitious references.
Falsifying of academic records or documents to gain academic
advantage.
Forging signatures of authorisation in any academic record or other
university document.
25
(d) Collusion
The School does not differentiate between those who commit an act of
academic dishonesty with those who knowingly allow or help others in
performing those acts. Some examples of collusion include:
Paying, bribing or allowing someone to do an assignment, test/exam,

project or research for you.
Doing or assisting others in an assignment, test/exam, project or
research for something in return.
Permitting your work to be submitted as the work of others.
Providing material, information, or sources to others knowing that such
aids could be used in any dishonest act.
(e) Unfair Advantage
A student may obtain an unfair advantage over another, which is also a

breach of academic integrity, in several ways including:
Gaining access to, stealing, reproducing or circulating of test or exam

material prior to its authorised time.
Depriving others of the use of library material by stealing, defacing,
destroying or hiding it.
Intentionally interfering with other's effort to do their academic work.
Altering or destroying work or computer files/programmes that belong
to others or those that are meant for the whole class.
(f) Consequences of Violating Academic Integrity
Both students and academic staff must assume the responsibility of

protecting and upholding the academic integrity of the university. In the
event that a student encounters any incident that denotes academic
dishonesty, the student is expected to report it to the relevant lecturer. The
lecturer is then responsible to substantiate the violation and is encouraged to
confront the perpetrator(s) to discuss the facts surrounding the allegation,
and report the matter to the Deputy Deans or the Dean of the School.
If the lecturer found that the student is guilty, an appropriate punitive

grading may be applied, depending on the extent of the violation. Examples
of punitive grading are giving lower grade or "F" on the assignment, test,
project, or lower grade or "F" for the whole course.
If the violation is deemed serious by the lecturer, the matter will be brought
to the attention of the University Disciplinary Authority where appropriate
action will be taken. If a student is caught in an examination, the University
26
Examination Board will pursue the matter according to the university's
procedure. The consequence then may range from a warning, fine not
exceeding RM200, exclusion from any specific part or parts of the
University for a specified period, suspension from being a student of the
University for a specified period, or expulsion from the University
(University and University College Act 1971, Universiti Sains Malaysia,
Discipline of Students, Rule 1999).
Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding
Disciplinary Punishment (Part II, Provision 48):
Disciplinary punishment
48. A student who commits a disciplinary offense under these Rules and
found guilty of the offense can be punished according to any one or any
two or more of the following appropriate actions;
(a) warning;
(b) fine not more than two hundred ringgit;
(c) banned from entering any or certain premises of the University for
a specified period;
(d) suspended from being a student of the University for a specified
period;
(e) dismissed from the University
2.6 USM Mentor Programme
Mentor Programme acts as a support-aid that involves the staff undergoing

special training as a consultant and guide to USM community who would like to
share their feelings and any psychosocial aspects that could harm their social
functions. This programme manages psychosocial issues in a more effective
manner and finally could improve the well-being of individuals in order to
achieve life of better quality.
Objectives
(a) As a co-operation and mutual assistance mechanism for dealing with stress,
psychosocial problems and many more in order to reinforce the well-being
of the USM community.
(b) To inculcate the spirit of unity and the concept of helping one another by
appointing a well-trained mentor as a social agent who promotes caring
society for USM
(c) To produce more volunteers to assist those who need help
(d) To prevent damages in any psychosocial aspects before they reach a critical
stage.
For more information, please visit www.usm.my/mentor
27
2.7 Student Exchange Programme
(a) Study Abroad Scheme
The student exchange programme is an opportunity for USM students to study

one or two semesters abroad at any USM partners institutions. Ideally,
students are encouraged to participate in the exchange programme within their
third to fifth semester (3 years degree programme) and within third to seventh
semester (4 years degree programme).
Studies abroad are planned beforehand with the Dean or Deputy Dean of
the respective School, and with the International Office. Credits earned at
an associate university are transferable as a part of credit accumulation for
graduation.
(b) Student Exchange Programme between Local Higher Education

Institutions (RPPIPT)
This is a programme that allows students of public higher learning institutions to

do an exchange programme for a semester between the public higher institutions
itself. Students can choose any relevant courses and apply for credit transfers.
For more information, please visit http://www.usm.my/io or contact the

Academic Collaboration Unit, International Office at +604 653 2775/2778.
28
3.0 UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Summary of University Requirements
Students are required to take 15 - 22 units of the following University/Option

courses for University requirements:
University Requirements Unit

1 Bahasa Malaysia 2
2 English Language 4
3 Local Students 6
Islamic and Asian Civilisations (TITAS) (2 Units)
Ethnic Relations (2 Units)
Core Entrepreneurship* (2 Units)
International Students
Malaysian Studies (4 Units)
Option/Bahasa Malaysia/English Language (2 Units)
4 Third Language/Co-Curriculum /Skill Course/Options 3 10

Students have to choose one of the followings:
Third Language Package
Co-Curriculum** (1-6 units)
Skill Course/Options
Total 15 22
* Students from Schools which have a similar course as this are exempted from
following this course. The units should be replaced by an option course.
** Students from the School of Education are required to choose a uniformed body co-
curriculum package. Students from the School of Medical Sciences and School of
Dentistry are required to register two (2) units of Co-Curriculum course in year Two.
Students from the School of Health Sciences are required to register one (1) unit of
Co-Curriculum course.
Details of the University requirements are given in the following sections.
3.2 Bahasa Malaysia

(a) Local Students
The requirements are as follows:
LKM400/2 - Bahasa Malaysia IV
29
All Malaysian students must take LKM400 and pass with the minimum of grade
C in order to graduate.
Entry requirements for Bahasa Malaysia are as follows:
No Qualification Grade Level of Type Units Status

Entry
1. (a) SPM/MCE/SC 1-6 LKM400 U 2 Graduation
(or equivalent requirement
qualification) P/S
(b) STPM/HSC
(or equivalent
qualification)
Note: To obtain credit units for Bahasa Malaysia courses, a minimum grade
of C is required.
Students may obtain advice from the School of Languages, Literacies
and Translation if they have different Bahasa Malaysia qualification
from the above.
(b) International Students
International students pursuing Bachelors degrees in Science,

Accounting, Arts (ELLS), Education (TESL) and Housing, Building
and Planning.
All international students in this category are required to take the following
courses:
Code Type Units

LKM100 U 2
International students (non-Indonesian) pursuing Bachelors degrees in

Arts.
International students in this category are required to take and pass three
Intensive Malay Language courses before they commence their Bachelors
degree programmes.
Code Course Duration

LKM101 Bahasa Malaysia Persediaan I 4 months
LKM102 Bahasa Malaysia Persediaan II 4 months
LKM201 Bahasa Malaysia Pertengahan 4 months
30
The Bahasa Malaysia graduation requirement for this category of students is as
follows:
Code Type Units

LKM300 U 2
International students (Indonesian) pursuing Bachelors degrees in Arts.
The Bahasa Malaysia graduation requirement for this category of students is as

follows:
Code Type Units

LKM200 U 2
LKM300 U 2
Note: Students must pass with a minimum grade of C for type U courses.
3.3 English Language
All Bachelors degree students must take 4 units of English Language courses in
fulfillment of the University requirement for graduation.
(a) Entry Requirements for English Language Courses
No English Language Grade Level of Status

Qualification Entry
1. *MUET Band 6 LHP Compulsory/
LSP401/402/403/404 A-C 451/452/453/ Option/Type U
Discretion of Dean 454/455/456/ (2 Units)
457/458/459
2. *MUET Band 5 LSP Compulsory/
LSP300 A-C 401/402/403/ Type U
Discretion of Dean 404 (2 Units)
3. *MUET Band 4 LSP300 Compulsory/
LMT100 A-C Type U
Discretion of Dean (2 Units)
4. *MUET Band 3/2/1 LMT100/ Pre-requisite/
Discretion of Dean (Score Re-sit MUET Type Z
0 - 179) (2 Units)
* MUET: Malaysia University English Test.

Students may obtain advice from the School of Languages, Literacies and
Translation if they have different English Language qualification from the above.
31
Note:
Students are required to accumulate four (4) units of English for graduation.
In order to obtain units in English Language courses, students have to pass with
a minimum grade of C.
Students with a Score 260 - 300 (Band 6) in MUET must accumulate the 4 units
of English from the courses in the post-advanced level
(LHP451/452/453/454/455/456/457/ 458/459*). They can also take foreign
language courses to replace their English language units but they must first
obtain a written consent from the Dean of the School of Languages, Literacies
and Translation.
(Please use the form that can be obtained from the School of Languages,
Literacies and Translation.)
[*The number of units for LHP457 is 4 and for LHP451, 452, 453, 454, 455,
456, 458 and 459 is 2.]
Students with a score of 179 and below in MUET are required to resit MUET to
improve their score to Band 4 or take LMT100 and pass with a minimum grade
of C.
(b) English Language Courses (Compulsory English Language Units)
The English Language courses offered as University courses are as follows:
No Code/Unit Course Title School (If Applicable)

1. LMT100/2 Preparatory Students from all Schools
English
2. LSP300/2 Academic Students from all Schools
English
3. LSP401/2 General English Students from:
School of Education Studies (Arts)
School of Fine Arts
School of Humanities
School of Social Sciences
4. LSP402/2 Scientific and Students from:
Medical English School of Biological Sciences
School of Physics
School of Chemical Sciences
School of Mathematical Sciences
School of Industrial Technology
School of Education Studies (Science)
School of Medical Sciences
School of Health & Dental Sciences
School of Pharmaceutical Sciences
32
5. LSP403/2 Business and Students from:
Communication School of Management
English School of Communication
6. LSP404/2 Technical and Students from:
Engineering School of Computer Sciences
English School of Housing, Building and
Planning
Schools of Engineering
7. LDN 101/2 English For Students from School of Health
Nursing I Sciences
8. LDN 201/2 English For Students from School of Health
Nursing II Sciences
3.4 Local Students - Islamic and Asian Civilisations/Ethnic Relations/Core

Entrepreneurship
(a) Islamic and Asian Civilisations (The course is conducted in Bahasa

Malaysia)
The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum grade of C):
HTU 223 Islamic and Asian Civilisation (TITAS) (2 units)
This course aims to increase students knowledge on history, principles, values,

main aspect of Malay civilization, Islamic civilization and its culture. With the
academic exposure to cultural issues and civilization in Malaysia, it is hoped that
students will be more aware of issues that can contribute to the cultivation of the
culture of respect and harmony among the plural society of Malaysia.
Among the topics in this course are Interaction among Various Civilization,
Islamic Civilization, Malay Civilization, Contemporary Challenges faced by the
Islamic and Asian Civilization and Islamic Hadhari Principles.
(b) Ethnic Relations (The course is conducted in Bahasa Malaysia)
SHE 101 Ethnic Relations (2 units)
This course is an introduction to ethnic relations in Malaysia. This course is

designed with 3 main objectives: (1) to introduce students to the basic concept
and the practices of social accord in Malaysia, (2) to reinforce basic
understanding of challenges and problems in a multi-ethnic society, and (3) to
33
provide an understanding and awareness in managing the complexity of ethnic
relations in Malaysia. At the end of this course, it is hoped that students will be
able to identify and apply the skills to issues associated with ethnic relations in
Malaysia.
(c) Core Entrepreneurship (The course is conducted in Bahasa Malaysia)
WUS 101 Core Entrepreneurship (2 units)
This course aims to provide basic exposure to students in the field of

entrepreneurship and business, with emphasis on the implementation of the
learning aspects while experiencing the process of executing business projects in
campus. The mode of teaching is through interactive lectures, practical, business
plan proposal, execution of entrepreneurial projects and report presentations.
Practical experiences through hands-on participation of students in business
projects management will generate interest and provide a clearer picture of
entrepreneurship world. The main learning outcome is the assimilation of culture
and entrepreneurship work ethics in their everyday life. This initiative is made to
open the minds and arouse the spirit of entrepreneurship among target groups
that possess the potentials to become successful entrepreneurs. By exposing
entrepreneurial knowledge to all students, it is hoped that it will accelerate the
effort to increase the number of middle class entrepreneurs in the country.
For more information, please refer to the Co-curriculum Program Reference

Book.
3.5 International Students - Malaysian Studies/Option
(a) Malaysian Studies
The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum grade of C) for all
international students:
SEA205E - Malaysian Studies (4 Units)
This course investigates the structure of the Malaysian system of government

and the major trends in contemporary Malaysia. Emphasis will be given both to
current issues in Malaysian politics and the historical and economic
developments and trends of the country. The discussion begins with a review of
the independence process. An analysis of the formation and workings of the
major institutions of government parliament, judiciary, bureaucracy, and the
electoral and party systems will follow this. The scope and extent of Malaysian
34
democracy will be considered, especially in light of current changes and
developments in Malaysian politics. The second part of the course focuses on
specific issues: ethnic relations, national unity and the national ideology;
development and political change; federal-state relations; the role of religion in

Malaysian politics; politics and business; Malaysia in the modern world system;
civil society; law, justice and order; and directions for the future.
(b) Option/Bahasa Malaysia/English Language (2 Units)
International students need to fulfill a further 2 units of option course or

additional Bahasa Malaysia/English Language course.
3.6 Third Language/Co-Curriculum/Skill Courses/Options

Students have to choose one of the followings (A/B/C):
(A) Third Language Package (6 Units)

Third Language Courses are offered as University courses. They are
offered as a package of three (3) levels, 2 units per level. The total
number of units per package is 6. Students are requested to complete all
levels (3 semesters). The packages offered are as follows:
Commn. Commn. Commn. Commn. Commn.

Arabic Chinese Japanese German Korean
LTA100/2 LTC100/2 LTJ100/2 LTG100/2 LTK100/2
Commn. Commn. Commn. Commn.

French Spanish Tamil Thai
LTP100/2 LTE100/2 LTT100/2 LTS100/2
LTP200/2 LTE200/2 LTT200/2 LTS200/2
LTP300/2 LTE300/2 LTT300/2 LTS300/2
(B) Uniformed/Seni Silat Cekak Co-Curriculum Package (4 - 6 Units)

Students who choose to take packaged co-curriculum courses are required
to complete all levels of the package. It is compulsory for students from
the School of Education to choose a uniformed body co-curriculum
package from the list below (excluding Seni Silat Cekak). The co-
curriculum packages offered are as follows:
35
Armed Uniformed/Seni Silat Cekak Co-Curriculum Package
(6 Units) (3 years)
PALAPES PALAPES PALAPES SUKSIS Seni Silat

Tentera Tentera Tentera (Student Cekak
Darat Laut Udara Police
(Army) (Navy) (Air Force) Volunteer)
WTD102/2 WTL102/2 WTU102/2 WPD101/2 WCC123/2
Unarmed Uniformed Co-Curriculum Package (4 Units) (2 Years)
Kelana Siswa Bulan Sabit Merah Ambulans St. John

(Rover Training) (Red Crescent) (St. John Ambulance)
WLK101/2 WBM101/2 WJA101/2
WLK201/2 WBM201/2 WJA201/2
Unarmed Uniformed Co-Curriculum Package (2 Units) (1 Year)
SISPA (Siswa Siswi Pertahanan Awam) (Public Defense)

(offered in Health Campus only)
WLK101/2
WLK201/2
(C) Co-Curriculum/Skill Course/Options (1 6 Units)
All students are encouraged to follow the co-curriculum courses and are
given a maximum total of 6 units for Community Service, Culture,
Sports, Innovation & Initiatives and Leadership (Students from the
School of Medical Sciences and School of Dentistry are required to
register for two (2) units of Co-Curriculum course in Year Two).
(Students from the School of Health Sciences must take at least one of
the co-curriculum courses while those from the School of Education
must take the uniformed co-curriculum package [excluding Seni Silat
Cekak]). Students who do not enroll for any co-curriculum courses or
who enroll for only a portion of the 3 units need to replace these units
with skill/option courses. The co-curriculum, skill and option courses
offered are as follows:
(i) Community Service, Culture, Sports, Innovation & Initiatives and

Leadership Co-Curriculum Courses
36
Packaged
(Students are required to complete all levels)
Khidmat Masyarakat Jazz Band Karate Taekwondo
(Community Service) (3 Years) (3 Semesters) (3 Semesters)
(2 Years)
WKM101/1 WCC108/1 WSC108/1 WSC115/1
WKM201/1 WCC208/1 WSC208/1 WSC215/1
WCC308/1 WSC308/1 WSC315/1
Non-Packaged (1 Semester)
Culture Sports
WCC103/1 - Catan (Painting) WSC105/1 - Bola Tampar (Volley
Ball)
WCC105/1 - Gamelan WSC106/1 - Golf
WCC107/1 - Guitar WSC110/1 - Memanah (Archery)
WCC109/1 - Koir (Choir) WSC111/1 - Ping Pong
(Table Tennis)
WCC110/1 - Kraftangan WSC112/1 - Renang (Swimming)
(Handcrafting)
WCC115/1 - Tarian Moden WSC113/1 - Aerobik (Aerobic)
(Modern Dance)
WCC116/1 - Tarian Tradisional WSC114/1 - Skuasy (Squash)
(Traditional Dance)
WCC117/1 - Teater Moden WSC116/1 - Tenis (Tennis)
(Modern Theatre)
WCC118/1 - Wayang Kulit Melayu WSC119/1 - Badminton
(Malay Shadow Play)
WCC119/1 - Senaman Qigong Asas WSC122/1 - Selaman SCUBA
(Basic Qigong Exercise) (SCUBA Diving)
WCC219 Senaman Qigong WSC123/1 - Kriket (Cricket)
Pertengahan (Intermediate
Qigong Exercise)
WCC124/1 Kompang Berlagu WCC124/1 Sepak Takraw
WCC122/1 - Seni Memasak WSC 125/1 Futsal
(Culinary Art)
WCC127/1 Kesenian Muzik WSC 126/1 Bola Jaring (Netball)
Nasyid (Nasyid Musical
Art)
37
Innovation & Initiative Leadership (Kepimpinan)
WCC120/1 - Canting Batik (Batik WSC 127/1 Pengurusan Acara 1
Painting) (Event Management 1)
WCC121/1 - Seni Khat WSC 227/1 Pengurusan Acara 2
(Calligraphic Art) (Event Management 2)
WCC125/1 Seni Wau Tradisional
(Traditional Kite Art)
WCC128 Seni Sulaman & Manik
Labuci (Embroidery &
Beads Sequins Art)
WCC 130 Seni Fotografi SLR
Digital (Digital SLR
Photography Art)
(ii) HTV201/2 - Teknik Berfikir (Thinking Techniques)
(iii) Other option/skill courses as recommended or required by the

respective school (if any)
(iv) English Language Courses
The following courses may be taken as university courses to fulfill

the compulsory English Language requirements (for Band 5 and
Band 6 in MUET) or as skill/option courses:
No Code/Unit Course Title

1. LHP451/2 Effective Reading
2. LHP452/2 Business Writing
3. LHP453/2 Creative Writing
4. LHP454/2 Academic Writing
5. LHP455/2 English Pronunciation Skills
6. LHP456/2 Spoken English
7. LHP457/4 Speech Writing and Public Speaking
8. LHP458/2 English for Translation
(Offered only in Semester II)
9. LHP459/2 English for Interpretation
(Offered only in Semester I)
38
(v) Foreign Language Courses
The foreign language courses offered by the School of Languages,

Literacies and Translation can be taken by students as option or
compulsory courses to fulfill the number of units required for
graduation. Students are not allowed to register for more than one
foreign language course per semester. They must complete at least
two levels of a foreign language course before they are allowed to
register for another foreign language course. However, students are
not required to complete all four levels of one particular foreign
language course. The foreign language courses offered are as
follows:
Arabic Chinese Japanese German Spanish

LAA100/2 LAC100/2 LAJ100/2 LAG100/2 LAE100/2
French Thai Tamil Korean

LAP100/2 LAS100/2 LAT100/2 LAK100/2
LAP200/2 LAS200/2 LAT200/2 LAK200/2
LAP300/2 LAS300/2 LAT300/2 LAK300/2
LAP400/2 LAS400/2
39
SCHOOL OF CHEMICAL
SCIENCES
40
SCHOOL OF CHEMICAL SCIENCES
VISION
To realise the aspiration of Universiti Sains Malaysia in Transforming Higher Education

for a Sustainable Tomorrow.
MISSION
To produce chemistry graduates who are knowledgeable, highly skilled, well-

mannered and possess excellent work ethics suited for the requirements of the
public and industrial sectors.
To provide quality education and chemistry students.
To instill awareness among chemistry students towards the welfare of society.
To provide modern facilities for chemistry teaching and research.
To attract excellent students from Malaysia and overseas to do chemistry.
OBJECTIVES
To provide a broad, balanced and in depth education in chemistry and related

areas at the undergraduate level.
To develop the students into graduates with theoretical and practical knowledge
and the ability to apply the knowledge to employment or further studies in
chemistry or other related post graduate programmes.
To develop in students various skills including practical, social, communicative,
leadership and entrepreneurship skills.
To develop in students the ability to assess and solve problems critically,
logically and creatively.
41
INTRODUCTION
The School of Chemical Sciences (SCS), established in 1969, is one of the pioneering
Schools of USM. With an academic staff of more than 30 and over 50 supporting staff,
the School has been entrusted to provide professional training in chemistry to meet the
demands of the industries and society.
The programme is designed not only to produce graduates with a solid knowledge of
Chemistry but also to equip them with attributes so that they can adapt readily to a
dynamic and rapidly developing working environment. The academic programme
[Bachelor of Science with Honours, B.Sc. (Hons) and Bachelor of Applied Science
B.App.Sc.(Hons)] from the School of Chemical Sciences, USM is planned to produce
graduates who are knowledgeable, highly skilled and well-mannered and possess
excellent work ethics suited for the requirements of the industrial and public sector.
In line with this aspiration, the School of Chemical Sciences has designed courses in such
a manner that they can be modified and adjusted from time to time to suit the requirement
of an unpredictable future. The School follows a system of studies which is liberal and
multi-disciplinary in nature.
PROGRAMMES OFFERED
The School offers two undergraduate programmes leading to:

Bachelor of Science (B.Sc.) with Honours degree
Bachelor of Applied Science (B.App.Sc.) with Honours degree, majoring either in
Industrial or Analytical Chemistry.
These programmes which are recognised by the Malaysian Institute of Chemistry (Institut
Kimia Malaysia) also include 8 weeks of industrial training with industrial partners,
commercial and research laboratories. Students are also encouraged to register for the
final year research project (which covers 2 semesters) during their final year.
The postgraduate programmes offered, either by research mode leading to M.Sc. and
Ph.D. or mixed-mode M.Sc. (Chemical Instrumentation), have managed to attract fellow
Malaysian and many foreign nationals.
SPECIALISATION
The School has given priority in creating a healthy research environment with a total of
over 200 postgraduate students engaging in various areas of research including natural
products, organic synthesis, nanoscience, electrochemistry, liquid crystals,
organometallics, environmental chemistry, materials chemistry and chemical education.
Many of our academic staff have been well endowed with research grants and funding
from government bodies and industries to support these research activities.
42
MAIN ADMINISTRATIVE STAF
DEAN
Prof. Wan Ahmad Kamil Mahmood

DEPUTY DEAN
Assoc Prof. Afidah Abdul Rahim Prof. Norita Mohamed Prof. Mohd Jain Noordin Mohd Kassim
(Academic & Student Development) (Research & Postgraduates Studies) ( Industrial Linkages/ Training and Alumni)
PROGRAMME MANAGER
Assoc Prof. Rohana Adnan Prof. Sulaiman Ab. Ghani Assoc. Prof. Wan Saime Prof. Farook Adam
(Pure Science Programme) (Applied Science Programme) Wan Ngah (MUPA, Research Equipment
(Teaching & Learning for & Information Technology)
Level 100)
PRINCIPAL ASSISTANT REGISTRAR ASSISTANT REGISTRAR
Hjh. Zali Zaiton Hussin Ms. Sheilawanis Abdul Karim
43
ACADEMIC AND ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF
TELEPHONE
ADMINISTRATION E-MAIL
EXTENSION
Dean wakcm@usm.my
Prof. Wan Ahmad Kamil Mahmood 3262/3685 dean_chem@usm.my
Deputy Dean afidah@usm.my

(Academic & Student Development) 3913/3548 tdpp_ppskimia@usm.my
Assoc. Prof. Afidah Abdul Rahim
Deputy Dean mnorita@usm.my

(Postgraduate Studies & Research) 4049/3686 tdpsp_ppskimia@usm.my
Prof. Norita Mohamed
Deputy Dean
(Industrial Linkages/Training and
Alumni 4023 mjain@usm.my
Prof. Mohd Jain Noordin Mohd Kassim
PROGRAMME MANAGER
Pure Science Programme

Assoc. Prof. Rohana Adnan 3549 r_adnan@usm.my
Applied Science Programme

Prof. Sulaiman Ab Ghani 4030 sag@usm.my
Teaching & Learning for Level 100

Assoc. Prof. Wan Saime Wan Ngah 3569 wsaime@usm.my
MUPA, Research Equipment &

Information Technology 3567 farook@usm.my
Prof. Farook Adam
Principal Assistant Registrar

Hjh. Zali Zaiton Hj. Hussin 3540 zzh@usm.my
Assistant Registrar
Ms. Sheilawanis Binti Abdul Karim 3541 anisab@.usm.my
44
ACADEMIC STAFF
TELEPHONE
PROFESSOR EXTENSION E-MAIL
Bahruddin Saad, Dr. 4049 bahrud@usm.my

Farook Adam, Dr. 3567 farook@usm.my
Lim Poh Eng, Dr. 3550 pelim@usm.my
Mohd. Asri Mohd. Nawi, Dr. 4031 masri@usm.my
Dato Muhammad Idiris Saleh , Dr. 4027 midiris@usm.my
Mohd. Jain Noordin Mohd. Kassim, Dr. 4023 mjain@usm.my
Mohamad Abu Bakar, Dr. 4025 bmohamad@usm.my
Norita Mohamed, Dr. 3686 mnorita@usm.my
Sulaiman Ab Ghani, Dr. 4030 sag@usm.my
Teoh Siang Guan, Dr. 3565 sgteoh@usm.my
Wan Ahmad Kamil Mahmood, Dr. 3262 wakcm@usm.my
Yeap Guan Yeow, Dr. 3568 gyyeap@usm.my
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR
Abdussalam Salhin Mohamed Ali, Dr. 3562 abdussalam@usm.my
(Contract Lecturer)
Afidah Abdul Rahim, Dr. 3913 afidah@usm.my
Hasnah Osman, Dr. 3558 ohasnah@usm.my
Mas Rosemal Hakim Mas Haris, Dr. 3563 mas1@usm.my
Mohamad Nasir Mohamad Ibrahim, Dr. 3554 mnm@usm.my
Rohana Adnan, Dr. 3549 r_adnan@usm.my
Seng Chye Eng, Dr. 3546 ceseng@usm.my
Wan Saime Wan Ngah, Dr. 3569 wsaime@usm.my
SENIOR LECTURER
Amat Ngilmi Ahmad Sujari, Dr. 3637 angilmi@usm.my
Che Su Endud, Pn. 4032 chesu@usm.my
Melati Khairuddean, Dr. 3560 melati@usm.my
Noor Hana Hanif Abu Bakar, Dr. 4025 hana_hanif@usm.my
Ng Eng Poh, Dr. 4021 epng@usm.my
Rosenani S.M. Anwarul Haque, Dr. 3578 rosenani@usm.my
Oo Chuan Wei, Dr. 3680 oocw@usm.my
Yam Wan Sinn, Dr. 3558 wansinn@usm.my
45
LECTURER TELEPHONE E-MAIL
EXTENSION
Lee Hooi Ling, Dr. 3547 limgk@usm.my
Lim Gin Keat, Dr. 3547 limgk@usm.my
Yeoh Kar Kheng, Dr. 5179 kkyeoh@usm.my
RESEARCH OFFICER
Che Sofiah Saidin 3549 csofiah@usm.my
Kirupanithi A/P Pooranavelu 3680 kirupa@usm.my
Manoharan Veeran 3566 vmano@usm.my
Nordin Mohamed 3559 nordin@usm.my
Rabiah Bee Abdul Carrim 3561 rabiah@usm.my
Siti Mariam Suja 3548 smariam@usm.my
SUPPORT / TECHNICAL STAFF
SCIENCE OFFICER
Khairul Izwan Saruddin 4033 kizwan@usm.my

Nurul Arlita Kushiar 4058 arlita@usm.my
ASSISTANT SCIENCE OFFICER

Industrial Chemistry Section
Ami Mardiana Othman 4059 amimardiana@usm.my
Analytical Chemistry Section

Mohd Zamri Rosidi 5176 zamri5083@usm.my
Physical Chemistry Section

Muhd Nizam Muhammad Isa 5177 muhd_nizam@usm.my
Organic Chemistry Section

Wan Zulilawati Wan Zulkipli 3577 wanzulilawati@usm.my
Inorganic Chemistry Section

Azizo Bin Daud 3577 azizo@usm.my
MUPA Lab
Saripah Azizah Mansor 3577 saripahazizah@usm.my
46
TELEPHONE
SENIOR LAB ASSISTANT E-MAIL
EXTENSION
Organic Chemistry Section
Chow Cheng Por 3571 cpchow@usm.my
Inorganic Chemistry Section

Razly Effenly Khalid @ Khalib 3565 / 3577 och@usm.my
Ong Ching Hin 3579 razly@usm.my
Industrial Chemistry Section

Burhanuddin Saad 3687 burhansaad@usm.my
Analytical Chemistry Section

Norhayati Abdul Kadir 4041 rozeyanti@usm.my
Laboratory for Level 100

Aw Yeong Choek Hoe 3565 awyeong@usm.my
Mohd Nazri Saed 3026 mnazri_saed@usm.my

Electronic Workshop
Zainal Abidin Othman 3544 zainalothman@usm.my
Abd Razak Hashim 3544 abdulrazak@usm.my
Mohd Fairoz Shahul Hamid 3544 mohdfairoz@usm.my
Glass Blowing Workshop

Jamal Mohamed Shah Hamid 2690/3542 jamalmohamed@usm.my
Ramlee Abdul Wahab 2690/3542 awramlee@usm.my
Chemicals Store
Mohamad Noor Abd Aziz 3570 monaz@usm.my
Abd Rahman Othman 3570 abdulrahmano@usm.my
Deans Stenographer
Rohaina Shaik Jamaludin 3262 rohaina@usm.my
Deputy Deans Stenographer

Siti Hawa Hamdun 3576 hawahamdun@usm.my
Administrative Assistant
Yeoh Chooi Ling 3973 chooiling@usm.my
47
LABORATORY EQUIPMENTS SERVICES
Atomic Absorption Spectrometer Ext. 4059/2059
CHNS/O Ext. 3565
Electrochemical Workstation Room K316
Fourier Transform Infrared Spectrometer Ext.

4059/4036/3572/
3865
Gas Chromatograph Ext.

4036/3571/4059/
4031
Gel Permeation Chromatograph Ext. 4038
GC-MS Ext. 4059
High Performance Liquid Chromatograph [HPLC] Ext.

4038/4040/3571/
2061/ 4059
Inductively Coupled Plasma Mass Spectrometer Ext. 4057

[ICP-MS]
MUPA Lab Room 270/017

MUPA LAB
Ext. 4057
Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectrometer Room 032

[NMR 400 MHz/300Mz] Ext. 3589
Thermogravimetric Analyser / Differential Scanning Ext. 4034

Colorimeter
UV/VIS Ext. 3563
48
GENERAL INFORMATION
Career
The School of Chemical Sciences was established in 1969 and has produced quality
graduates who possess experience and skills in line with the programmes offered. The
School is staffed with experienced lecturers and equipped with modern instruments in
both the teaching and research laboratories. As such, the graduates can pursue careers in
public and private companies such as the Malaysian Palm Oil Board (MPOB), the
Malaysian Agricultural Research and Development Institute (MARDI), the Forestry
Research Institute Malaysia (FRIM) and the Chemistry Department. Graduates can also
work in marketing companies such as Perkin Elmer, Mecomb, Interscience etc. In
addition, there are opportunities for graduates to serve as chemists and engineers in the
electronics industry, such as Intel, Dynacraft, and Solectron. Graduates can also venture
into other fields or pursue MSc. or PhD degrees in the School.
Alumni of the School of Chemical Sciences
All graduates of the School of Chemical Sciences automatically become members of the
Chemistry Alumni. It is hoped that participation in activities organised by the Chemistry
Alumni or the Alumni of the School of Chemical Sciences will foster better relationship
and cooperation among members and also with the School for the benefits of all. It is
hoped that nostalgia and love towards the alma mater can be brought back through the
Chemistry Alumni.
All graduates of the School of Chemical Sciences can update their information or register
as members by using the on-line form via htpp://www.usm.my/chem./alumni. htm
Awards and Deans Certificate
(a) Royal Education Award by the Malaysian Rulers Council

For the best final year students in all fields.
(b) Tuanku Chancellor Gold Medal Award

For the best final year student in all fields.
(c) USM Gold Medal Award (awarded by Womans Association USM)

For the best female final year student in all fields.
(d) USM Gold Medal Award (awarded by Tun Dato Seri Dr. Lim Chong Eu)
For the best final year student in the Bachelor of Science.
(e) USM Gold Medal Award (awarded by Nestle Products Sdn. Bhd.)
For the best final year student in the Bachelor of Applied Science.
49
(f) USM Gold Medal Award (awarded by Chemical Company of Malaysia
Bhd.)
For the best final year student in the field of Chemistry.
(g) USM Book Award (awarded by Hoechst Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.)

For the best final year student in the field of Industrial Chemistry.
(h) Deans Certificate will be awarded to any student in the School of Chemical
Sciences who has achieved academic excellence. The certificate will be awarded
every semester.
Association of the School
Persatuan Sains Kimia
Students in the School of Chemical Sciences are encouraged not only to pursue academic
excellence but also to be active in extra-curricular and self-development activities. This is
made possible through Persatuan Sains Kimia which functions to safeguard the students
welfare and also provide a platform for them to cultivate their interests in various fields.
Higher Education
Students who are interested to pursue higher degrees can choose any of the following
programmes:
(a) Full or part-time programme leading to degrees in Master of Science and Doctor
of Philosophy by research.
(b) Full or part-time mixed mode programme (a combination of course work and
research) leading to a Master of Science degree.
Further information can be obtained from the Deputy Deans office

(Postgraduate Studies and Research) or the Institute of Postgraduate Studies.
50
Facilities
The School is equipped with teaching and research laboratories as well as modern
equipment to ensure high quality teaching. Existing analytical and characterisation
instruments include NMR 300 and 400 MHz, ICP-MS, GC/MS, DSC-TGA and GPC,
CHN Analyser, various types of HPLC, GC, FTIR, UV, IR, AAS and fluorescence
spectrophotometers, electroanalytical system, Guoy balance, porosimeter, sintering
equipment, electroplating apparatus and other supporting equipment. The School is also
equipped with Electronics and Glass-Blowing Workshops as well as other related
instruments.
The expertise and facilities available in the School of Chemical Sciences are always
tapped by the industries and government agencies to help in solving problems faced by
them. In line with the desire to improve the consultancy services offered by the School,
the School of Chemical Sciences has taken a proactive step by setting up an Analytical
Services Unit (MUPA) to offer more effective services for the industrial sector.
51
COURSE STRUCTURE
(i) Structure of Study Programme
Course Component Credit Unit Requirements

B.App.Sc. (Hons.)
Basic/Core (T) 70
Minor/Elective (M/E) (a) Minor: 16
or
(b) Elective: 16
and
MAA 161/4 (compulsory for all students)
University (U) 15
Total 105
(ii) Industrial Training
Second year students are encouraged to apply for undergoing Industrial Training
(KIE 360/0) at the end of second year subjected to the conditions imposed by the
School. Students will be graded either PASS (P) or FAIL (F) after fulfilling all
the requirements.
(iii) Final Year Project
Students are encouraged to register for KUE 309/6 Chemistry Project during
their final year of studies. This involves conducting research work for two
semesters and submitting a thesis based on the specified conditions and format
for evaluation.
For students who do not register for the final year project, they can fulfill the 6
units requirement by registering for other courses offered by the School.
(iv) Assessment
The assessment of a course will be done by:-
(i) examination
(ii) course work
The assessment will cover knowledge, applications, analytical and writing skills.
Skills which are not be assessed through examinations will be assessed through
course work in the form of assignments or practical work.
52
Weightage for the examination and course work components are as follows:-
(a) Full theory course:
Examination 70 %
Coursework 30 %
(b) Theory course with practical:
Examination 60 %
Coursework 15 %
Practical report 25 %
(c) Full practical course:
Practical report 70 %
Test 30 %
53
LIST OF COURSES OFFERED
(a) B.App.Sc. (Hons) (Industrial Chemistry)

(i) Core Courses* - 70 units Prerequisites
MAA 101/4 Calculus
MAT 181/4 Programming For Scientific
Applications
ZCA 101/4 Physics I (Mechanics)
ZCT 104/3 Physics IV (Modern Physics)
KTT 111/3 Inorganic Chemistry I

KOT 121/3 Organic Chemistry I
KFT 131/3 Physical Chemistry I
KAT 141/3 Analytical Chemistry I
KUT 101/2 Chemistry Practical I
KUT 102/2 Chemistry Practical II
KAT 241/3 Analytical Chemistry II KAT 141(s), KUT 205(c)

KIT 252/3 Unit Operations
KIT 253/3 Chemical Engineering KFT 131(s)
Thermodynamics
KIT 254/2 Polymers KOT 121(s)
KIT 257/3 Material Chemistry
KOT 222/3 Organic Chemistry II KOT 121(s)
KTT 212/3 Inorganic Chemistry II KTT 111(s)
KUT 205/2 Chemistry Practical V- Analytical KUT 101(s), KAT 241(c)
KAT 341/3 Pollution and Environmental Chemistry KAT 241(s)

KIT 355/2 Unit Operations Practical KIT 252(c)
KIT 356/4 Chemical Processing KOT 121(s)
KIT 357/2 Industrial Practical
Select 6 units from elective courses
(To fulfill the 70 units core courses)
(ii) Compulsory (4 units)
MAA 161/4 Statistics for Science Students (compulsory for students who
choose minor or elective)
54
(iii) Elective Courses
Select 16 units (to fullfill the elective component).* Prerequisites
KIE 232/3 Colloids and Surface Science
KIE 355/3 Industrial Colourants
KIE 356/3 Food and Palm Oil Chemistry
KIE 358/3 Current Topics in Industrial Chemistry
KUE 309/6 Chemistry Project
*Additional units to fulfill the elective component must be taken from Pure
Chemistry or Analytical Chemistry courses.
(iv) Industrial Training (Optional)

KIE 360/0 Industrial Training
* All the courses offered are subjected to changes when the need arises.
(s) = sequential (Course must be taken earlier)
(c) = concurrent (Course can be taken earlier or concurrent)
(b) B.App.Sc. (Hons) (Analytical Chemistry)
(i) Core Courses* - 70 units Prerequisites

MAA 101/4 Calculus
MAT 181/4 Programming For Scientific Applications
ZCT 103/3 Physics III (Vibrations, Waves and Optics

KAT 141/3 Analytical Chemistry I
KAT 242/3 Spectroscopic Methods KAT 141(s),
KAT 243(c)
KAT 243/2 Analytical Practical I KAT 242(c)
KAT 244/3 Separations Methods KAT 141(s)
KFT 232/3 Physical Chemistry II KFT 131(s)
KUT 206/2 Chemistry Practical VI- Organic KUT 102(s)
KAT 340/2 Analytical Chemistry Practical II KAT 243(s)
KAT 347/3 Electroanalytical Methods KAT 242(s)
KFT 331/3 Physical Chemistry III KFT 232(s)
55
Select 7 units from Analytical Chemistry Elective Components
( To fulfill 70 units core courses)
(ii) Compulsory (4 units)
MAA 161/4 Statistics for Science Students (compulsory for students who choose
minor or elective)
(iii) Elective Courses

Select 16 units (to fulfill the elective component)* Prerequisites
KAE 248/2 Advanced Practical - Analytical Chemistry KAT 242(c)
or KAT 241(c)
KAE 345/3 Special Topics in Analytical Chemistry KAT 242(c) or
KAT 241(c)
KAE 346/2 Pollution and Environmental Chemistry KAT 341(c)
Practical
*Additional unit to fulfill the elective component must to be taken from Pure
Chemistry or Industrial Chemistry Courses
(iv) Industrial Training (Optional)

(c) Minor Programme 16 units

All Minor Programmes offered by other Schools can be taken by Chemistry Students
subject to requirements imposed by the School/Center which offers the Minor.
Priority is given to the Minor Programmes in Management, Computer,
Communication, English or other Sciences. Please refer to the book of minor
programmes Guideline.
* All the courses offered are subjected to changes when the need arises.
(s) = sequential (Course must be taken earlier)

(c) = concurrent (Course can be taken earlier or concurrent)
56
SUGGESTION FOR THE REGISTRATION OF COURSES
(a) INDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY : MAJOR / ELECTIVE
SEMESTER 1 SEMESTER 2
COMPONENT
COURSE CODE CREDIT HOUR COURSE CODE CREDIT HOUR
University Compulsory Course U 2 U 2
WUS 2 HTU223 2
Basic/Core Course KAT141 3 KFT131 3
KTT111 3 KOT121 3
KUT101 / KUT102 2 KUT102 / KUT101 2
MAA101 4 ZCA101 4
Elective Course MAA161 4
Total Credit Hour 16 20
COMPONENT
University Compulsory Course SHE 101 2 U 2
Basic/Core Course KIT253 3 KAT241 3
KIT257 3 KIT252 3
KOT222 3 KIT254 2
KTT212 3 KIT355 / KIT357 2
MAT181 4 KUT205 2
ZCT104 3
KIE360 0
Elective Course ELECTIVE 3
COMPONENT SEMESTER 1 SEMESTER 2
University Compulsory Course U 3
KIT355 / KIT357 2 KUE309 / KIE356 3
KUE309 / KIE355 3
Elective Course ELECTIVE 4 KIE358 3
ELECTIVE 6
1 Distribution of credit for each semester (12-19 Credit)
2 > 20 credit, approval from Dean is required
57
(b) INDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY : MAJOR / MINOR
COMPONENT
WUS101 2 HTU223 2
KTT111 3 KOT121 3
KUT101 / KUT102 2 KUT102 / KUT101 2
MAA101 4 ZCA101 4
Minor Course MAA161 / MINOR 4
COMPONENT
University Compulsory Course SHE101 2 U 3
KIT257 3 KIT252 3
KOT222 3 KIT254 2
KTT212 3 ZCT104 3
KUT205 2
KIE360 0
Minor Course MINOR 4 MINOR 4
COMPONENT
KIT355 / KIT357 2 KIT355 / KIT357 2
MAT181 4 KUE309 / KIE356 3
KUE309 / KIE355 3

58
(c) ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY : MAJOR / ELECTIVE

WUS 2 HTU223 2
KTT111 3 KOT121 3
KUT101 / KUT102 2 KUT102 / KUT101 2
MAA101 4 ZCT103 3
Elective Course MAA161 4
Basic/Core Course KAT242 3 KAT244 3
KAT243 2 KIT252 3
KOT222 3 KFT232 3
KTT212 3 ZCT104 3
KUT206 2
KIE360 0
Elective Course ELECTIVE 3 ELECTIVE 3
KAT347 3 MAT181 4
KFT331 3 KUE309 / KAE248 / KAE346 2/3
KUE309 / KAE345 3 KAE248 / KAE346 2
Elective Course ELECTIVE 6 ELECTIVE 3
Total Credit Hour 19 14 / 15

59
(d) ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY : MAJOR / MINOR

WUS 2 HTU223 2
KTT111 3 KOT121 3
KUT101 / KUT102 2 KUT102 / KUT101 2
MAA101 4 ZCT103 3
Minor Course M AA161 / M 4
KAT243 2 KIT252 3
KOT222 3 KFT232 3
KTT212 3 ZCT104 3
KUT206 2 KIE360 0
KAT347 3 MAT181 4
KFT331 3 KUE309 / KAE346 / KAE248 2/3
KUE309 / KAE345 3 KAE346 / KAE248 2
Total Credit Hour 17 15/ 16

60
Upon completion of this programme, students will be able to :
PO1 Knowledge Have firm foundations in the fundamentals of chemistry.

Apply the chemistry principles appropriate for applied chemistry.
PO2 Practical Skills Perform a wide range of laboratory procedures in applied chemistry.
Use modern instrumentation and classical techniques, to design experiments, and to properly record the
results of their experiments.
Perform laboratory techniques safely and accurately.
PO3 Sceintific Methods, Critical Critically evaluate experiments in applied chemistry.
Thinking & Problem Solving Interpret experiments and express the results in clearly written laboratory reports and in oral or poster
Skills presentations.
Identify, analyse and solve problems in chemistry using systematic methods.
PO4 Communication Skills Express ideas in an informed, coherent, and effective manner, articulate and develop a sustained argument,
both orally and in writing.
Interpret experiments and communicate the results of their work to chemists and non-chemists.
PO5 Social Skills, Team working, Demonstrate the ability to work effectively in teams.
Responsibility, Leadership Execute the tasks given responsibly.
skills Demonstrate the ability to lead / facilitate teams.
PO6 Life Long Learning & Use knowledge gained for self development and continuous improvement.
Information Management Demonstrate the ability to use various retrieval methods to obtain information on issues relating to
chemistry.
Demonstrate the ability to update, maintain and enhance knowledge in applied chemistry through life-long
learning.
PO7 Professionalism, Humanities, Demonstrate commitment to ethical issues in their field of work
Values, Attitudes, Ethics Compile, analyse and interpret data honestly and ethically
Develop interest, curiosity, persistence, eagerness and confidence as chemists.
PO8 Managerial & Apply the basic knowledge or principles of managerial and entrepreneurship related to chemical sciences.
Entrepreneurial Skills Apply the concepts of applied chemistry to environmental and industrial communities.
61
SYNOPSIS OF COURSES
KAT 141/3 Analytical Chemistry 1
Stoichiometry calculations, statistical data treatment, concepts of equilibrium,

gravimetric analysis, acid-base equilibria, acid-base titrations, complexometric titrations,
precipitation reactions and titrations, electrochemical cells and redox titrations.
Learning Outcomes
Students are able to:

1. Apply the knowledge of basic concepts of concentrations to calculate the various
types of concentrations.
2. Apply the knowledge of statistical concepts in analytical chemistry to present the
correct calculation and decision.
3. Apply the knowledge of various chemical equilibria including acid-base,
complexometry, gravimetry and redox to explain the various titration methods.
4. Demonstrate the ability to apply appropriate equations to solve problems in chemical
equilibrium using systematic methods.
Text Book and References
1. G.D. Christian, Analytical Chemistry, 6th Edition, John Wiley & Sons (2004).
2. D.A. Skoog, D.M., West F.J. Holler and S.R.Crouch, 7th Edition, Analytical
Chemistry: An Introduction Saunders College Publishing (2000).
Properties of gases and liquids: gas laws, van der Waals equation, kinetic theory of gases,
principle of the corresponding states, Maxwell-Boltzman distribution, effusion, diffusion,
viscosity, thermal conductivity, conduction and mobility.
Chemical kinetics: rate laws, temperature effect, experimental methods, complex

reactions. First law of thermodynamics: work, heat, energy, enthalpy change, heat
capacity, adiabatic and isothermal processes, reversible and irreversible processes.
Thermochemistry.
Learning Outcomes
1. Apply the van der Waals and other equation of states to distinguish between ideal and
real gases.
2. Apply the knowledge of kinetic theory of gases to explain the various molecular
collisions, speeds and transport properties of gases.
3. Demonstrate how kinetic and thermodynamic principles can be used to determine the
reaction rates and various thermodynamic parameters of reversible and irreversible
processes, respectively.
62
4. Demonstrate the ability to apply equations to discuss and solve problems on gas
properties, chemical kinetics and thermodynamics.
1. I.N. Levine, Physical Chemistry, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill International Ed. (2009).
2. R.J. Silbey, R.A. Alberty and M.G. Bawendi, Physical Chemistry, 4th Edition, John
Wiley & Sons (2005).
3. P.W. Atkins and J.de. Paula Physical Chemistry, 8th Edition, Oxford University
Press (2007).
Electronic structure and bonding. Acids and bases. An introduction to organic

compounds: and functional groups nomenclature and representation of structure.
Reactions of alkanes, alkenes and alkynes. Stereochemistry: the arrangement of atoms in
space, the stereochemistry of addition reactions. Delocalised electrons and resonance.
Reactions at a sp3 hybridized carbon: nucleophilic substitution reactions of alkyl halides,
elimination reactions of alkyl halides and compounds with leaving groups other than
halogen. Structure, synthesis and reactions of alcohols, ethers and epoxides.
Learning Outcomes

1. Apply knowledge of structure and bonding to explain the properties of various
classes of compounds such as alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, alcohols, ethers and
epoxides.
2. Apply the correct chemical nomenclature in naming organic compounds.
3. Apply the knowledge of organic reactions to discuss and solve problems on various
organic reactions.
4. Demonstrate the ability to apply organic chemistry principles to explain the
stereochemistry of organic reactions.
1. J.G. Smith, Organic Chemistry, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill (2008).

2. L.G. Wade, Organic Chemistry, 6th Edition, Pearson Education Inc. (2006).
3. P.Y. Bruice, Organic Chemistry, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall (2004).
4. T.W. Solomons and C. Fryhle, Organic Chemistry, 8th Edition, Wiley & Sons
(2004).
This course will introduce topics in basic chemistry such as stoichiometry, atomic
structure, nuclear chemistry, periodic table, chemical bonding and properties of matter.
63
Learning Outcomes

1. Apply the knowledge of stoichiometry to discuss and solve problems on
stoichiometric problems.
2. Apply the knowledge of the atoms in the periodic table to discuss the relationship
between the elements in the group and in a particular period.
3. Apply the Bohr Theory and wave mechanics to understand the electronic
configuration and bonding theory in chemical bond formation.
4. Apply the knowledge of nuclear chemistry to explain the radioactive decay and to
understand the safe and unsafe uses of radioactive elements.
5. Apply the knowledge of structures, properties of solids to explain the various types of
materials.
1. J.E. Brady, F. Senese and N.D. Jespersen, Chemistry, 5th Edition, John Wiley and
Sons (2009).
2. K.W. Whitten, R.E. Davis, M.L. Peck and G.G. Stanley, General Chemistry, 7th
Edition, Brooks /Cole - Thomson Learning (2004).
3. S.S. Martin, Chemistry - The Molecular Nature of Matter and Change, 5th Edition,
McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc (2009).
4. R. Chang, Chemistry, 8th Edition, McGraw-Hill (2005)
The experiments were extracted from the book: J.H. Nelson and K.C. Kemp, Laboratory
Experiments for Chemistry: The Central Science, 11th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall
(2009).
Learning Outcomes

1. Demonstrate competence in appropriate basic laboratory techniques in analytical and
inorganic chemistry.
2. Interpret data from laboratory observation and measurement.
3. Display safe laboratory practices.
4. Apply theoretical chemistry to solve problems in the practical area.
5. Write reports clearly, concisely and appropriately.
The experiments were extracted from the book: J.H. Nelson and K.C. Kemp, Laboratory
Experiments for Chemistry: The Central Science, 11th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall
(2009).
64
Learning Outcomes

1. Demonstrate competence in appropriate basic laboratory techniques in organic and
physical chemistry.
4. Apply theoretical chemistry to solve problems in the practical area.
KAE 248/2 Advanced Practical : Analytical Chemistry KAT 242(c), KAT 241(c)
Practical applications of analytical techniques in areas such as forensic sciences, food and
adulteration of milk, cooking oil and drinks, toxic materials, toxic metals.
Learning Outcomes

1. Apply methods of instrumental chemical analysis in tackling practical analytical
chemical problems.
2. Write reports on the basis of experimental results and to draw correct conclusions.
References
Practical Manual KAE 248
KAT 241/3 Analytical Chemistry II KAT 141(s), KUT 205(c)
Basic principles, instrumentation and applications in qualitative and quantitative analyses

of the following techniques:
Electroanalytical
Spectroscopic
Chromatographic
Learning Outcomes
1. Demonstrate understanding in the basic principles of atomic and molecular
spectroscopic methods, separation methods and electrochemical methods.
2. Describe and discuss the instrumentation and techniques of the various analytical
methods.
3. Discuss the applications of the various methods for the analyses of samples.
65
1. G.D. Christian, Analytical Chemistry, 6th Edition, John Wiley & Son (2004).
2. D.A. Skoog, F.J. Holler and S.R. Crouch, Principles of Instrumental Analysis, 6th
Edition, Thomson Brooks/Cole (2007).
KAT 242/3 Spectroscopic Methods KAT 141(s), KAT 243(c)

Basic principles, instrumentation and the applications in qualitative and quantitative
analyses of the following techniques.
Molecular ultraviolet and visible absorption spectrometry, infrared absorption
spectrometry, fluorescence spectrometry, flame emission spectrometry, atomic absorption
spectrometry (flame and non-flame methods), atomic emission spectrometry with plasma
and electrical discharge sources, x-ray fluorescence and mass spectrometry.
Learning Outcomes

1. Demonstrate understanding of the basic principles of spectroscopic methods such as
UV/Visible spectrophotometry, infrared spectrometry, fluorescence, atomic
spectrometry, X-ray fluorescence and mass spectrometry.
2. Identify main components of instrumentation used in spectroscopic methods.
3. Select the appropriate spectroscopic technique for a particular analysis.
4. Demonstrate awareness of the limitations of the various methods.
2. D.A. Skoog, F.J. Holler and S.R. Crouch, Principles of Instrumental Analysis (6th
KAT 243/2 Analytical Practical I KAT 242(c)
Experiments based on the following methods: infrared spectrophotometry, ultraviolet-

visible spectrophotometry, spectrofluorometry, flame photometry, atomic absorption
spectrometry, gas chromatography, high performance liquid chromatography.
Learning Outcomes

1. Apply methods of instrumental analysis based on spectrometry, electrochemistry and
chromatography.
Practical Manual KAT 243/2
66
KAT 244/3 Separation Methods KAT 141(s)
Solvent extraction. Solid-phase extraction. General principles of chromatography. Gas

chromatography. High performance liquid chromatrography: partition, adsorption, ion
and size exclusion (gel) chromatography. Planar chromatography: thin layer and paper
chromatography. Capillary electrophoresis. Selected methods.
Learning Outcomes

1. Comprehend the underlying principles in solvent extraction and sample preparation
techniques.
2. Describe and discuss the inter-play of parameters that governs retention and band
broadening behavior.
3. Apply gas, liquid chromatographic and electrophoretic methods to separate analytes
of interest.
2. D.A. Skoog, F.J. Holler and S.R. Crouch, Principles of Instrumental Analysis, 6th
KFT 232/3 Physical Chemistry II KFT 131(s)
First, Second and Third laws of Thermodynamics, work, heat and energy, enthalpy
change, heat capacity, adiabatic expansion, entropy, Gibbs and Helmholtz energies,
chemical potential, fugacity, open system and composition change.
Changes of State: physical transformation of pure substances and mixture. Phase

diagram, stability of phases, Clapeyron equation, partial molar quantities,
thermodynamics of mixing, properties of solution, activity, phase diagram for systems
with two and three components. Electrochemistry. Debye Huckel theory,
electrochemical cell, electrode potential and thermodynamics of cell.
Learning Outcomes
1. Apply the first, second and third laws of thermodynamics to solve problems in
physical chemistry.
2. Describe the partial molar quantities of a mixture.
3. Use appropriate equations to calculate the chemical potential.
4. Use the Debye-Huckel equation to calculate the thermodynamic equilibrium constant.
5. Relate the thermodynamic principles to electrochemical cells including the derivation
of the Nernst equation.
67
1. A.J. Silbey, R.A. Alberty and M.G. Bawendi, Physical Chemistry, 4th Edition, John
Wiley & Sons (2005).
2. P.W. Atkins, Physical Chemistry, 6th Edition, Oxford University Press (2001).
3. I.N. Levine, Physical Chemistry, 5th Edition, McGraw-Hill International Ed. (2002).
4. J. Laider, J.H. Meiser and B.C. Sanctuary, Physical Chemistry, 4th Edition,
Houghton Mifflin Co. (2003).
KIE 232/3 Colloid and Surface Science
Colloid state, interface and surface, adsorption, surface tension and dispersion. Kinetic
properties, rate of settlement, Brownian motion and diffusion.
Structure and stability of various types of colloids. Surfactant and micelles. The
Industrial importance of colloids.
Surface tension and surface forces. Porous and non-porous adsorbents. Type of pores
and isotherms. Physical adsorption and the characterisation of porous and non-porous
adsorbents. Thermodynamics of adsorption: correlation, analysis and predicition of
adsorption equilibria. Role of porosity in Industrial applications: micropore diffusion in
zeolites, carbon molecular sieves.
Surface Analysis: Morphology, chemical composition, elemental distribution, crystal
structure and surface defects. Basic principles and instrumentation of the following
techniques: Electron Microscopy (SEM, TEM and Electron diffraction), X-ray
microanalysis (EPMA, ESCA and EDX), Auger spectrometry (AES), secondary ion mass
spectrometry (SIMS) and atomic force microscope (AFM).
Learning Outcomes

1. Comprehend the origin of attractive and repulsive forces governing colloidal
stability.
2. State and differentiate physisorption & chemisorption and to determine the heat of
adsorption and surface properties of solids.
3. Differentiate among various types of signals emitted from an electron specimen
interaction and the respective techniques of analysis.
4. Comprehend the basic concepts of surface characterisation techniques.
1. E. Dickinson, An Introduction to Food Colloids, Oxford University Press (1992).

2. R.J. Hunter, Foundation of Colloid Science, Oxford Science Publication (1993).
3. D.M. Rutiven, Principles of Adsorption and Adsorption Processes, John Wiley &
Sons (1984).
68
Unit conversion.
Material balance: flowsheet prototype of chemical process; general balance equation,
technique in material balance, various unit balances, chemical reactions, stoichiometry,
extent of reactions, recycles.
Energy balance: energy balance equations for closed systems, approximation of enthalpy
changes and applications, heat capacity, reactive systems, enthalpy, balance equations and
energy balance techniques.
Liquid flow: type of liquids, compressible and incompressible. Newtonian and non-
Newtonian, flow region, laminar flow and turbulent, Reynolds number, boundary layer,
balance equation for materials and energy, momentum equations, flow in pipes.
Heat transfer: mechanism, shell and tube heat exchangers, basic equations, general
coefficient of heat transfer.
Separation process, characteristic of separation, phase equilibrium, binary distillation.
Some examples of unit operations equipment.
Learning Outcomes

1. Comprehend and write material balance equations and stoichiometric equations for
the chemical reaction equilibria.
2. Distinguish between positive work and negative work and use the stoichiometric
equation in solving problems of energy balance.
3. Comprehend and calculate mass flow rate, speed, discharge rate and other flow
parameters using Bernoullis equation.
4. Differentiate between steady and unsteady state heat transfer using temperature-
distance relationship and to calculate heat transfer and heat flux in homogeneous and
non-homogeneous systems.
1. D.M. Himmelblau, Basic Principles and Calculations in Chemical Engineering, 7th

Edition, Prentice Hall International Series (2004).
2. C. J. Geankoplis, Transport Process and Unit Operations, Prentice Hall (2003).
3. J.M. Cimbala, Essentials of Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications,
McGraw-Hill (2006).
KIT 253/3 Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics KFT 131(s)
Concept and definitions: Thermodynamic systems, process and cycles.

Work, Energy and Heat: Work and heat definition. Work and heat through system
boundary. Work and heat units.
Properties of pure substances: Water phase diagrams, Thermodynamic data of pure
substances. Steam table and applications.
69
First Law Thermodynamics: First law equation. Internal energy. Enthalpy. Heat
Capacity. First law analysis for control volume and applications.
Second Law Thermodynamics and Energy: Introduction to Second Law Entropy.

Reversible and irreversible process. Second Law analysis for control volume. Isentropic
process. System efficiency. Cycle process and Carnot cycle.
Cycle analysis: Vapour power cycles. Air power cycles.
Gas mixtures: mixtures of ideal gas. Gas and Vapour. Humidity.
Thermodynamic relationships: (Thermochemical): Maxwell relationship. Properties of
relationship. Clapeyron equation. Enthalpy, internal energy heat capacity and entropy
relationships. Ideal gas behaviour. Fugacity and state equations.
Combustion process of fuels: Fuel combustion. First law and second law analysis for
combustion. Entalphy formation.
Learning Outcomes
1. Differentiate between thermodynamic properties and systems and calculate work
done using the ideal gas equation and polytropic process.
2. Apply First Law and Second Law of thermodynamics to calculate the thermodynamic
properties.
3. Apply First and Second Law of thermodynamics for cycles analysis.
4. Explain the relationships between thermodynamical properties and their applications
in the derivation of heat capacity, compressibility, expansibility and fugacity.
5. Write and calculate theoretical air demand and air-fuel ratio based on fuel or
combustion product composition.
1. R.E. Sonntag and G.J. Van Wylen, Introduction to Thermodynamics, 5th Edition,
John Wiley & Sons (1998).
KIT 254/2 Polymers KOT 121(s)

Introduction to polymer: Basic concepts and definitions; general properties and
characteristics; polymer recycling; molecular structure; cross-linking; molecular
configuration; copolymer.
Morphology of polymer: Amorphous, crystalline and semi-crystalline; polymer
crystallinity; glass transition temperature; chemical bonds in polymer.
Classification of polymers: Plastics (thermoplastic, thermoset); rubbers (elastomers);
fibers; adhesives and coatings.
Polymer synthesis: General mechanism and characteristics of step-reaction and chain-
reaction polymerisations; distinguishing features.
Step-reaction polymerisation: Kinetics of self-catalysed and acid-catalysed
polyesterification ; Carothers equation; molecular weight control.
Free-radical chain polymerisation: Mechanism, initiators; kinetics; chain transfer
reaction; molecular weight control by chain transfer.
Ionic polymerisation: Mechanisms for cationic and anionic polymerisation; kinetics;
cross-linking formation.
70
Polymer characterisation: Molar mass and viscosity; determination techniques. Physical
and mechanical behaviour of polymer: Glass transition temperature; melting behaviour;
mechanical behaviour; yields criteria; equipments and techniques of determination.
Learning Outcomes

1. Comprehend the importance, classification, properties of polymers.
2. Differentiate between step reaction and chain reaction polymerisation.
3. Construct kinetic equations for radical chain polymerisation and chain transfer
reactions.
4. Write polymerisation reaction mechanism and crosslinking reaction mechanism
involved in ionic polymerisation.
5. Identify the methods used to determine the structure, physical and mechanical
properties of polymers.
Textbooks and references
1. M.P. Stevens, Polymer Chemistry, An Introduction, 3rd Edition Oxford University

Press (1999).
2. L.H. Sperling, Introduction to Physical Polymer Science, 4th Edition Wiley
Interscience (2006).
3. R.J. Young, Introduction to Polymers, Chapman and Hall (1983).
4. J.M.G. Cowie, Polymers: Chemistry and Physics of Modern Materials, International
Textbook (1973).
KIT 257/3 Materials Chemistry
Introduction: Classification of materials; Relation between structure, processing and

properties.
Atomic Structure and Chemical Bonding: Atomic structure; Types of chemical bonding;
Properties from bonding; Unit cell; Crystal structure of solids; Crystallographic directions
and planes; Determination of crystal structure
Imperfection in Solids: Types of imperfections/defects; Defects in ceramic structures;
Defects in alloys; Characterization of defects
Diffusion in Solids: Types of diffusion; Diffusion mechanisms; Factors that influence
diffusion; Effects of diffusion to the structure and properties of materials
Ceramics: Basic categories of ceramics; General properties of ceramic materials, structure
of ceramics, silicates and glasses; New and modern ceramics; Biodegradable and
bioactive ceramics; Applications of ceramic materials
Polymers: Polymer molecules; Types of polymers; Structure of polymer; Molecular
weight, degree of polymerization and degree of crystallization, polymer crystals;
Synthesis of polymer; Phase transition of polymer.
Metals and Alloys: Classification of metals and alloys; Bonding in metals; Metallic
structure; Phase diagram of metal (iron)
71
Composites: General requirements for composite; Types of composites; Form of matrices
and reinforcement phases; Concrete and hybrid composites; Benefits and application of
composite materials
Phase Diagrams: Basic concept of phase equilibrium; Classification of phase diagrams;

Interpretation of phase diagram; Lever Rule; Development of microstructure; Phase
transformations; Factors that influence the phase transformation.
Properties of Materials: Mechanical properties: Stress, strain, elastic and plastic behavior,
strength, hardness, ductility and toughness. Electrical properties: Conductivity, electron
energy bands, electron mobility, semiconductors and dielectric materials. Magnetic
properties: Magnetic force, magnetic field, classification of magnetic materials and its
magnetic properties. Thermal Properties: Heat capacity, thermal conductivity, thermal
expansion and thermal stress/shock. Optical Properties: Reflection, refraction, absorption
and transmission, color and fiber optic.
Corrosion and Degradation of Materials: Corrosion of metals: Corrosion reaction and
corrosion rate, factors that influence the corrosion, forms of corrosion, corrosion
protections. Degradation of Polymer: Swelling, dissolution, bond rupture and weathering.
Learning Outcomes

1. Describe the types of bonds and planes within a unit cell and to distinguish between
single crystals and polycrystalline materials.
2. Comprehend the mechanism and factors that influence diffusion on the structure and
properties of materials.
3. Explain the types of bonding and structures in ceramics, polymers, metals, alloys and
composites.
4. Analyse the mechanical, electrical, magnetic, thermal and optical properties of
materials.
5. Analyse the corrosion reaction, the factors that influence the corrosion and methods
of corrosion prevention.
1. Mohd Jain Noordin Mohd Kassim, Printed lecture notes KIT 257- Materials
Chemistry.
2. W.D. Callister, Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction , 7th Edition,
John Wiley & Sons (2006).
3. D.R. Askeland and P.P. Phule, The Science and Engineering of Materials, 5th
Edition, Brooks/Cole-Thomson (2006).
Identification of organic compounds: mass spectrometry, infrared spectroscopy,

ultraviolet/visible spectroscopy and NMR spectroscopy. Oxidation, reductionand redical
reactions. Aromatic compounds: aromaticity, reactions of benzene and substituted
benzenes. Introduction to carboxylic acids: nomenclature, structure, preparation and
72
reactions and acidity. Introduction to carbonyl chemistry: organometallic reagents,
nucleophilic acyl substitution and the use of protecting groups.
Learning Outcomes

1. Describe and name carbonyl and aromatic compounds and propose the synthesis of
these compounds.
2. Predict the products and propose appropriate mechanisms for the reactions of the
above compounds.
3. Identify and determine the structure of an unknown compound with different
spectroscopic techniques
4. Discuss the concept of resonance to account for the stabilities of conjugated dienes,
allylic radicals and cations.
5. Predict the products and propose the appropriate mechanisms for oxidation,
reduction and radical reactions.
1. J.G. Smith, Organic Chemistry, 2nd Edition, McGraw (2008).

2. L.G. Wade, Organic Chemistry, 6th Edition, Pearson Education Inc. (2006).
3. P.Y. Bruice, Organic Chemistry, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall (2004).
4. T.W. Solomons and C.Fryhle, Organic Chemistry, 7th Edition, John Wiley & Sons
(2000).
Introduction on transition metal complexes and coordination chemistry. Structure,

isomerism and nomenclature, formation constant for transition metal complexes,
preparation of coordination compounds and spectroscopy, bonding theory in the
formation of transition metal complexes, introduction on the reaction mechanism and
application of transition metal complexes in organometallic and bioinorganics chemistry.
Learning Outcomes

1. Describe all the fundamental properties and characteristics related to transition
metals and their complexes.
2. Apply the knowledge of coordination compounds to explain the formation of metal-
ligand complexes.
3. Apply various chemical bond theories to explain the compounds containing metal-
ligand and metal-metal bonding.
4. Apply the knowledge of coordination chemistry in reaction mechanisms,
organometallics and bioinorganics.
73
1. C.E. Housecroft and A.G. Sharpe, Inorganic Chemistry, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education Limited (2005).
2. P.W. Shriver, C.H. Atkins and C.H. Langford, Coordination Chemistry, Oxford
University Press pages 192-226 and pages 434-494 (1990).
3. F.A. Cotton and G. Wilkinson, Basic Inorganic Chemistry, John Wiley (1976).
4. F.A. Cotton, G.C. Wilkinson, A. Murillo and M. Bochmann, Advanced Inorganic
Chemistry, 6th. Edition, John Wiley (1999).
5. F.A. Cotton, G. Wilkinson, and P.L.Gaus, Basic Inorganic Chemistry, 3rd Edition,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (1995)
KUT 205/2 Chemistry Practical V - Analytical

KUT 101(s), KAT 241(c)
Experiments involving ultraviolet-visible and infrared spectroscopy, ion exchange resin,
fluoride ion selective electrode, flame emission and atomic absorption spectroscopy, high
performance liquid chromatography, gas chromatography and electrogravimetry.
Learning Outcomes

1. Demonstrate competence in the methods of instrumental analysis based on
spectroscopic methods such as UV/Visible spectrophotometry, infrared
spectrophotometry, atomic absorption and flame emission spectroscopy.
2. Apply methods of instrumental analysis based on electrochemical methods.
3. Apply methods of instrumental analysis based on separation methods such as gas
chromatography and high performance liquid chromatography.
References
Practical Manual KUT 205
KUT 206/2 Chemistry Practical VI Organic KUT 102(s)
Basic organic techniques in chromatography (thin-layer, column and gas-liquid),

fractional distillation, extraction and isolation techniques, spectroscopy (NMR, IR, UV &
MS) and classical qualitative analysis are introduced through a series of compulsory
experiments. This is followed by several experiments which expose the student to a
selection of techniques in physical organic chemistry (such as the investigation of
resonance energy related to unsaturated , carbonyl system) and preparative organic
chemistry involving some distinct reactions e.g. the Diels-Alder, pinacol-pinacolone
rearrangement and the Michael conjugate addition).
Learning Outcomes
74
1. Demonstrate competence when conducting and applying various separation
techniques
2. Deduce the structures of simple organic compounds from their chemical and physical
characteristics and IR and NMR spectra.
3. Perform various multi-step small scale syntheses including purification of the end
products.
4. Write reports clearly and appropriately for all the experimental reactions conducted.
1. J.A. Landgrebe, Theory and Practice in the Organic Laboratory, Cole Publishing
Company (1993).
KAE 345/3 Special Topics in Analytical Chemistry

KAT 242(s) or KAT 241(s)
The current trends and advances in various aspects of analytical chemistry will be
discussed.
Learning Outcomes

1. Demonstrate understanding in the current issues related to analytical chemistry.
2. Apply fundamentals of chemistry in solving current analytical chemistry problems.
3. Display the ability to discuss the current issues orally and in writing.
KAE 346/2 Pollution and Environmental Chemistry Practical KAT 341(c)
Analysis of lead pollution, analysis of hydrocarbon pollution, BOD analysis, COD

analysis, phosphate analysis, nitrogen analysis, determination of chlorine in water,
kinetics of iron(II) oxidations in water, nitrate analysis in ground water and jar test for
coagulation studies.
Learning Outcomes

1. Identify and determine water pollution parameters such as BOD, COD, phosphates
and nitrogen species via conventional methods involving titration and colorimetry.
2. Analyze some major water pollutants using instrumental techniques such as atomic
absorption spectroscopy, high performance liquid chromatography and gas
chromatography.
3. Apply the process of water and wastewater treatment through coagulation, adsorption
and precipitation.
75
References
Practical Manual KAE 346
KAT 340/2 Analytical Chemistry Practical II KAT 243(s)

Experiments based on ion chromatography, high performance liquid chromatography, gas
chromatography, atomic absorption spectroscopy (GAAS), graphite furnace (AAS),
ICPMS, electroanalytical methods, UV/Vis spectrophotometry. Literature search.
Learning Outcomes
1. Demonstrate competence in appropriate laboratory techniques.
4. Apply chemistry principles to solve problems in the practical area.
References
Practical Manual KAT 340
Water pollution: Hydrological cycle; causes and effects of man-made pollution; oxygen-
sag in river pollution; monitoring of pollution strength; treatment processes.
Air pollution: Origins of air pollutants; basic chemistry of the formation of combustion-
generated pollutants; basic chemistry of the formation of combustion-generated
pollutants; analytical methods and monitoring of atmospheric pollutants; atmospheric
chemistry; atmospheric dispersion, control of emissions to the atmosphere.
Learning Outcomes
1. Comprehend the basic concepts of pollution, sustainable development and guidelines
and to predict the fate of pollutants in aquatic environments.
2. Comprehend and discuss the aquatic chemistry of water pollutants and their impact
on aquatic ecology and environment.
3. Apply the analytical process of monitoring environmental pollutants.
4. Describe the meteorology and chemistry of air pollutants.
5. Construct the model of concentration of air pollutants via a simple Gaussian model.
1. S.E. Manahan, Environmental Chemistry, 5th Edition, CRC Press (1991).

2. M.J. Hammer, Water and Wastewater Technology, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall
(1986).
3. Harrison and Perry (Edition) Handbook of Air Pollution Analysis, 2nd Edition,
Chapman & Hall (1986).
4. N. de Nevers, Air Pollution Control Engineering, McGraw-Hill (1995).
76
KAT 347/3 Electroanalytical Methods KAT 242(s)
The principles of electrochemistry, signal generation, double layer, polarization and over
voltage. The potentiometric methods: Principles of ion selective electrodes (ISE) and
analyses of H, Na, K, Ca and F ions. The solid state type ISE.
Voltammetric methods: Principles of polarography (Hg electrode) and analyses of metals
and non-metals. Principles of amperometry (C and Pt electrodes) and analyses of
complexes and organics.
Learning Outcomes

1. Comprehend the physico-chemical principles of electroanalytical methods.
2. Identify their applications in chemical analysis.
3. Select the appropriate electrochemical technique for a particular analysis.
4. Demonstrate awareness of the limitations of the various methods.

1. J. Wang, Analytical Electrochemistry, Wiley-VCH (2006).
KFT 331/3 Physical Chemistry III KFT 232(s)
Quantum theory: Wave-particle duality, postulates, uncertainty principle, Schroedinger

equation, particle in a one dimensional box, harmonic oscillator and rigid rotor.
Statistical thermodynamics: Boltzmann distribution, ensemble, partition functions,
calculation of thermodynamic functions.
Kinetics: transition state theory, thermodynamics of reactions, reaction in solution,
reactive species, photochemistry, oscillating reactions.
Dynamic electrochemistry: electric double layer, rate of charge transfer, polarisation, fuel
cell, corrosion.
Learning Outcomes
1. Apply the postulates to formulate the modern quantum theory.
2. Solve the Schroedinger equation for the particle-in-a-box problems.
3. State and calculate the thermodynamic quantities from partition functions.
4. Demonstrate competence in applying the collision and transition-state theories.
5. Apply the Michaelis-Menten mechanism to explain an enzyme-catalysed reaction.
1. R.J. Silbey, R.A. Alberty and M.G. Bawendi, Physical Chemistry, 4th Edition, John
Wiley (2005).
2. P.W. Atkins, Physical Chemistry, 7th Edition, Oxford University Press (2002).
3. I.N. Levine, Physical Chemistry, 5th Edition, McGraw-Hill International Edition,
(2002).
4. J. Laider, J.H. Meiser and B.C. Sanctuary, Physical Chemistry, 4th Edition,
Houghton Mifflin Co. (2003).
77
KIT 355/2 Unit Operations Practical KIT 252(c)
Laboratory experiments on the basic theory and practice of unit operations. Fluid flow,
rheology, mixing process, conduction and radiation, process of evaporation, absorption,
distillation, extraction, humidification, drying and filtration.
Learning Outcomes

1. Recognise the various unit operations used in industries.
2. Demonstrate skills in operating the various laboratory-scale unit operations.
3. Display good laboratory practices.
4. Interpret and evaluate data obtained from laboratory measurements.
5. Analyse and present reports in clearly written forms.
Reference
Practical Manual KIT 355.
KIT 356/4 Chemical Processing KOT 121(s)
Introduction of Industries in Malaysia: Introduction of several aspects and characteristics

of Malaysian Industries. Types of local raw materials, utilisations and products. Raw
materials for Inorganic Industriles: Source of raw materials used in Inorganic Industries.
Economics of raw materials.
Water and treatment: Source of water. Water quality, distillation and treatmenrts. Waste
water trearment environment. Uses of water in Industries.
Industrial gases: Gas component in air. Separation of gas component through liquefaction
and distillation. Uses of Industrial gases.
Nitrogen based Industries: Production and utilisation of ammonia, urea, nitric acid and
nitrate derivation. Nitrogen fertilizer.
Sulfur and sulphuric acid: Sulfur extraction and production of sulphuric acid by Contact
Process. Applications.
Hydrochloric acid: Production and Industrial applications of hydrochloric acid.
Phosphates and phosphorous based Industries. Production and utilisation of phosphorous

and phosphoric acid. Inorganic phosphates. Phosphate fertilizers.
Chloro-alkali and related Industries: Production of chlorine and caustic soda by

electrolysis. Design aspects on electrolytic cell. Related products such as hypochloric
soda and bicarbonate.
78
Fine and special chemicals: Defination and classification. Inorganic pigments and their
usefullness. Production of several inorganic pigments. Boron and lithium compounds and
other metallic salts.
Industrial explosive materials: Physical and chemical proporties of explosive materials

and usefulness.
Energy Source and Raw Materials.
Synthesis of Industrial Products: Olefins, acetylene 1,3-diolefins, syntheses that involve
carbon monoxides.
Products of oxidation: ethylene, alcohols, halogenated vinyl and oxygenated vinyl
substances.
Component for polyamides. Products of propene transformation.
Aromatic production and transformation.
Benzene derivates.
Oxidation products of xylenes and napthalene.
Learning Outcomes

1. Describe the production of Inorganic and organic raw materials from chemical
industries.
2. Describe and explain the properties and utilisation of these raw materials.
3. State the origin and production of specialty chemicals.
4. Describe the purification methods and uses of these specialty chemicals and the
related compounds.
5. Identify and apply the various sources of feedstocks used in the nitrogen-, sulphur-,
and phosphate-based industries.
1. R.N. Shreve and J.A. Brink, Chemical Process Industries, 4th. Edition, McGraw-Hill
(1977).
2. R. Thompson Eds, The Modern Inorganic Chemicals Industry (Special Publication,
No.3) Chemical Society (1977)
3. K. Welsermel and W.J. Arpe, Industrial Organic Chemistry, Springer Verlag (1993).
4. H.A. Wittcoff and B.G. Reuben, Industrial Organic Chemistry in Perspective (Vol. 1
& Vol. 2 Wiley (1980).
5. R. Chener, Survey of Industrial Chemistry, VCH (1992).
KIT 357/2 Industrial Chemistry Practical
Industrial related practical: Preparation and application of dyes, wood analysis, metal
extraction and electroplating, metal corrosion, food chemistry, ceramics and polymers.
79
Learning Outcomes
1. Relate chemical principles in laboratory experimental work.
2. Demonstrate skills in several chemical techniques related to industrial processes.
3. Display good laboratory practices.
4. Interpret and evaluate data obtained from laboratory measurements.
5. Analyse and present reports in clearly written forms.
Reference
Practical Manual KIT 357.
KIE 355/3 Industrial Colourants KOT 121/3 (p)
Basic concepts of colour: Electromagnetic spectrum and visible light; colour vision and
colour perception; colour specifications; colour measurement; absorption and reflectance
of light by colorants; fluorescence in organic molecules; colour mixing; colour matching
and colour difference.
Colour and constitution of organic molecules: General structure of colorants; Light

absorption and electronic transitions; resonance; structural effects on max.
Classification of colorants: Chemical classes; application classes; types of textile fibres.
Chemical classes of dyes and pigments: Azo; carbonyl; phthalocyanine; polyene;
polymethine; arylcarbonium ion.
Chemistry and application of synthetic dyes: Direct; acid; basic; disperse; vat; mordant;
metal-complex; sulfur; azoic; reactive; mechanism of interactions with textile fibres.
Pigments: Organic and inorganic pigments; application methods.
Functional colorants: Dyes for special applications (LCD, laser, solar cell);
chemichromisme.
Learning Outcomes

1. Describe the general structure of colourant molecules and relate it with the colour-
producing properties.
2. Identify the main chemical classes of colourants and discuss their properties.
3. Recognise the structural features of synthetic dyes and their interaction with filores.
4. Describe industrial applications of dyes and pigments.
5. Discuss the special functions of colourants in specific applications.
Textbooks and references
1. R.M. Christie, Colour Chemistry, Royal Society of Chemistry (2001).

2. H. Zollinger, Color Chemistry, VCH Verlag (1987)
3. R. McDonald, Color Physics for Industry, Society of Dyers and Colourists (1987).
4. R.L.M. Allen, Colour Chemistry, Thomas Nelson & Son Ltd. (1971)
80
KIE 356/4 Food and Palm Oil Chemistry
Carbohydrates: Classification of structures; dietary utilisation as food component,

reaction-hydrolysis, dehydration and thermal degradation and browning; functions in
foods.
Proteins: Physicochemical properties. General properties: chemical reaction and
interaction of amino acid and protein. Denaturation, functional properties of proteins.
Oil and fats: Type; composition, physical and chemical properties, quality control,
stability, oxidation and anti-oxidant, processing and technology edible oils.
Flavours: Analysis and identification, structures and organoleptic quality, production of
typical flavor substances (vanilin, saccharin etc).
Food additives: Role of acids, bases, salt, chelating agents, antimicrobes and types of
sweeteners. Stabilisers and texturisers.
Structures and composition of palm oil. Chemical properties and non-fatty components.
Physical properties of palm oil. Technology of palm oil. Research trends in chemistry
and technology of palm oil. Practical experiments on quality controls of palm oil.
Learning Outcomes

1. Identify the classification and structures of carbohydrates, proteins and oils and their
physico-chemical properties.
2. Describe the chemical changes of the major food components during processing.
3. Discuss the roles and functions of food additives and flavours.
4. Describe the factors affecting the chemical deterioration of oils and fats during
storage, transportation and frying.
5. Perform analyses of quality parameters in assessing quality of oils and fats.
1. Food Chemistry, 2nd Edition, Edited by Owen R. Fennma Marcel Dekker, Inc.
(1985).
2. L.W. Aurang and A. E. Woods, Food Chemistry, AVI (1973).
3. W. Heimann, Fundamentals of Food Chemistry, AVI (1980).
4. I.D. Gerard, Introductory Food Chemistry, AVI (1976).
5. F.A. Lee, Basic Food Chemistry, AVI (1975).
6. N.N. Potter, Food Science, 3rd Edition, Kluwer Academic Publishing (1978).
7. PORIM Palm Oil Research Bulletin
8. PORIM Palm Oil Technical Bulletin.
81
KIE 358/3 Current Topics in Industrial Chemistry
This course will discuss several topics or current issues in Industrial chemistry.
It will cover the following areas.
1. Industrial colours and textiles.

2. Food Industry.
3. Polymer based Industry.
4. Unit operations and processing.
5. Corrosion Science.
Learning Outcomes

1. Demonstrate understanding in the current issues related to industrial chemistry.
2. Apply fundamentals of chemistry in solving current industrial chemistry problems.
3. Display the ability to discuss the current issues orally and in writing.
1. Books and journal articles related to topics taught.
The duration of Industrial Training in between 8-10 weeks at the local Industries
identified by the school. At the end of the training, students must submit a report and
present a seminar at the school.
Research projects on various chemistry topics.
Learning Outcomes

1. Demonstrate competence in various measurement techniques.
2. Identify problems and demonstrate the problem solving skills.
3. Analyse and interpret the data, write concise reports and discuss the results orally.
4. Demonstrate the ability to use various retrieval methods to obtain information.
82
Index of Courses
Advanced Practical Analytical Chemistry (KAE 248) 65

Analytical Chemistry I (KAT 141) 62
Analytical Chemistry II (KAT 241) 65
Analytical Chemistry Practical II (KAT 340) 76
Analytical Practical I (KAT 243) 66
Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics (KIT 253) 69
Chemical Processing (KIT 356) 78
Chemistry Practical I (KUT 101) 64
Chemistry Practical II (KUT 102) 64
Chemistry Practical V Analytical (KUT 205) 74
Chemistry Practical VI Organic (KUT 206) 74
Chemistry Project (KUE 309) 82
Colloids and Surface Science (KIE 232) 68
Current Topics in Industrial Chemistry (KIE 358) 82
Electroanalytical Methods (KAT 347) 77
Food and Palm Oil Chemistry (KIE 356) 81
Industrial Colourants (KIE 355) 80
Industrial Practical (KIT 357) 79
Inorganic Chemistry I (KTT 111) 63
Inorganic Chemistry II (KTT 212) 73
Material Chemistry (KIT 257) 71
Organic Chemistry I (KOT 121) 63
Organic Chemistry II (KOT 222) 72
Physical Chemistry I (KFT 131) 62
Physical Chemistry II (KFT 232) 67
Physical Chemistry III (KFT 331) 77
Pollution and Environmental Chemistry (KAT 341) 76
Pollution and Environmental Chemistry Practical (KAE 346) 75
Polymer (KIT 254) 70
Separations Methods (KAT 244) 67
Special Topics in Analytical Chemistry (KAE 345) 75
Spectroscopic Methods (KAT 242) 66
Unit Operations (KIT 252) 69
Unit Operations Practical (KIT 355) 78
83
SCHOOL OF PHYSICS
84
SCHOOL OF PHYSICS
INTRODUCTION
The School of Physics which occupies Building G06, G06A and G05 was one of the three
Schools that was set up when the University was established in the year 1969. The main
objective of the School of Physics is to produce Physics and Applied Physics graduates
who are high achievers and possess knowledge suitable to national needs. To achieve this
objective, the School of Physics has provided facilities for the study of Physics and its
related disciplines.
The School of Physics has the following undergraduate disciplines:
Pure Physics
Applied Physics
Engineering Physics
Medical Physics
Geophysics
VISION
Towards global excellence in transdisciplinary research and education in Physics
MISSION
To provide academic, research, educational and social programs for development of

human capital, knowledge, and technology for a sustainable nation
85
MAIN ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF
86
ADMINISTRATION E-MAIL/TELEPHONE
Acting Dean Ext : 3200/3814/3667

Prof. Mohamad Suhaimi Jaafar msj@usm.my
Deputy Dean (Academic and Student Development) Ext : 3650/5123/3667

Prof. Mohamad Suhaimi Jaafar msj@usm.my
Deputy Dean (Research and Graduate Studies) Ext : 2473/5125/3651

Prof. Mohd. Zubir Mat Jafri mjafri@usm.my
Deputy Dean of Industry & Community Network Ext : 5107/3665

Prof. Mohd Nawawi Mohd Nordin mnawawi@usm.my
Programme Chairman
Pure Physics Ext : 5105/3654

Assoc. Prof. Fauziah Sulaiman fauziahsulaiman@usm.my
Applied Physics Ext : 5102/3677

Prof. Md. Roslan Hashim roslan@usm.my
Geophysics Ext : 5107/3663

Assoc. Prof. Lim Hwee San hslim@usm.my
Medical Physics Ext : 5104/3655

Dr. Azhar Abdul Rahman arazhar@usm.my
Engineering Physics Ext : 5103/5305/4849/3670

Assoc. Prof. Azlan Abdul Aziz lan@usm.my
First Year Coordinator Ext : 5108/5314

Dr. Yoon Tiem Leong tlyoon@usm.my
Director For CETREE Ext : 2742/3666

Prof. Haslan Abu Hassan haslan@usm.my
Coordinator for Astronomy and

Atmospheric Science Research Unit Ext : 2115/3715
Assoc. Prof. Nasirun Mohd. Saleh nasirun@usm.my
87
ADMINISTRATION E-MAIL/TELEPHONE
Principal Science Officer Ext : 3666

Mr. Madhavan a/l Raman Kutty madhavan@usm.my
Principal Assistant Registrar Ext : 3025

Mr. Zolkifli Yaakob zolkifli@usm.my
Assistant Registrar Ext : 3204

Mrs. Zuraini Che Harun chzuraini@usm.my
ACADEMIC
TELEPHONE
PROFESSOR E-MAIL
EXTENSION
Abd Aziz Tajuddin B.C.N, Dr. 5001/3090/3983 draat@usm.my
Ahmad Shukri Mustapa Kamal, Dr. 3295/3669 ashukri@usm.my
Fun Hoong Kun, Prof. 3652 hkfun@usm.my
Haslan Abu Hassan, Dr. 2742/3666 haslan@usm.my
Kamarulazizi Ibrahim, Dr. 5113 kamarul@usm.my
Mohamad Suhaimi Jaafar, Dr. 3200/3814/3667 msj@usm.my
Mat Johar Abdullah, Dr. 3679 matjohar@usm.my
Md. Roslan Hashim, Dr. 5102 roslan@usm.my
Mohd. Nawawi Mohd. Nordin, Dr. 5311/5106/3665 mnawawi@usm.my
Mohd. Zubir Mat Jafri, Dr. 2473/5125 mjafri@usm.my
Rosy Teh Chooi Gim, Dr. 3678 rosyteh@usm.my
Zainuriah Hassan, Dr. 3673 zai@usm.my
TELEPHONE
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR E-MAIL
EXTENSION
Abdul Halim Abdul Aziz, Dr. 2476/2039 abdul@usm.my
Abdul Razak Ibrahim, Dr. 3673 arazaki@usm.my
Azlan Abdul Aziz, Dr. 5103/5305/4849 lan@usm.my
Chong Hon Yew, Dr. 3665 hychong@usm.my
Fauziah Sulaiman, Dr. 5105 fauziahsulaiman@usm.my
88
TELEPHONE
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR E-MAIL
EXTENSION
Khiruddin Abdullah, Dr. 2477 khirudd@usm.my
Hassan Mohamed Baioumy, Dr. 5315 hbaioumy@usm.my
Lim Hwee San, Dr. 5107/3663 hslim@usm.my
Lim Siew Choo, Dr. 3438 sclim@usm.my
Mutharasu Devarajan, Dr. 3041 mutharasu@usm.my
Nasirun Mohd. Saleh, Mr. 2115/3676/3715/2480 nasirun@usm.my
Ong Lye Hock, Dr. 3698 onglh@usm.my
Sivamany Kandaiya, Dr. 3670 sivamany@usm.my
Sohail Aziz Khan, Dr. 4178 sakhanphysics@usm.my
TELEPHONE
SENIOR LECTURER E-MAIL
EXTENSION
Adilah Shariff, Dr. 3049 adilah@usm.my
Azhar Abdul Rahman, Dr. 5104/3655 arazhar@usm.my
Azlan Baharin, Dr. 5319 azlanbaharin@usm.my
Eid Mahmoud Eid Abdel_Munem, Dr. 2176 eid@usm.my
Iskandarshah2002@yah
Iskandar Shahrim Mustafa, Mr. 5318
oo.com
Md. Noordin Abu Bakar, Dr. 3676 mnordin@usm.my
Naser Mahmoud Ahmed, Dr. 5302 naser@usm.my
Ng Sha Shiong, Dr. 3041 shashiong@usm.my
Nurhayati Abdullah, Dr. 2475 nurhaya@usm.my
Norhaslinda Mohamed Tahrin, Dr. 2477/2038 haslinda@usm.my
Norzaini Zainal, Dr. 5327 norzaini@usm.my
Quah Ching Kheng, Dr. 3438 ckquah@usm.my
Ramzun Maizan Ramli, Dr. 3667 ramzun@usm.my
Rosli Saad, Dr. 3675 rosli@usm.my
Shahrom Mahmud, Dr. 3643 shahromx@usm.my
Syed Mustafizur Rahman, Dr. 5313 smrahman@usm.my
Wong Chow Jeng, Mr. 3679 wongcj@usm.my
Wong Khai Ming, Dr. 3679 kmwong@usm.my
Yam Fong Kwong, Dr. 3667 yamfk@usm.my
Yoon Tiem Leong, Dr. 3674 tlyoon@usm.my
TELEPHONE
LECTURER E-MAIL
EXTENSION
Yasmin Md Radzi, Mrs. 3668 yasminradzi@usm.my
Yuniarti Ulfa, Mrs. 3674 yuniartiulfa@usm.my
89
TELEPHONE
RESEARCH OFFICER E-MAIL
EXTENSION
Azwa Tan, Mrs. 4179 azwa@usm.my
Ben Kamarrudin Merican, Mr. 5320 benkamar@usm.my
Ibrahim Mustapha, Mr. 3653 mibrahim@usm.my
Mohd Anas Ahmad, Mr. 3671/3599 anasahmad@usm.my
Siti Khadijah Mohd Bakhori, Ms. 5322/3599 skmb@usm.my
Yushamdan Yusof, Mr. 5307/3599 yushamdan@usm.my
Mohd Mustaqim Rosli, Mr. 5324 mustaqim@usm.my
ASSISTANT ENGINEER
Sallehuddin Zamzuri, Mr. 5331/5332 zsallehuddin@us,m.my
Samsudin Mohamad Said, Mr. 5333 samsudinms@usm.my
SENIOR ASSISTANT SCIENCE OFFICER

Othuman Mydin Abdul Rahman, Mr. 4344 othuman@usm.my
ASSISTANT SCIENCE OFFICER

Low Weng Leng, Mr. 5002/3744 wllow@usm.my
Mahfuzah Mohamed Fuad, Mrs. 3690 mahfuzahmf@usm.my
Noor Aswafi Ahmad Zaini, Mr. 3599 aswafi@usm.my
Haslinda Musa, Mrs. 5111/5004 haslinda_musa@usm.my
90
Industry and Community Advisory Panel (ICAP)
School of Physics has established an Industry and Community Advisory Panel (ICAP) for
the purpose of strengthening the relationship and communication with industries as a win-
win strategy for moving toward sustainability. The key role of ICAP is to
provide guidance and advice on programme curricular as well as the establishment of

new courses to produce graduates that meet the industrys needs
exploring the potential collaboration opportunities for promoting synergy in research
and industry based projects
constantly update the fresh perspectives on issues of new and emerging technology,
changing needs of the industry and employment of graduates
Industry and Community Position/Organization Contact

Advisory Panel
Pure Physics Plot 69 (d) & (e), Lintang Bayan
Mr. Mohamad Nasir Lepas 6, Bayan Lepad Industrial
Osman Director Manufacturing Zone Phase 4, Bayan Lepas, 11900
Oryx Advanced Material Penang.
Sdn. Bhd. Email: nasir.osman@oryxadv.com
Tel: 604-6402348 ext 108 (O)
Fax: 04-6421357
Geophysics 7th floor, Menara Promet,
Tuan Haji Ahmad Ziyad Jalan Sultan Ismail,
CEO
Elias 50250 Kuala Lumpur
OROGENIC Group of
Email: ziyad@orogenicgroup.com
Company
Tel: 03 - 2143 4228 (O)
Fax: 03 - 2142 4229
Engineering Physics Bayan Lepas Free Industrial Zone,
Datuk Fong Swee Kiang Director of Intel Penang Phase 3, Halaman Kampung Jawa,
(DJN) Design Center 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang
Intel Microelectronics Email: sk.fong@intel.com
(M) Sdn. Bhd. Tel: 04 - 253 3322
Fax: 04 - 253 1861
Medical Physics 1, Jalan SS 12 / 1A,
Mr. Khoo Boo Huat 47500 Subang Jaya,
Senior Physicist Selangor Darul Ehsan
Sime Darby Medical Email :
Centre Subang Jaya khoo.boo.huat@simedarby.com
Tel: 03 5639 1212
Fax: 03 5639 1675
Applied Physics Phase 3, Free Industrial Zone
Director of AMD C4
Mr. Adi Anuar Basarudin Bayan Lepas, 11900 Penang
Assembly & Subcon
Adi-Anuar.Basarudin@amd.com
Advanced Micro Devices
Tel: 04 - 252 2369
Export Sdn. Bhd.
Fax: 04 - 252 3016
91
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE WITH HONOURS APPLIED PHYSICS
PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES
The objectives of the programme are :
1. to develop skilled human resource in various aspects of Physics fields.
2. to produce knowledgeable and skilled graduates in this field required by the

industries including electronic industries, research and higher education
institutions to fulfill the market demands and needs.
3. to provide human capital who are able to use logical and critical considerations
in their decision making and capable to gain, develop and administer sources of
knowledge.
4. to produce graduates who appreciate various culture and able to contribute and
lead effectively
PROGRAMME LEARNING OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, students are able to:
1. understand and assimilate the fundamental concepts and theories of physics.
2. apply analytical skills and is competent in a variety of physics techniques to

solve problems.
3. identify, formulate, analyze and solve applied and industrial problems.
4. present and defend applied physics ideas effectively in written and oral form.
5. work collaboratively as part of a team.
6. pursue independent study and continuous personal and professional

development.
7. be a skilled and innovative leader.
8. become professional, responsible and ethical in work and in dealing with others.
92
BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE WITH HONOURS GEOPHYSICS
1. to produce trained manpower in various aspects in the field of geophysics.
2. to produce skillful and knowledgeable graduates in the industrial fields,

including oil and gas industries as well as higher institutions to fulfill the needs
of the country.
3. to provide human resources that are able to apply logical, critical and analytical
concepts/ideas/thinking to exploit, develop and manage the knowledge-based
resources.
4. to produce graduates who can appreciate cultural diversity, professionalism and

are able to contribute and lead effectively.
1. be competent in the basic concepts and theories of geophysical methods.
2. identify and solve various geophysical problems.
3. communicate ideas in geophysics clearly and effectively.
4. work in a team.
5. conduct independent study.
7. be resourceful, dynamics and innovative.
8. be professional, responsible and ethical.
93
BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE WITH HONOURS ENGINEERING
PHYSICS

knowledge.
lead effectively
1. be competent in the basic concepts and theories of engineering physics.

2. identify and solve various problems related to engineering physics.
3. communicate ideas in engineering physics clearly and effectively.
4. work in a team.
5. conduct independent study.
7. be resourceful, dynamics and innovative.
8. be professional, responsible and ethical.
94
BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE WITH HONOURS MEDICAL PHYSICS

knowledge.
lead effectively
1. fundamental and broad principles of physics, in particular on radiation physics

and dosimetry, medical instrumentations and diagnostic imaging modalities,
including nuclear medicine, magnetic resonance and ultrasound.
2. ability to perform experiments, acquire and analyze construe data.
3. diversified skills related to technological literacy, critical thinking, problem

solving, communicative, and social responsibilities.
4. adherence to professionalism, values, ethics and observe accountability in

execution of tasks.
5. ability in communication, leadership, team working and other related skills.
6. ability to apply logical reasoning and critical thinking in scientific matters and
issues.
7. ability to keep track, understand physical principles and updating information

know-how of latest medical imaging modalities.
8. self-reliance and able to manage and guide effectively in matters related to

scientific tasks.
95
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF
APPLIED SCIENCE WITH HONOURS APPLIED PHYSICS, GEOPHYSICS,
ENGINEERING PHYSICS AND MEDICAL PHYSICS (THREE YEAR)
Major-Elective or Major-Minor Applied Physics/Geophysics/Engineering

Physics/Medical Physics Programme
A student must attain a minimum of 2.0 CGPA ('C' average) for the whole programme
and combined basic and core component.
As regards to the basic and core courses, if failed, a student is allowed to replace a
maximum of 8 units of the courses failed with courses of at least similar level offered
under the Degree of Bachelor of Science with Honours Programme of Study in Physics.
Programme Stucture for Bachelor of Applied Science with Honours Degree

Programme Applied Physics
Core Courses

ZCA 102/4 Physics II (Electricity and Magnetism)
*ZCA 110/4 Calculus and Linear Algebra
ZCT 103/3 Physics III (Vibrations, Waves and Optics)
ZCT 106/3 Electronics I
ZCT 191/2 Physics Practical I
ZCT 192/2 Physics Practical II
ZCT 205/3 Quantum Mechanics
ZCT 206/3 Electronics II
ZCT 207/2 Statistical Mechanics
ZCT 210/4 Complex Analysis and Differential Equations
ZCT 211/2 Vector Analysis
ZCT 212/2 Thermodynamics
ZAT 281/4 Introduction to Microprocessors
ZAT 283/3 Instrumentation
ZCT 293/2 Physics Practical III
ZCT 307/3 Solid State Physics I
ZAT 386/4 Physics of Semiconductor Devices
ZAT 387/4 Semiconductor Fabrication Processes
ZAT 389/3 Low Dimensional Semiconductor Structures
ZAT 394/6 Applied Physics Project and Seminar
Total: 70 units (22 courses)
* The course content of ZCA 110/4 overlaps with Mathematics

courses MAA 101/4 Calculus and MAA 111/4 Linear Algebra.
Students can only register either ZCA 110/4 or MAA 101/4 and
MAA 111/4 .
96
Elective Course
Students must select 20 units, at least 16 units from the group of courses below and the
remaining units from either the Science or Applied Science programmes. Students are
encouraged to take MAT181/4 Programming for Science Application.
ZAE 282/3 Materials Science

ZAE 376/4 Astronomy Principles and Practices
ZAE 384/4 Laser and Its Applications
ZAE 385/4 Applied Spectroscopy
ZAE 388/4 Non-Destructive Testing
ZKT 222/3 Electronic and Photonic Materials I
ZCE 111/4 Computational Physics
ZCE 275/4 Introduction to Astronomy
ZKE 327/3 Solid State Lighting I
ZCE 341/4 Energy Studies
ZCE 351/3 X-Ray Analysis
MAT 181/4 Programming for Science Applications
Industrial Training
Industrial training which is optional is encouraged and the training is usually in the long
vacation after Year II.
ZCE 299 Industrial Training
Progress Schedule for Course Registration of Bachelor of Applied Science with
Honours Degree Programme Applied Physics
Year Semester Courses No. of

Units
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I ZCA 101/4 ZCA 102/4 ZCA 110/4 ZCT 191/2 14
1
II ZCT 103/3 ZCT 104/3 ZCT 106/3 ZGT 192/2 11
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I ZCT 206/3 ZCT 210/4 ZCT 211/2 ZCT 212/2 --- ---3* ZCT 293/2 16
2
II ZCT205/2 ZCT207/2 ZAT 281/4 ZAT 283/3 --- ---/4* 15
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I ZCT 307/3 ZAT 386/4 --- ---/2* 12
3 ZAT 394/6@
II ZAT 387/4 ZAT 389/3 --- ---/4* --- ---/4* --- ---/4* 22
90
Note: * Elective Course (according to choice)
@ Course conducted over two semesters (each semester contribute 3 units).
97
Electives
Select at least 16 units from the group of elective courses plus 4 units from other
Sciences :
Field Semester I Semester II Total Units
Applied Physics ZAE 282/3 ZAE 384/4

ZAE 385/4 ZAE 388/4
ZAE 376/4 ZCE 275/4
ZKT 222/3 40
Engineering Physics +ZKE 327/3 ZCE 341/4
Pure Physics ZCE 351/3 ZCE 111/4
ZCE111/4
Other Sciences :
Mathematics MAT 181/4* 4
44
*Recommended as Other Science
+ Only for Applied and Engineering Physics programmes
Minor Area of Specialisation
The recommended Minor areas of specialisation are as follows:-
1. Astronomy
2. Chemistry
3. Mathematics
4. Computer Science
5. Management
6. Islamic Studies
7. English Language
Students must pass 16 units from the Minor area of specialisation. Please refer to the
School concerned to obtain further information.
Student must also pass 4 units of elective courses selected from any group of electives
listed in Elective Courses above.

Programme Geophysics
Core Courses

98
ZGT 161/3 Geology I
ZGT 162/3 Geology II
ZGT 190/2 Geology Practical
ZGT 264/2 Geophysical Data Analysis
ZGT 265/3 Meteorology I
ZGT 266/3 Solid Earth Geophysics I
ZGT 267/3 Solid Earth Geophysics II
ZGT 268/3 Exploration Geophysics I
ZGT 269/3 Exploration Geophysics II
ZGT 270/3 Meteorology II
ZGT 272/3 Introduction to Oceanography
ZGT 295/4 Geophysics Practical
ZGT 374/3 Remote Sensing
ZGT 395/6 Geophysics Project

MAA 111/4 .
Elective Courses
ZGE 277/4 Structure of the Universe

ZGE 360/3 Synoptic Meteorology
ZGE 361/2 Advanced Geology
ZGE 364/3 Tropical Meteorology and Forecasting
ZGE 371/3 Potential Field Interpretation
ZGE 373/3 Seismic Data Processing
ZGE 375/2 Engineering and Environmental Geophysics
ZGE 379/3 Geological Oceanography
Industrial Training
Industrial training which is optional is encouraged and the training is usually in the long
vacation after Year II.
99
Honours Degree Programme Geophysics

Units
I ZCA 101/4 ZCA 102/4 ZCA 110/4 ZGT 161/3 ZCT 191/2 17
1
II ZCT 103/3 ZCT 104/3 ZGT 162/3 ZGT 190/2 11
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I ZCT 210/4 ZCT 211/2 ZGT 265/3+ ZGT 266/3 ZGT 268/3 17
2 ZGT 295/4@
II ZGT 264/2 ZGT 267/3 ZGT 269/3 ZGT 270/3+ --- ---/4* 17
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I ZGT 272/3 ZGE ---/3* ZGE ---/3* ZGE ---/2* 14
3 ZGT 395/6@
II ZGT 374/3 ZGT ---/3* ZGE ---/3* ZGE ---/2* 14
90
Note: * Elective Courses (according to choice)

+ For students who are also taking a Minor,
these courses can be taken in their Third Year of studies
@ Course conducted over two semesters
Electives
Select at least 16 units from the group of Elective courses below:
Geophysics ZGE 277/4 ZGE 364/3

ZGE 360/3 ZGE 375/2 27
ZGE 361/2 ZGE 379/3
ZGE 371/3 ZCE 111/4
ZGE 373/3
Mathematics MAT 181/4 4
31

1. Astronomy
2. Mathematics
3. Computer Science
4. Management
5. Chemistry
6. Islamic Studies
7. English Language
100
Students must pass 16 units from the Minor area of specialisation followed. Refer to the
School concerned for further information.
Students must pass 4 units of one Elective course selected from group of the Elective
courses from the above list.

Programme Engineering Physics
Core Courses

ZCT 192/2 Physics Practical Il
ZCT 213/2 Optics
ZKT 221/2 Engineering Design
ZKT 296/2 Photonics Laboratory
ZKT 297/3 Practical Training
ZCT 304/3 Electricity and Magnetism
ZKT 321/3 The Engineer in Society
ZKT 396/6 Engineering Physics Projects
Total : 70 units (24 courses)

MAA 111/4 .
101
Elective Courses

ZCT 218/3 Mathematical Methods
ZKE 322/3 Electronic and Photonic Materials II
ZKE 323/3 Electronic and Photonic Devices and Systems
ZKE 324/2 Photonic Display and Storage Technology
ZKE 325/4 Optical Fiber Technology and Optical Communication
ZKE 326/4 Signal and Image Processing
ZKE 328/3 Solid State Lighting II
ZKE 378/4 Introduction to Radio Astronomy
Or CMP 101/4
Industrial Training
Industrial training which is optional is encouraged and the training is usually during the
long vacation after Year II.

Honours Degree Programme Engineering Physics

Units
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I ZCA 101/4 ZCA 102/4 ZCA 110/4 ZCT 191/2 14
1
II ZCT 103/3 ZCT 104/3 ZCT 106/3 ZCT 192/2 MAT 181/4 15
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I ZCT 206/3 ZCT 210/4 ZCT 211/2 ZCT 212/2 ZCT 213/2 ZCT 293/2 ZKT 297/3 17
2
II ZCT 205/3 ZCT 207/2 ZKT 221/2 ZKT 222/3 ZKT 296/2 --- ---/4* 17
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@
I ZKT 321/3 ZCT 307/3 ZKT 396/6 --- ---/6* 15
3
II ZCT 304/3 ZKT 396/6@ - ---/6* 12
90
102
Electives
Select at least 16 units from the group of elective courses below:
Engineering Physics ZKE 322/3 ZAE 384/4

ZKE 323/3 ZCT 218/3
ZKE 327/3 ZKE 324/2
ZCE111/4 ZKE 325/4 37
ZKE 326/4
ZKE 328/3
ZKE 378/4
ZCE 111/4
Mathematics/ MAT 181/4

Computer Science or MAT 181/4
CMP 101/4 or 4
CMP 101/4
41
1. Astronomy
2. Chemistry
3. Mathematics
4. Computer Science
5. Management
6. Islamic Studies
7. English Language
School concerned for further information.
Students must pass 4 units of Elective courses selected from any group of Elective
courses listed above.
103
Programme Medical Physics
Core Courses

ZCT 192/2 Physics Practical II
ZCT 207/2 Statistics Mechanics
ZCT 213/2 Optics
ZMT 298/2 Medical Physics Practical
ZMT 231/4 Human Anatomy and Physiology
ZMT 334/3 Physics of Diagnostic Radiology
ZCE 331/4 Radiation Biophysics
ZMT 335/3 Physics of Radiotherapy and Nuclear Medicine
ZMT 397/6 Medical Physics Project

MAA 111/4 .
104
Electives Courses
ZME 336/4 Medical Instrumentations

ZME 338/4 Physics of Medical Imaging
ZCE 305/3 Atomic and Nuclear Physics
Industrial Training
Industrial training which is optional is encouraged and the training is usually during the
long vacation after Year II.

Honours Degree Programme Medical Physics
Year Semester Courses .No of

Units
I ZCA 101/4 ZCA 102/4 ZCA 110/4 ZCT 191/2 14

1
II ZCT 103/3 ZCT 104/3 ZCT 106/3 MAT 181/4* ZCT 192/2 15
I ZCT 206/3 ZCT 210/4 ZCT 211/2 ZCT 212/2 ZCT 213/2 ZCT 293/2 15
2
II ZCT 205/3 ZCT 207/2 ZMT 231/4 --- ---/4* ZMT 298/2 15
I ZCE 331/4 ZCT 307/3 --- ---/4* --- ---/4* 18

3 ZMT 397/6@
II ZMT 335/3 ZMT 334/3 ZAE 384/4* 13
90
Note: * Elective Courses (according to choice)

@ Course conducted over two semesters
105
Electives
Select at least 16 units from the group of Elective courses below:
Medical Physics ZCE 305/3 ZAE 384/4

ZME 336/4 ZCE 111/4
ZME 338/4 19
ZCE 111/4
Mathematics MAT 181/4 4
Other Sciences --- ---/4* 4
27
* Other Science Electives (4 units) that are offered in Semester II can be chosen from the
following courses:

MAA161/4 Statistics for Science Students
BOI109/4 Biostatistics
ZCE341/4 Energy Studies
IEK102/3 Treatment, Disposal and Management of Solid Waste and Schedule
Waste
1. Astronomy
2. Chemistry
3. Mathematics
4. Computer Science
5. Management
6. Islamic Studies
7. English Language
School concern for further information.
Students must pass 4 units of Elective courses selected from any group of Elective
courses listed above.
106
LIST OF COURSES OFFERED FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF
APPLIED SCIENCE WITH HONOURS PROGRAMME APPLIED PHYSICS,
GEOPHYSICS, ENGINEERING PHYSICS AND MEDICAL PHYSICS
Semester I
Level of Course Code/ Prerequisite
Course Title
100 ZCA 101/4 Physics I (Mechanics) -
ZCA 102/4 Physics II (Electricity and Magnetism) -
ZCA 110/4 Calculus and Linear Algebra -
ZCE 111/4 Computational Physics -
ZGT 161/3 Geology I (C) ZCA101/4
ZCT 191/2 Physics Practical I -
200 ZCT 206/3 Electronics II (S) ZCT 106/3

ZCT 210/4 Complex Analysis and Differential (S) ZCA 110/4
Equations
ZCT 211/2 Vector Analysis (S) ZCA110/4
or (S) MAA101/4
ZCT 212/2 Thermodynamics (S) ZCA 102/4
ZCT 213/2 Optics (S) ZCT 103/3
ZGT 265/3 Meteorology I (C) ZGT 266/3
ZGT 266/3 Solid Earth Geophysics I (S) ZGT 162/3
ZGT 268/3 Exploration Geophysics I (C) ZGT 266/3
ZGT 272/3 Introduction to Oceanography (P) ZCA 101/4
(S) ZGT 162/3
ZAE 282/3 Material Science -
ZGE 277/4 Structure of The Universe -
ZCT 293/2 Physics Practical III (S) ZCT 192/2
ZGT 295/4 Geophysics Practical (two semesters) (S) ZGT 190/2
ZGT 297/3 Practical Training (S) ZCT 192/2
300 ZCE 305/3 Atomic and Nuclear Physics (S) ZCT 205/3
ZCT 307/3 Solid State Physics I (C) ZCT 207/2
ZKT 321/3 The Engineer in Society -
ZKE 322/3 Electronic and Photonic Materials II (S) ZKT 222/3
ZKE 323/3 Electronic and Photonic Devices and (S) ZCT 106/3
Systems (S) ZCT 213/2
ZKE 327/3 Solid State Lighting I (C) ZCT307/3
ZCE 331/4 Radiation Biophysics (P) ZCT 104/3
ZME 336/4 Medical Instrumentations (S) ZCT 106/3
ZME 338/4 Physics of Medical Imaging (S) ZCT 106/3
ZCE 351/3 X-Ray Analysis (C) ZCT 307/3
ZGE 360/3 Synoptic Meteorology (S) ZGT 270/3
ZGE 371/3 Potential Field Interpretation (S) ZGT 269/3
ZGT 374/3 Remote Sensing (P) ZCA 102/4
(S) ZCT 103/3
107
ZGE 375/2 Engineering and Environmental (S) ZGT 268/3
Geophysics
ZAE 376/4 Astronomy Principles and Practices (S) ZGE 277/4
ZAE 385/4 Applied Spectroscopy (S) ZAT 283/3
ZAT 386/4 Physics of Semiconductors Devices (S) ZCT 106/3
(C) ZCT 307/3
ZCT 390/6 Pure Physics Project (two semesters) (S) ZCT 294/2
ZAT 394/6 Applied Physics Project and Seminar (P) ZCT 293/2
(two semesters)
ZMT 397/6 Medical Physics Project (S) MAT 181/4
(two semesters) (S) MAT 181/4
(S) ZMT 298/2
ZGT 395/6 Geophysics Project (two semesters) (S) ZGT 295/4
ZKT 396/6 Engineering Physics Project (S) ZKT 296/2
(two semesters)
Semester II
Level of Course Code/ Prerequisite

Course Title
100 *ZCU 100/2 Energy and The Environment -
ZCA 101/4 Physics I (Mechanics) -
ZCA 102/4 Physics II (Electricity and Magnetism) -
ZCT 103/3 Physics III (Vibrations, Waves and -
Optics)
ZCT 104/3 Physics IV (Modern Physics) -
ZCT 106/3 Electronics I (S) ZCA 102/4
ZCE 111/4 Computational Physics -
ZGT 162/3 Geology II (S) ZGT 161/3
ZGT 190/2 Geology Practical (C) ZGT 161/3
ZCT 192/2 Physics Practical II (S) ZCT 191/2
200 ZCT 205/3 Quantum Mechanics (S) ZCT 104/3

ZCT 207/2 Statistical Mechanics (S) ZCT 212/2
ZCE 208/2 Classical Mechanics (P) ZCA 101/4
(S) ZCT 210/4
(S) ZCT 211/2
ZCT 218/3 Mathematical Methods (S) ZCT 210/4
(S) ZCT 211/2
(S) ZCT 211/2
ZKT 221/2 Engineering Design (S) MAT 181/4
ZKT 222/3 Electronic and Photonic Materials I (S) ZCT 106/3
(C) ZCT 212/2
ZMT 231/4 Human Anatomy and Physiology -
ZGT 264/2 Geophysical Data Analysis (S) ZCT 210/4
ZGT 267/3 Solid Earth Geophysics II (S) ZGT 162/3
108
ZGT 269/3 Exploration Geophysics II (C) ZGT 267/3
ZGT 270/3 Meteorology II (C) ZGT 264/2
(S) ZGT 265/3
ZCE 275/4 Introduction to Astronomy -
ZAT 281/4 Introduction to Microprocessors (P) ZCT 206/3
ZAT 283/3 Instrumentation (S) ZCT 293/2
(C)ZCT 206/3
ZCT 294/2 Physics Practical IV (S) ZCT 293/2
ZGT 295/4 Geophysics Practical (two semesters) (S) ZGT 190/2
ZKT 296/2 Photonics Lab (S) ZCT 293/2
ZMT 298/2 Medical Physics Practical (S) ZCT 293/2
300 ZCT 304/3 Electricity and Magnetism (S) ZCA 102/4

(S) ZCT 210/4
(S) ZCT 211/2
ZCT 317/3 Solid State Physics II (S) ZCT 307/3
ZKE 324/4 Display and Storage Technology (S) ZCT 213/2
ZKE 325/4 Optical Fiber Technology and Optical (S) ZCT 213/2
Communications (C) ZCT 304/3
ZKE 326/4 Signal and Image Processing -
ZKE 328/3 Solid State Lighting II (S) ZKE 327/3
ZMT 334/3 Physics of Diagnostic Radiology (S) ZCT 104/3
ZMT 335/3 Physics of Radiotherapy and Nuclear (S) ZCT 104/3
Medicine
ZCE 341/4 Energy Studies (S) ZCT 106/3
ZGE 361/2 Advanced Geology (S) ZGT 162/3
ZGE 364/3 Tropical Meteorology and Forecasting (S) ZGT 270/3
ZGE 373/3 Seismic Data Processing (S) ZGT 268/3
ZKE 378/4 Introduction to Radio Astronomy (S) ZAE 376/4
ZGE 379/3 Geology Oceanography (C) ZGT 272/3
ZAE 384/4 Laser and Its Applications (S) ZCT 104/3
ZAT 387/4 Semiconductor Fabrication Processes (S) ZAT 386/3
ZAE 388/4 Non Destructive Testing (S) ZCT 104/3
ZAT 389/3 Low Dimensional Semiconductor (S) ZCT 307/3
Structures
ZCT 390/6 Pure Physics Projects (two semesters) (S) ZCT 294/2
ZAT 394/6 Applied Physics Project and Seminar (P) ZCT 293/2
(two semesters)
ZMT 397/6 Medical Physics Project (S) MAT 181/4
(two semesters) (S) ZMT 298/2
ZGT 395/6 Geophysics Project (two semesters) (S) ZGT 295/4
ZKT 396/6 Engineering Physics Project (S) ZKT 296/2
(two semesters)
Note: *This course is not offered to physics students.
P = Pass S = Sequential C = Concurrent
109
PHYSICS COURSES AS BASIC, CORE, ELECTIVE, OPTION AND AUDIT FOR
STUDENTS WHO DO NOT MAJOR IN PHYSICS
Courses offered by the School of Physics can be followed as Basic, Core, Elective,
Option and Audit courses by students who do not major in Physics if basically they have
fulfilled the prerequisite of the courses selected.
CONTENT-OVERLAP COURSES
The list of content-overlap courses will be announced in due course.
Regarding courses concerned from other Schools, please refer to your Academic Adviser.
PRIZES AND DEANS LIST
There are five prizes in the field of Physics that can be won by students in each academic
session:
Honourable Dato Professor Chatar Singh Gold Medal is awarded to the best graduate
in the field of Physics.
Ranjeet Singh Memorial Gold Medal is awarded to the best graduate in the field of
Geophysics.
Tan Kok Hin Book Prize is awarded to the best graduate of the Degree of Bachelor of
Applied Science with Honours in the field of Applied Physics.
Universiti Sains Malaysia Gold Medal is awarded to the best graduate of the Degree of
Bachelor in the field of Engineering Physics sponsored by Prof. Lim Koon Ong.
Universiti Sains Malaysia Gold Medal is awarded to the best graduate of the Degree of
Bachelor in the field of Medical Physics sponsored by Staff School of Physics.
Other than the prizes stated above, the Universiti Sains Malaysia Gold Medal is
awarded to the best graduate of the Degree of Bachelor of Science with Honours.
Universiti Sains Malaysia Gold Medal (Ladies Association) is awarded to a female

graduate who is the best in all fields (academic and co-curriculum activities).
The Educational Award (Gold Medal, Certificate, RM1000) given by the Council of
Rulers is awarded to a Malay and a Non-Malay who is the best in all fields in each
University.
The Chancellors Gold Medal for the Universiti Sains Malaysia Best All-Round
Student is awarded to the graduate who has achieved distinction academic results and
possess a record of active involvement in extra-curricular activities.
110
The Deans List is awarded to physics students who have achieved a certain level of
excellence in their academic performance. The Deans List is awarded every semester.
STAFF AND STUDENT COMMITTEE
The Staff and Student Committee was formed in the School to strengthen the relationship
between students and staff. The Chairman of this Committee is the Deputy Dean. This
Committee meets from time to time and it functions as an open forum to discuss matters
concerning academic, welfare and non-academic activities. The student representatives to
this Committee are elected by Physics students at the beginning of each academic session.
STUDENTS OPTIONAL TRAINING PROGRAMME
The Students Optional Training Programme was formed to strengthen the relationship
between the University and the private and public sectors and provide exposure to
working-life for students. Students in the second year are qualified to apply to serve as
trainees with various employers for six to eight weeks during the long vacation of the
academic session. During this period, it is the hope that they will observe the research
and management opportunities in the industrial, business and public sectors, and note the
problems and work situations, and study the opportunities to implement theories of
science. After completion of training, the students would be required to submit to the
University a report regarding their experiences.
THE MENTOR SYSTEM
This system was made available to assist students overcome problems especially with
regards to academic matters. Students will be guided so that they will be able to face
academic challenges independently.
SCHEME FOR STUDYING ABROAD
The objective of this scheme is to create students awareness at the international level by
allowing them to register for one semester at a chosen university abroad.
FACILITIES
Teaching laboratories for practical classes, research laboratories, workshop, Student

Centre, computer laboratories, microprocessor laboratory, CAI laboratory, postgraduate
rooms, Resource Centre and seminar/tutorial rooms for Physics student usage in Building
G05, G06 and G06A.
111
SYNOPSES OF BASIC COURSES PHYSICS
Unit and dimension. Kinematics in 1 and 2 dimension. Vectors in physics. Newtons

Laws and applications. Work and energy. Conservation of energy and momentum.
Collision in 1 and 2 dimension. Simple harmonic motion.
Universal gravitation, gravitational force. Motion of planets. Extended systems, moment

of inertia. Angular momentum, rotational dynamics, compound pendulum. Rigid body,
equilibrium, static. Elasticity, stress, strain and torsion. Youngs modulus, shear modulus
and bulk modulus. Bending of beams, bending moment.
Compression of fluids, surface tension, hydrostatics, viscosity. Hydrodynamics,

continuity equation, Bernoulli equation, Poiseuille equation. Turbulent flow,
sedimentation and drag.
Learning Outcomes:
1. apply the basic principles of mechanics and fundamental laws of physics
2. study and solve simple problems related to basic principles of mechanics and
fundamental laws of physics
3. analyze problems and search alternative solution for solving simple problems
Ref. Books: 1. Serway, R.A. & Jewett, J.W. Principles of Physics (7th Ed.)
Brooks/Cole, 2008
2. Halliday, D., Resnick, R., Walker, J., Fundamentals of Physics

Extended (8th Ed.), John Wiley & Sons, 2008.
Coulombs law, electric intensity. Gausss law, electric flux. Electric potential and
electric intensity of point charges, dipole and charge distributions. Capacitance,
dielectrics, stored energy. Electric current, resistance, Ohms law, Kirchhoffs law.
Microscopic view of current. D.C. RC circuit. Magnetic fields, Amperes law, Biot-
Savart law. Faradays law. Lenzs law. Inductance, stored energy, D.C. LR circuit. A.C.
current, electric power, RCL circuit. Force on current and moving charge. Lorentz
equation, Halls effect.
Dielectric materials, dipole moment, electric polarization. Material resistivity,

temperature effect. Electromagnetic waves, electromagnetic spectrum. Magnetic field
and electric field vectors. Maxwell displacement current, Maxwell equations.
112
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic fundamental physical laws and principles of electricity and
magnetism which govern and give meaning to our universe
2. demonstrate an understanding of scientific methods and the evolution of scientific

thought
3. explain and solve problems related to electricity and magnetism
4. display basic physical principles and analyze the procedural knowledge to arrive at
a solution for some desired unknown, when presented with problem situations
5. demonstrate mathematical skills necessary to carry an argument from the given to

the to find alluded in (4) above
Text Books: 1. Raymond A.Serway & John W. Jewett (2003), Principles of

Physics, 6th Edition, Brooks/Cole-Thomson Learning.
Ref. Books: 2. D. Halliday, R. Resnick, J. Walker (2001), Fundamentals of

Physics, 6th edition, John Wiley & Sons.
3. H.D. Young, R.A. Freedman (1996). University Physics, 9th

Edition, Addison Wesley.
ZCA 110/4 Calculus and Linear Algebra
Calculus:
Sets, real numbers, rational and complex numbers. Functions and graphs. Sequences and
series, convergence tests, function limits and properties of limit, continuity, and the mean
value theorem.
Differentation techniques, implicit differentiation, higher order differentiation, minimum

and maximum values (theory and application), Rolles theorem, L Hopitals rule,
applications of derivatives.
Integration techniques, improper integrals, fundamental theorem, lengths of curves.

Trigonometric functions and their inverses, exponential and logarithmic functions,
hyperbolic functions and their inverses.
113
Matrices and Determinants:
Matrix algebra, determinant, properties of determinant, inverse of a matrix, systems of

equations, vector spaces, Basis and dimension, linear transformations.
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic concepts in differentiation and integration
2. analyse and identify suitable differentiation law(s) or techniques of integration to be

applied in different situations
3. explain the basic concepts about series
4. explain the basic concepts in linear algebra and vector spaces
Text Books: 1. George B. Thomas, Maurice D. Weir, Joel Hass and Frank R.
Giordano, Thomas Calculus, (11th Edition) Addison-Wesley
Publishing (2005)
2. Frank Ayres, Schaums Outline of Theory and Problems of

Matrices, (SI Metric Edition) McGraw-Hill (1974).
Ref. Books: 1. Howard Anton, Irl Bivens, and Stephen Davis, Calculus, (7th
Edition) John Wiley and Sons (2002)
2. Seymour Lipschutz and Marc Lipson, Schaums Outline of Linear

Algebra, (3rd International Edition) McGraw-Hill (2001).
3. James Stewart, Calculus, (5th Edition) Thomson Brooks/Cole

(2003)
114
SYNOPSES OF CORE COURSES PHYSICS
Equation of motion for simple harmonic motion, damped oscillator, forced oscillator.
Logarithmic decrement, relaxation time, resonance and Q factor.
Coupled oscillations. Transverse waves and longitudinal waves. The wave equation and
its solutions. Reflection and transmission of waves at boundaries. Stationary waves.
Superposition of waves. Phase velocity and group velocity. Dispersion of waves.
Electromagnetic wave spectrum. Plane electromagnetic waves in vacuum. Propagation

of light waves, amplitude and intensity. Doppler effect. Interference, Youngs double
slits, Michelson interferometer. Multiple reflections, thin films, Newtons rings and
Fabry-Perot interferometer. Diffraction grating. Dispersion, Cauchy formula.
Polarization, Brewster angle. Light sources and light detectors.
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic principles related to vibrations, waves and optics
2. explain the basic concepts of simple harmonic motion, forced oscillator, longitudinal
and transverse waves, nature of electromagnetic waves, interference of light,
diffraction pattern and polarization
3. analyze and solve problems related to vibrations, waves and optics
Ref. Books: 1. Serway, R.A. & Jewett, J.W. Physics for Scientists and Engineers
with Modern Physics (6th Ed.), Thomson, 2006.
2. Pain, H.J. The Physics of Vibration and Waves (6th. Ed.), John
Wiley & Sons, 2005.
3. Lee, B.S. Getaran dan Gelombang, USM, 1989.
4. Jenkins, F.A. & White, H.E. Fundamentals of Optics (4th Ed.),

McGraw-Hill, 2001
5. Chatar Singh. Optik , USM, 1991.
6. Hecht E. Optics, Addison-Wesley, 2001.
115
Special Relativity: Reference frames, invariance of Newtons dynamics. Galilean

transformation, invariance for other laws. Michelson-Morley experiment. Postulates of
special relativity. Lorentz transformation. Relativistic kinematics and dynamics.
Einstein formula.
Introduction to modern ideas in Physics: Blackbody radiation, Plancks law.

Photoelectric effect, Compton effect, X-rays. Wave-particle duality, de Broglie waves.
Old atomic models. Alpha-scattering, Rutherford model. Old quantum theory and the
Bohr model of the atom. Energy levels of the atom and atomic spectra. Excitation and
the Franck-Hertz experiment. Bohrs Correspondence Principle.
Learning Outcomes:
1. describe the basic ideas in special theory of relativity and quantum theory
2. explain the conceptual differences between classical physics and modern physics in
framing the law of physics
3. solve problems related to special theory of relativity and quantum theory
Ref. Books: 1. Concepts of Modern Physics, 6th ed. By Athur Beiser, McGraw-
Hill (2002).
2. Modern Physics, 2nd ed., by Kenneth Krane, John Wiley & Sons
(1995)
3. Modern Physics, 3rd ed., by Serway, Moses and Moyer, Thomson

(2005).
Analysis of circuits. Alternating current circuits. Thevenins Theorem and Nortons

Theorem. Characteristics of diodes and their uses in circuits., rectifying circuits. Signal
processing circuits. Bipolar junction transistors and Field effect transistors, input
characteristics and output characteristics. Large signal amplifiers, amplification,
distortion and frequency response. Power amplifier. Small signal amplifiers and hybrid
parameters. Theory of positive and negative feedback. Operational amplifiers and their
applications.
Prerequisite: (S) ZCA 102/4 Physics II (Electricity and Magnetism)
116
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the characteristics and operation of components and devices, principles and
theory, and apply them to solve electronic circuits
2. show the ability to design simple electronic circuits with the basic electronic
knowledge to solve an operation or problem
3. display the mature learning skills to study more advanced courses in electronic plus
relating it for application in the industry
Ref. Books: 1. Smith R.J. & Dorf R.C. Circuits Devices and Systems ( 5th
ed. ) John Wiley & Sons ( 1992 )
2. Brophy J.J. Basic Electronics for Scientists ( 5th ed )

McGraw-Hill (1990)
3. Boylestad R.L. & Nashelsky L. Electronic Devices and

Circuit Theory ( 8th ed. ) Prentice-Hall ( 2002)
4. Brophy J.J. Elektronik Asas untuk Ahli Sains ( 4th ed. )

McGraw-Hill ( Terjemahan oleh Chong Chon Sing, Penerbit
USM, 1990 )
ZCT 191/2 Physics Practicals I
Consist of a selection of experiments.
Learning Outcomes:
1. use the basic concepts of Physics during laboratory session
2. assemble various equipments in the Physics laboratory
3. discuss the experimental data
4. write a laboratory formal report based on the proposed format
117
Ref. Books: 1. Ellis, John G., 1978 Safety and Laboratory Practice, Macmillan, UK.
2. Kelsey, Charles A. 1983, Radiation Safety for Laboratory

Technicians, Warren H. Green, St. Louis.
3. Isenberg C. 1985 Physics Experiments and Projects for Students,

Newman-Hemisphere, London.
4. Wilson, Jerry D. 2005 Physics Laboratory Experiments, Houghton

Mifflin, Boston.
ZCT 192/2 Physics Practicals II
Prerequisite: (S) ZCT 191/2 Physics Practicals I
Learning Outcomes:
1. use the basic concepts of Physics during laboratory session
2. assemble various equipments in the Physics laboratory
3. discuss the experimental data
4. write a laboratory formal report based on the proposed format
Ref. Books: 1. Ellis, John G., 1978 Safety and Laboratory Practice, Macmillan,
UK.
2. Kelsey, Charles A. 1983, Radiation Safety for Laboratory

Technicians, Warren H. Green, St. Louis.
3. Isenberg C. 1985 Physics Experiments and Projects for

Students, Newman-Hemisphere, London.
4. Wilson, Jerry D. 2005 Physics Laboratory Experiments,

Houghton Mifflin, Boston.
Development of Quantum Mechanics: Schrdinger picture and Heisenberg picture.

Schrdinger equation. Wave functions. Probability. Measureable quantities. Operators
118
and expectation values. Stationary state. Eigen function and Eigen value. Particle in a
box. Harmonic oscillator. Barrier penetration. Central field problem. Hydrogen atom.
Prerequisite: (S) ZCT 104/3 Physics IV (Modern Physics)
Learning Outcomes:
1. show an understanding of the basic concepts of non-relativistic quantum mechanics

through wave approach
2. solve moderate quantum mechanics problems mathematically
3. demonstrate an understanding of the significance of operators, eigenvalue equation,

pure and mixed states in quantum mechanics and how quantum mechanics can be
used to describe entity in a box, step potential, barrier penetration, harmonic
oscillator and hydrogen atom
Ref. Books: 1. Zettili, N. Quantum Mechanics: Concepts and Applications, John

Wiley, 2001
2. Liboff R.L. Introductory Quantum Mechanics, Addison Wesley,

2002
3. Beiser, A. Concepts of Modern Physics. 2002 Edition

(Paperback), McGraw-Hill.
4. Elmer E. Anderson. Modern Physics and Quantum Mechanics,

W.B. Saunders Co. Terjemahan BM oleh Abdul Latiff Awang,
Penerbitan Universiti Sains Malaysia dan Dewan Bahasa dan
Pustaka, Kementerian Pendidikan Malaysia, Kuala Lumpur, 1992.
5. Yap Ber Chin dan Kang Chin Seng, JIF 414 Modul 1 dan Modul
2 Pengenalan Ilmu Kuantum Mekanik, Terbitan Pertama PPLK,
1986, Unit Percetakan Pusat Universiti Sains Malaysia.
Numbers and code system, arithmetic of binary, hexadecimal, and 2s complement

numbers. Basic logic, Boolean algebra, de Morgan theorem, and logic circuit analysis.
Design of combinational logic circuits, minimization, Karnaugh map, dont care state,
decoder, multiplexer, encoder, and demiltiplexer. Combinational logic elements: basic
flip-flop, flip-flop SR, JK, D, and T. Clocked flip-flops.
Sequential logic: different types of transform and counters. Sequential timing,

synchronous and asynchronous counters and their applications. Arithmetics unit: adder
119
and substracter. Design of sequential logic systems: state diagram, truth table, and timing
diagram. Extension from exited table, circuit design from truth table and timing diagram.
Examples of logic circuit applications: memory system, ROM, RAM, memory decoding,
and basic architecture of microprocessor system.
This course exposes students to practical experiences on various experiments to enhance
theories such as: Experiments on logic gates, flip-flop, arithmetic unit, design of registers
and counters.
Prerequisite: (S) ZCT 106/3 Electronics I
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic concepts of fundamental digital electronics
2. explain and analyze the logic circuit, Karnaugh map, combinational logic functions
flip-flop, timer,counter shift register
3. solve problems related to fundamental digital electronics
Ref. Books: 1. Thomas L. Flyod Digital Fundamentals (8th. Ed.), Printice Hall,
International Edition, 2003.
2. Alan B. Marcovitz Introduction to Logic Design, McGraw-Hill,

International Edition, 2002.
Characteristics of macroscopic and microscopic systems. Probability concepts and

counting of states. Postulate of equal a priori probabilities. Microcanonical Ensemble.
Definition of absolute temperature and entropy. Canonical Ensemble. Statistics of ideal
quantum gases. Maxwell-Boltzmann statistics. Bose-Einstein statistics. Fermi-Dirac
statistics. Applications of quantum statistics: specific heat of solids, black body
radiation, conducting electrons in solids.
Prerequisite: (S) ZCT 212/2 Thermodynamics
Learning Outcomes:
1. demonstrate the understanding of basic statistical physics methodology in describing

the behavior of macroscopic physical systems
120
2. explain macroscopic thermodynamical phenomena in proper and clear statistical
mechanics terms
3. list the procedural knowledge to arrive at a solution for different simple systems
4. demonstrate mathematical know-how necessary to solve problems as in (3) above
Text Books: 1. Mandl, F. Statistical Physics (2nd Ed.), John Wiley, 1988.
Ref. Books: 1. Bowley R. and Sanchez M., Introductory Statistical Mechanics

(2nd Ed.), Oxford Science Publications, 1999.
2. Reichl L.E., A Modern Course in Statistical Physics (2nd Ed.),

John Wiley, 1998.
Complex Analysis: Funtions of a complex variable complex functions. Differentiation

of complex functions; Cauchy-Riemann conditions, analytic functions, singular points,
power series of analytic functions, Taylor series.
Complex Integration: Cauchy integral theorem. Cauchy integral formula. Zeroes and
singularities. Laurent series. Residue theorem.
Differential Equations: Ordinary linear differential equations of first order and methods
of solutions. Ordinary linear differential equations of second order homogeneons and
non-homogeneous equations and methods of solution.
Differential Equations: Series solution power series and Frobenius methods.
Prerequisite: (S) MAA 101/4 Calculus

or (S) ZCA 110/4 Calculus and Linear Algebra
Learning Outcomes:
1. perform complex number arithmetic, differential, integration and contour integration
2. analyze any complex integration in physics problems using suitable techniques

discussed in lectures
3. display the skills of solving any normal first order and linear second order differential
equations
121
Text Book: 1. Kreyszig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (8th Ed.), John
Wiley, 1999.
Ref. Books: 1. Arfken, G.B. and Weber H.J., Mathematical Methods for
Physicists (4th. Ed.), Academic Press, 2000.
2. Boas M.L., Mathematical Methods in Physical Science (2nd Ed.),

John Wiley, 1983.
3. Nagle, R.K. and Saff E.B. , Fundamentals of Differential Egns of

Boundary Value Problems, Addison-Wiley Publishing Company,
1996.
Vector algebra; definitions, addditon, subtraction of vectors, dot products and cross
products of vectors, scalar and vector fields, geometric representation, algebraic
representation, transformation; unit vectors.
Vector calculus; scalar differentiation, differentiation with respect to time. Gradient,

divergence and curl of a vector. Physical examples.
Consecutive differentiation, Laplacean, DAlembertian. Physical examples.
Vector integration; line, surface and volume integrals. Gauss Theorem. Stokes Theorem.
Application in Physics; potential theory, scalar potential, vector potential.
Coordinate Systems; Cartesian, curvilinear systems, cylindrical, spherical. Differentiation

and integration. Application in Physics, position, velocity and acceleration, wave equation
for E and H in electricity and magnetism.
~ ~
Prerequisite: (S) MAA 101/4 Calculus

or (S) ZCA 110/4 Calculus and Linear Algebra
Learning Outcomes:
1. reproduce the basic vector concepts and further understand main operations of
vector calculus and geometric quantities in curvilinear coordinates and its usage in
other subjects related to vector
2. show a sound knowledge and understanding of differentiation and line, surface and
volume integrals, perform calculation using gradient, divergence and curl operator as
well as Stokess, divergence and Greens theorems
122
3. relate the vector framework learned for the understanding and study of the advanced
engineering, physics and mathematics
Ref. Books: 1. Arfken, G.B. and Weber H.J., Mathematical Methods for
Physicists (4th. Ed.), Academic Press, 2000.
2. Kreyszig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (7th Ed.), John

Wiley 1993.
3. Greenberg, M.D. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Prentice

Hall, 1988.
4. Spiegel, M.R. Theory and Problems of Vector Analysis and an

Introduction to Tensor Analysis, McGraw-Hill, Inc., 1981.
Simple thermodynamic systems, equation of state, work, heat, first law, internal energy,
results of first law, ideal gas. Carnot cycle and heat engine.
Second law of thermodynamics, result from second law, entropy, irreversible process.
Combination of first and second laws, T-S diagram and thermodynamic relationships.
Maxwell equation, Clausius- Clapeyron equation and Tds equation.
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the principles of thermodynamics and show how they apply to an arbitrary
system
2. explain thermodynamics phenomena in proper and clear scientific terms
3. list the procedural knowledge to arrive at a solution for different problem situations
4. relate and demonstrate mathematical skills necessary to solve problems as in (3)

above
Ref. Books: 1. Zemansky, M.W. & Dittman, R.H. Heat & Thermodynamics,
McGraw-Hill, 1997.
2. Schroeder, D.V. An Introduction to Thermal Physics, Addison

Wesley Longman, 1999.
123
3. Carter, A.H. , Classical and Statistical Thermodynamics,
Prentica Hall, 2001.
4. Sears, F.W. & Salinger, G.L. Thermodynamics, Kinetic Theory

and Statistical Thermodynamics, Addison-Wesley, 1986.
ZCT 213/2 Optic
Polarization. Plane and circular polarization. Reflection and transmission of

electromagnetic waves at boundaries. Optical activity. Kerr effect and Faraday effect.
Dispersion theory.
Diffraction. Fresnel-Kirchhoff equations. Fraunhofer diffraction of a single slit, square
and circular aperture. Diffraction gratings and their characteristics. Fresnel diffraction
for circular aperture. Cornu spiral and Fresnel Integrals. Zone plates. Fresnel diffraction
for straight edges and rectangular aperture.
Prerequisite: (P) ZCT 103/3 Physics III (Vibration, Waves and Optics)
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic concepts related to wave optics
2. explain the principles of polarization, optical activity, dispersion and diffraction of

light
3. solve problems related to polarized light, optical activity, dispersion and diffraction
of light
Ref. Books: 1. Pedrotti, F.L., Pedrotti, L.S., Introduction to Optics (2nd Ed.),
Prentice Hall, 1993
2. Hecht, E., Optics (4th. Ed.), Addison-Wesley, 2001.
3. Subrahmanyam, N., Brij Lal, Avadhanulu, M.N., A textbook of

Optics, S. Chand & Company Ltd., 2006
ZCT 218/3 Mathematical Methods
Integral transforms: general properties. Laplace transform: general properties,

applications in physical problems. Fourier transform: general properties, applications in
physical problems.
Special functions/equations: Gamma, Bessel, Legendre and Associated Legendere.
124
Fourier Analysis: expansion of functions in terms of sine and cosine, properties, physical
examples.
Partial differential equations: Sturm Lionrille boundary value problems. Wave

equation, Heat equation, Laplace equation solution by separation of variables.
Prerequisite: (S) ZCT 210/4 Complex Analysis and Differential Equations

(S) ZCT 211E/2 Vector Analysis
Learning Outcomes:
1. show the understanding of the two integral transforms i.e. Fourier and Laplace
transforms
2. identify the Bessel, Legendre and associated Legendre functions as the solutions of
the Bessel, Legendre and associated Legendre equations, respectively
3. solve heat, wave and Laplace equations (finite case only) using the separation of
variables technique, including expressing the solution in terms of Fourier series
Ref. Books: 1. Kreyszig, E. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (9th Ed.)

John Wiley, 2006.
2. Peter V. ONeil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 5th

edition, Brooks/Cole, 2003.
3. Arfken, G. Mathematical Methods for Physicists (3rd Ed.),

Academic Press, 2000.
ZCT 293/2 Physics Practicals III
Prerequisite: (S) ZCT 192/2 Physics Practicals II
Learning Outcomes:
1. demonstrate experimental and analytical skills
2. explain the data and discuss the result
3. initiate new ideas through independent learning
125
ZCT 304 /3 Electricity and Magnetism
Revision of vector analysis, vector calculus, basic theorems, curvilinear coordinates, and
Dirac-delta function. The Coulomb Law. Electric fields, E. Divergence of E. The
GaussLaw. Curl of E. Gradient of E and electrical potential, V. Electrical dipoles. The
Poissons and Laplaces equations. Electrostatics field in dielectric medium. The Gauss
law for dielectric. Displacement vectors. Polarization. Electric susceptibility and
dielectric constant. Electrical boundary conditions. Electrical potential energy for
dielectric medium.
Magnetic fields. The Bio-Savarts law. Divergence of B. Magnetic potential vector, A.

Curl of B. The Amperes circuit law. Magnetic dipoles. Electromagnetic induction. The
Faradays induction laws. Magnetic materials. The Maxwells equations. Polarization of
electric fields. The Poynting theorem. Electromagnetic boundary conditions.
Propagation of electromagnetic waves in free space. Propagation of electromagnetic
waves in material medium.

(S) ZCT 210/4 Complex Analysis and Differential Equations
(S) ZCT 211/2 Vector Analysis
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic concepts involving electricity and magnetism
2. identify suitable mathematical methods for different configurations
3. analyze and solve advanced problems related to electricity and magnetism
Text Books: 1. David J. Griffith. Introduction to Electrodynamics. Third

Edition. Prentice Hall, New Jersey U.S.A. 1999.
Ref. Books: 1. Reitz, J.R., Milford, F.J. & Christy R.W. Foundations of
Electromagnetic Theory (4th Ed.), Addison-Wesley Publishing
Co., 1992
2. Lorrain, P. Electromagnetic Fields and Waves (2nd Ed.), W.H.

Freeman Co., 2003.
126
Crystal structure types, crystal diffraction, reciprocal lattice, Brillion zone, lattice
vibrations, dispersion curves for phonons, specific heat models of Debye and Einstein,
free electron theory of metals, electrical conductivity, heat capacity of electron gas, band
theory of solids, Kronig-Penney model, holes, effective mass. Empty lattice
approximation.
Semiconductor intrinsic and extrinsic, carrier density, impurity conductivity, Hall effect.
Optical Properties: reflection, absorption and transmission processes, exciton,

photoconductivity.
Prerequisite: (C) ZCT 207/2 Statistical Mechanics
Learning Outcomes:
1. differentiate the crystal structures of various solids
2. display an understanding how the properties of a crystal are related to its structure
3. explain problems that are related to crystals
Text Books: 1. Kittel, C. Introduction to Solid State Physics (8th Ed,), John
Wiley & Sons, 2005.
2. Sohail A. Khan Essentials of Solid State Physics (Under

process)
Ref. Books: 1. Ashcroft, N.W. and Merimim, N. D. Solid State Physics,

Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
2. Blakemore, J.S. Solid State Physics, Cambridge University

Press, 1987.
3. Omar, M.A. Elementary Solid State Physics, Addison

Wesley, 1993.
127
SYNOPSES OF CORE COURSES APPLIED PHYSICS
ZAT 281/4 Introduction to Microprocessors
Design of microcomputer systems: history and development, architecture, sequential

design, and organization. Design of microprocessor systems: internal bus structure,
instruction and machine cycles, and instructions flow in CPU. Functions of CPU: ALU,
decoder, program counter, instructions register, address data and control registers. Data
transfer and timing diagrams. Microprocessor instructions, and assembly language
programming. Assemblers and cross assemblers. Interrupts: software and hardware.
Interface: memory, input and output port ADC, DAC. Series and parallel ports: RS232,
UART/DUART, PIT, buffer, and other peripheral devices. Introduction to current
microprocessor systems.
Laboratory: Data Input and output, delay subroutine, ADC, DAC. Seven segments or
LCD display interface. Controller: DC motor, IR sensor, motor speed, and temperature
sensor. Signal generation and transmittance via optical fibres.
Prequisite: (P) ZCT 206/3 Electronics I
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain and interpret the architecture of microprocessor system
2. explore and manipulate the 68000 microprocessor system
3. write and interpret assembly language programming
4. correlate the 68000 microprocessor system with other systems
Ref. Books: 1. Mackenzie, I. S., The 68000 Microprocesor, Prentice-Hall,

1995.
2. Alan Clements, Advanced Microprocessor Interfacing & the

68000 Peripherals & Systems, Wiley, 1998.
3. James L. Antonakos, The 68000 Microprocessor Hardware &

Software Principles & Applications. Fifth Edition. Prentice
Hall, 2004.
128
ZAT 283/3 Instrumentation
Process Control systems, measurements, sensor response, accuracy, resolution,

hysteresis & statistics
Sensors & Transducers types of sensors; mechanical, thermal, resistive, capacitive,

inductive, magnetic, optical, piezoelectric, etc.
Analog Signal Conditioning Operational Amplifiers; inverting, noninverting, follower,

summing, differential, integrator, comparator, CMMR, thermocouples.
Analog Digital Signals theory, conversion, modulation
Actuation Power Systems pneumatic, hydraulic, mechanical, electrical; valves, symbols,

sequencing, gears, stepper motors, torque-speed curve, DC motors.
Prerequisite: (S) ZCT 293/2 Physics Practicals III

(C) ZCT 206/3 Electronics II
Learning Outcomes:
1. describe the key elements of instrumentation control process system that include
measurement, comparison, control and actuation
2. explain the design and operation of various types of transducers, operational

amplifiers and actuators, and select the best device for a certain function relating to
control process system
3. solve accuracy problems relating to transducer calibration and discuss the

advantages and disadvantages of various type of transducer
Ref. Book: 1. Bolton, W. Mechatronics: Electronic Control Systems in

Mechanical and Electrical Engineering (4th Ed.), Prentice Hall,
Harlow, England, 2008.
2. Johnson, C.D. Process Control Instrumentation Technology (8th

Ed.), Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 2006.
129
ZAT 386/4 Physics of Semiconductor Devices
Energy band, density of states, intrinsic semiconductor, Electrons and holes conduction,
extrinsic semiconductor, impurities, impurity level, Fermi level, carrier concentration,
Hall effect; impurity motion; minority carrier life time, recombination process, diffusion
length; semiconductor surface, semiconductor-metal contact, semiconductor insulator
contact; Ge, Si and III-IV compound; p-n junction devices inclusive of Zener diode,
tunnel diod, varactor, variator; single junction transistor; Field effect transistor inclusive
of junction FET and metal oxide semiconductor FET (MOSFET), silicon controlled
switch (SCS), Shockly diode and phototransistor; solar cell and semiconductor laser.

(C) ZCT 307/3 Solid State Physics I
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain, differentiate and relate the theory and properties of semiconductor
2. identify, explain, track and understand the design and integration of semiconductor
devices
3. explain, discuss and evaluate the characteristics of semiconductor devices
Ref. Books: 1. Streetman, B.G. Solid State Electronic Devices,6e Prentice-

Hall, 2007.
2. Zambuto, M. Semiconductor Devices, McGraw-Hill, 1989.
3. Sze, S.M. Semiconductor Devices, Physics and Technology,

John Wiley & Sons, 2001.
ZAT 387/4 Semiconductor Fabrication Processes
Growth of semiconductor ingot, preparation and characterization of wafer, oxidation and

lithography process. Diffusion of dopant and creation of junction. Metallization.
Characterization of junction, example junction depth, etc. Thin film techniques,
integrated circuit development, bonding and packaging.
Prerequisite: (S) ZAT 386/4 Physics of Semiconductor Devices
130
Learning Outcomes:
1. describe and relate all processes used in semiconductor wafer and device fabrication
to the physics concepts of these processes
2. fabricate a device and explain its parameters, starting from bare silicon wafers, all
processing steps from beginning to end and wafer characterization during the process
3. demonstrate the completed devices and create a report based on results obtained
4. understand and participate in the role rotation as group leader and group member in
laboratory work
Ref. Books: 1. Jaeger, R.C. Introduction to Microelectronic Fabrication,

Prentice Hall., 2002.
2. Gise, P. & Blanchard, R. Modern Semiconductor Fabrication

Technology, Prentice Hall, 1986.
3. May, G.S. & Sze, S.M., Fundamentals of Semiconductor

Fabrication, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2004.
ZAT 389/3 Low Dimensional Semiconductor Structures
Basic
Introduction. One dimensional band structure. Energy band gap. Motions of an electron in
a band structure. Band structure in two dimensions. Semiconductor crystal structure.
Alloy semiconductors band structure. Point defects in semiconductor crystals.
Metal-Semiconductor Interface
Introduction. Schottky barrier. Ohmic contact. Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor (MOS)
structures.
Heterostructures
General characteristics of heterostructures. Growth of heterostructures. Band engineering.
Quantum wells and barriers. Conduction band characteristics. Doped heterostructures.
Stressed layers.
Electron in Quantum Structures

Square well with infinite depth. Square well with finite depth. Parabolic well. Triangular
well. Low dimensional systems. Confinement in lower dimensions. Quantum wells in
heterostructures.
131
Optical Properties of Quantum Wells
Golden Rule. Optical absorption. Absorption between bands. Absorption in a quantum
well. Transition between bands in a quantum well. Transition between subbands in a
quantum well.
Prerequisite : (S)ZCT 307/3 Solid State Physics I
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain, differentiate and relate the properties of semiconductor heterostructures and

their related low dimensional systems
2. solve and identify simple quantum well problems and conclude the results for
different wells
3. appreciate the role of electron trapping in creating electrons with two dimensional
behaviour
4. use Fermis Golden Rule to explain optical absorption for quantum wells of various
shapes
5. explain optical properties of quantum wells related to different optical devices
Ref. Books: 1. Jarods, M., Physics and Applications of Semiconductor

Microstructures, Oxford Science Publication (1990).
2. Grovenor, C.R.M., Microelectronics Materials, Adam Hilger

(1989).
3. Davies, J.H., The Physics of Low-Dimensional Semiconductors:

An Introduction, Cambridge University Press (1998).
4. Mitin, V.V., Kochelap, V.A. and Stroscio, M.A., Quantum

Heterostructures, Cambridge University Press (1999).
5. Wood, D., Optoelectronic Semiconductor Devices, Prentice Hall

(1994).
6. Hook, J.R. and Hall, H.E., Solid State Physics, John Wiley and
Sons (1991).
132
SYNOPSES OF ELECTIVE COURSES APPLIED PHYSICS
ZAT 394/6 Applied Physics Project and Seminar (two semesters)
A course which involves projects and seminars. The use of computers would be
encouraged where possible.
Prerequisite: (P) ZCT 293/2 Physics Practicals III
Learning Outcomes:
1. utilise theories for practical work
2. report research results through scientific writing
3. participate and report knowledge derived from scientific seminars and industrial
visits
4. present and defend project findings
ZAE 282/3 Materials Science
Introduction.
Structure: Crystal structure and imperfections, phase diagrams, phase transformations,

diffusion, deformation of materials, strengthening mechanisms and microstructures,
corrosion and oxidation.
Materials: Iron, steel and ferrous alloys, non-ferrous metals and alloys, polymers,
ceramics, composites.
Properties: Physical properties of materials.
Prerequisite: -
Learning Outcomes:
1. define the properties, structures and uses of engineering materials and also evaluate
the impact of material selection, material performance of a structure or mechanism
due to the relationship between macroscopic properties and microscopic causes
2. draw unit cells for crystal structures, describe crystalline planes using Miller indices
and compute density
133
3. describe types of point defects and dislocation defects in crystalline solids and able
to distinguish between steady state and non-steady state diffusion in solids and apply
Ficks laws to solve simple diffusion problems
4. define engineering stress and strain, and interpret a stress-strain diagram
Ref. Books: 1. Callister, W.D. Jr. Materials Science and Engineering: An

Introduction (6th Ed.), John Wiley & Sons, 2003.
2. Askeland, D.R & Phule, P.P. The Science and Engineering of

Materials (5th Ed.), Thomson, 2006.
3. Van Vlack, L.H. Elements of Materials Science and Engineering

(6th Ed.), Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., Reading MA, 1989.
ZAE 376/4 Astronomy Principles and Practices
The universe at a glance. Spherical trigonometry. Celestial sphere. Celestial coordinate

system. Reckoning time. Calendrical systems. Celestial mechanics. Astrometry.
Radiation laws. Observation and measurement system.
Prerequisite: (S) ZGE 277/4 Structure of the Universe
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the principles of measurements in astronomy
2. handle, demonstrate and explain a few main astronomical instruments
3. explain how astronomical measurements are carried out and perform simple
calculations
Ref. Books: 1. Astronomy : Principles and Practices (2003) Roy, A.E.,

Clarke, D.
2. A Introduction to Modern Astrophysics (1996), Carroll, B. W.,

Ostlie, D.A.
3. Textbook on Spherical Astronomy (1977), Smart, W.M.
4. Fundamentals of celestial Mechanics (1988) Danby, J.M.A.,

Willmann Bell
5. Solving Keplers Equation Over Three Centuries (1998)

Colwell, P., Willmann Bell.
134
Introduction to properties of lasers. Basic principle of laser. Stimulated emission. Laser

pumping. Oscillator. Laser output. Modifying laser output. Laser expositions.
Holography and applications. Optical communications Laser induced fluorescence.
LIDAR and pollution control. Industrial uses of lasers. Medical applications. Laser
classifications and safety.
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the properties of laser beam and its uses for different applications and infer
the impact of laser selection and laser performance due to the quality and design of
the resonator
2. draw the structure of optical cavity and the laser action processing
3. describe the types of lasers according to the active medium and appreciate the
requirements for safety
4. explain the nature of light, mechanism of emission, population density as well as the
quantum of laser emission
Ref. Books: 1. Orazio Svelto (Editor) David C Hanna (Translator), Principles

of Lasers, 1998.
2. John Hawkes, et.al., Lasers: Theory and Practice, 1995.
3. John F. Ready, Industrial Applications of Lasers, 1997
4. Oshea, Callen & Rhodes. An Introduction to Lasers and Their

Applications, Addison-Wesley, 1978.
ZAE 385/4 Applied Spectroscopy
Introduction. Several common units in spectroscopy.

General instrumentation: Electromagnetic spectrum, general equipments for an
absorption experiment, equipments for scattering experiment, components for absorption
experiment.
Interaction of electromagnetic radiation with atoms and molecules: Electromagnetic
radiation, absorption, emission and bandwidth.
Symmetry of molecules: point symmetry and dipole moment.
Molecule symmetry: symmetrical point and dielectric moment.
Rotational spectroscopy: linear, symmetry of rotor, spherical rotor, nonsymmetric rotor
molecules, infrared rotation, millimeter waves and microwave spectra, Raman rotational
spectroscopy, determination of structural from rotational constant.
135
Electronic spectroscopy, atomic spectroscopy, diatomic and polyatomic molecules
spectroscopy.
Photoelectron spectroscopy: experimental methods, interpretation of spectra, X-ray
photoelectron for a gas, X-ray photoelectron for a solid.
Auger electron spectroscopy, X-ray ransformer spectroscopy.
Prerequisite: (S) ZAT 283/3 Instrumentation
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain, differentiate and relate the theories of spectroscopy
2. identify, relate and solve simple spectral patterns
3. appreciate, differentiate and evaluate different spectra
Ref. Books: 1. J.M. Hollas, Modern Spectroscopy, J. Wiley and Sons,

Chichester U.K. 2004.
2. Jerry Workman Jr. and Art W Springsteen (editors), Applied

Spectroscopy: A Compact Reference for Practitioners, Academic
Press, USA, 1998.
Introduction. Visual testing. Pressure and leak testing. Liquid penetrant inspection.
Thermal methods.
Industrial radiography (example: X-ray radiography). Ultrasonics. Dynamic testing.

Electromagnetic methods (examples: magnetic-particle, electric-particle and eddy current
methods). Thickness measurements. Other techniques: e.g. spot tests, spectro-chemical
analysis, activation analysis, electrographic printing, EDX, sulphur printing, spark testing,
surface analysis, electron probe.
Learning Outcomes:
1. present detailed information about NDT methods and be able to decide, select, use
and interpret NDT methods for inspection and evaluation of engineering materials
2. define the calibration standards, explain scope and limitation of NDT methods and
select appropriate equipment for a given problem specifications
136
3. solve problems related to x-ray, ultrasonics, Eddy current methods of NDT, and
interpret and report the results obtained ( ransformer analysis)
Ref. Books: 1. Introduction to Electromagnetic Non-destructive Methods,

Wiley-Interscience, New York, 1971.
2. Halmshaw, R. Non-destructive Testing (2nd Ed.), E. Arnold,

London, 1991.
3. McGonnagle, J.J. Non-destructive Testing (2nd Ed.), Gordon &

Breach, New York, 1975
Root finding and optimization. Fitting data to a function. Numerical integration.

Visualizing of data. Matrix operation and manipulation. Monte Carlo applications.
Solving eigen value problem numerically. Solving ordinary differential equations
numerically. Finite difference method. Small projects.
2. show proficiency in programming and using mathematical packages
2. use computer software to visualise physics formulae
3. use computer software to solve fairly complex physics problems
4. write codes to solve numerical problems
Ref. Books: 1. Computional Physics : Problem Solving with Computers by

Rubin H. Kandau, Manuel J. Pez, and Cristian C.
2. An Introduction to Computational Physics, by Tao Pang,

Cambridge University Press; 2 edition (February 13, 2006)
3. Computational Physics, 2/E, Nicholas J. Giordano, Hisao

Nakanishi, Publisher: Addison-Wesley, ISBN-10: 0131469908,
ISBN-13: 9780131469907, Published:07/21/2005.
4. A First Course in Scientific Computing: Symbolic, Graphic, and

Numeric Modeling Using Maple, Java, Mathematica, and
Fortran90, Rubin H. Landau, Publisher: Princeton University
Press, ISBN-10: 0691121834, ISBN-13: 9780691121833,
Published: April 11, 2005.
137
ZCE 341/4 Energy Studies
Renewable energy and types of renewable energy. Sources of renewable energy. Energy
from solar. Introduction to bioenergy. Biomass as fuel. Types of biomass. Conversion
proses: direct combustion, gasification, fermentation and pyrolysis. Main product of each
conversion process: heat, bio-gas, alcohol and bio-oil.
Production evolution and solar energy availability. Types of solar power technology.
Principles of solar cell operation. Material and response of silicon solar cell. Sunlight
concentration. Solar cells array. Array protection and failure sensor. Power
conditioning. Energy storage and connection to grid. Photovoltaic power economy.
Understanding wind power. How does wind machine work. Production of wind power.
Introduction to geothermal power. Types of geothermal source, electricity generation
from geothermal power. Understanding hydro power. How does hydro power work.
Advantage and disadvantage of hydro power . Reading.
Learning Outcomes:
1. identify the alternative sources of renewable energy and explain the need for
renewable energy
2. explain the main processes for power generation and be able to use relevant and clear
scientific terms
4.. explain and discuss about energy efficiency from renewable energy. Analyse and
solve problems related to renewable energy
Ref. Books: 1. Martin A.Green, Solar Cells-Operating Principles Technology,

Prentice Hall, 2000.
2. Twidell J.W. , Renewable Energy Resources, Spon Press, 2000.
3. Weider,S.)., An Introduction to Solar Energy for Scientists and

Engineers, John Wiley, 1982.
4. Carl W. Hall, Biomass A An Alternative Fuel, Government

Institutes, 1981.
5. Charles Y. Wereko-Brobby and Essel B. Hagen, Biomass

Conversion and Technology, John Woleh & Sons, 1996.
138
ZCE 351/3 X-ray Analysis
Physics of X-ray, generation and properties of X-ray, detectors, X-ray diffraction, powder
methods and single crystal methods, X-ray fluorescence, interpretation and quantitative
analysis, spectrometer EDX, X-ray micro-analysis with electron microscope.
Note: Exposure to equipment and practical in the X-ray laboratory
Prerequisite: (S) ZCT 307/3 Solid State Physics I
Learning Outcomes:
1. relate how the structure of a molecule is derived through the x-ray crystallography
method
2. apply and analyse the X-ray fluoroscence and the powder methods
4. sketch, label and elaborate X-ray analysis instruments
5. explain and justify the role of each X-ray analysis method
Ref. Books: 1. Jenkins, R. & Vries, L.D. Practical X-Ray Spectrometry (2nd
Ed.), Macmillan, London, 1970.
2. Azaroff, L.V. The Powder Method in X-Ray Crystallography,

McGraw-Hill, New York, 1958.
3. Buerger, M.J. Elementary Crystallography: An Introduction to

the Fundamental Geometrical Features of Crystals, MIT Press,
Cambridge, Mass., 1978.
4. Woolfson, M. M., 1997, An Introduction to X-ray

Crystallography, University of York.
5. Ladd, M.F.C., Palmer, R.A., 1993, Structure Determination by X-

ray Crystallography, Plenum Press.
6. Jenkins, R., Gould, R.W., Gedcke, D., 1995, Quantitative X-Ray

Spectrometry, CRC Press.
139
SYNOPSES OF ELECTIVE COURSES NON BASIC APPLIED PHYSICS

Introduction to basic computer concepts: computer hardware and software. A brief
introduction to programming concepts. Problem solving and program design.
Introduction to C++ language: writing simple C++ programs but comprehensive. Program
control structures: sequence, selection and repetition. Basic C++ operators. Output
formatting.
Modular programming: functions. Strategies in solving complex problems.
File processing.
Advanced data types: arrays. Pointers. Enumerations and structures. Strings. Classes and
object oriented programming.
Learning Outcomes:
1. understand fundamental computer programming concepts and algorithm development

in problem-solving
2. apply appropriate programming techniques/structures and strategies in transforming

the description of a problem into executable computer codes
3. solve problems in mathematics and scientific applications using a computer

programming language
4. develop programs using advanced programming structures (modular programming,

files manipulation, pointers) which add values to the computer programs
Ref. Books: 1. Bronson Gary J. (2006) A First Book of C++: From Here to
There, 3rd edition, Course Technology, Thomson Learning,
Australia.
2. Cannon Scott (2001). Understanding Programming: An

Introduction Using C++, 2nd edition. Brooks Cole.
3. Malik D.S. (2002). C++ Programming: From Problem Analysis

To Program Design, Course Technology, Thomson Learning.
140
SYNOPSES OF CORE COURSES GEOPHYSICS
ZGT 161/3 Geology I
Introduction to geology, basic principles and concepts. Origin of the earth. Internal
structure of the earth from seismology. Introduction to principles of isostasy. Crustal and
isostatic structure of continental margins, mountain ranges, oceanic ridges, plateau uplifts
(hot spots). Introduction to continental drift, plate tectonics, sea-floor spreading, passive
margins, subduction zones and active margins, extensional sedimentary basins
(McKenzie mechanism).
Basic mineralogy: properties, composition and structure of minerals. Rock-forming

minerals. Composition, textures, structures, formation and classification of sedimentary,
igneous and metamorphic rocks. Forms of igneous bodies. Fossils. Geological time
scale. Basic stratigraphy: unconformities, diastems, facies, geological correlation. Rock
deformation: folding, faulting, joints.
Prerequisite: (C) ZCA 101/4 Physics I (Mechanics)
Learning Outcomes:
1. generalize the basic earth origin and internal structure
2. explain the theory of continental drift, tectonic plate and rocks deformation
3. explain the concept, characteristics and type of minerals and rocks
4. justify the concept of geological time scale and describe the fossil generation
Ref. 1. Monroe, J. S., Wicander, R. & Hazlett, R. Physical Geology, (6th

Book: Edition) Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2007.
2. Judson, S. & Richardson, S. M. Earth, Prentice Hall, 1995.
3. Gilluly, J., Waters, A.C. & Woodford, A.O. Prinsip-prinsip

Geologi, Jilid 1 dan 2, DBP, 1989.
4. Marshak, S. Essentials of Geology, Norton, 2004.
ZGT 162/3 Geology II
External geological processes: mechanical and chemical weathering; erosion and

deposition by streams, sea and wind; soil profile. Geomorphology: landforms, valleys,
drainage patterns, peneplanation; topography of folded and faulted structures.
141
Hydrology: Darcys law, aquifers, groundwater, artesian wells. Ore deposits: magmatic
differentiation, hydrothermal, sedimentary, supergene, lateritic, alluvial. Petroleum
geology: formation and migration of petroleum; structural and stratigraphic traps.
Geology of Malaysia: general, structural and economic geology.
Prerequisite: (S) ZGT 161/3 Geology I
Learning Outcomes:
1. generalize the basic earth origin and external structure
2. explain the weathering concept and describe the soil development
3. explain the concept of geomorphology, hydrology and petroleum geology
4. justify the general geology of Malaysia
Ref. Book: 1. Monroe, J. S., Wicander, R. & Hazlett, R. Physical Geology, (6th
Edition) Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2007.
2. Judson, S. & Richardson, S. M. Earth, Prentice Hall, 1995.
3. Gilluly, J., Waters, A.C. & Woodford, A.O. Prinsip-prinsip

Geologi, Jilid 1 dan 2, DBP, 1989.
4. Marshak, S. Essentials of Geology, Norton, 2004.
ZGT 190/2 Geology Practical
Experiments in geology.
Prerequisite: (C) ZGT 161/3 Geology I
Learning Outcomes:
1. identify the mineral type and their properties
2. identify the rock type and their features
3. sketch and justify the geological maps
142
ZGT 264/2 Geophysical Data Analysis
Characteristics of geophysical, meteorological and oceanographic data and special

requirements for their analysis. Laplace, Hilbert and Hankel transforms. Dirac delta
function. Fourier series. Continuous, discrete and fast Fourier transforms. Power
spectra, noise. Correlation, convolution and deconvolution. Basic filters. Basic
statistical analysis. Sampling. Applications in geophysics, meteorology and
oceanography.
Prerequisite: (S) ZCT 210/4 Complex Analysis & Differential Equations
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic concepts related to mathematical operators used in geophysical data
analysis
2. select a suitable operator for each application
3. answer problems related to the applications of these operators in signal analysis
Ref. Books: 1. Stearns, S.D. Digital Signal Analysis, Prentice Hall, 1990.
2. Robinson, E.A. Geophysical Signal Analysis, Holden-Day,

1980.
3. Brillinger D.R., Robinson. E. A, Schoenberg. F. P., 2004, Time

Series Analysis and Applications to Geophysical Systems.
Springer
ZGT 265/3 Meteorology I
Introduction: Structure, composition, layering, pressure, density and temperature-height

profile of the atmosphere. Atmospheric thermodynamics: dry adiabatic lapse rate,
thermodynamic laws, hydrostatic balance, geopotential, humidity, ransformer equation,
adiabatic process, tepigram. Parcel method, static energy. Thermal stability. Radiation:
radiative transfer, global radiation budget, greenhouse effect, effective temperature.
Pressure gradient force, local wind systems. General circulation, single and three cell
models.
Clouds: Development of cloud droplets, growth of raindrops by condensation, collision,
coalescence. Cloud dynamics, rain and snow. Local storms.
Prerequisite: (C) ZCT 212/2 Thermodynamics
143
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic concepts of meteorology
2. apply and identify the meteorology phenomena such as air temperature and seasons
3. explain and analyse the weather data and the weather maps
Text Book: 1. Edward Aguado, James Burt, Understanding Weather and

Climate, Prentice Hall; 4 edition (May 13, 2006).
2. C. Donald Ahrens, Meteorology Today: An Introduction to

Weather, Climate, and the Environment, Brooks Cole; 8 edition
(February 16, 2006).
3. Roland B. Stull, Meteorology for Scientists and Engineers,

Brooks Cole; 2 edition (December 30, 1999).
Ref. Books: 1. Steven Ackerman, John A. Knox, Meteorology: Understanding

the Atmosphere, Brooks Cole; 2 edition (March 8, 2006).
2. C. Donald Ahrens, Essentials of Meteorology: An Invitation to

the Atmosphere, Brooks Cole; 5 edition (January 31, 2007)
3. John D. Cox, Weather for Dummies, For Dummies; 1 edition

(October 9, 2000).
4. Frederick K. Lutgens, Edward J. Tarbuck, Dennis Tasa, The

Atmosphere: An Introduction to Meteorology, Prentice Hall; 8th
edition (July 24, 2000).
ZGT 266/3 Solid Earth Geophysics I
Earthquakes, what and where. Properties of elastic wave propagation. Knotts and
Zoeppritzs equations. Seismic waves at distances of 0-10o, 10-103o, > 103o. Travel
time tables and the IASPEI 91 velocity model. Recording systems, instrument frequency
properties and seismometry. Strong motion analysis.
Structure and composition of the crust, mantle and core: crust, Mohorovicic discontinuity,
mantle, transition zone and core. Earth rheology: effect of stress, mantle viscosity, shock
wave experiments. Thermal history of the earth: submarine and terrestrial heat flow,
temperature distribution. Geochronology: radioactivity, age determination methods such
as the Rb-Sr, K-Ar, U, Th-Pb, Pb and Carbon-14 methods.
Prerequisite: (S) ZGT 162/3 Geology II
144
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic concepts related to the earthquakes and earth interior
2. explain the principles of elastic wave propagation and seismic wave
3. analyse the models related to the plate tectonics movements
Ref. Books: 1. Bullen, K.E. & Bolt, B.A. An Introduction to the Theory of
Seismology (4th Ed.), Cambridge University Press, 1985.
2. Kulhanek, O. Anatomy of Seismograms, Elsevier, 1990.
3. Jacobs, J.A. Deep Interior of the Earth, Chapman & Hall, 1992.
4. Faure, G. Principles of Isotope Geology, Wiley, 1977.
5. Jacobs, J.A. A Textbook on Geonomy, Adam Hilger, 1974.
ZGT 267/3 Solid Earth Geophysics II
The earth and the solar system, Keplers laws, sunspots, solar flares, prominences,
photosphere, ransformer i, corona. Fundamentals of potential field theory. Rotation,
gravity field and shape of the earth. Principles of isostasy. Earth tides. Geomagnetism,
secular and diurnal variations, dynamo theory, paleomagnetism, rock magnetism.
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic aspects related to the earth and the solar system
2. explain the theory of potential field
3. classify the principles of isostasy and geomagnetism
Ref. Book: 1. Garland, G.D. Introduction to Geophysics (Mantle, Core and

Crust), Saunders, 1981.
2. Lowrie, W. Fundamentals of Geophysics, Cambridge University

Press, 1997.
145
ZGT 268/3 Exploration Geophysics I
Introduction to seismic methods: seismic waves, reflection, refraction, diffraction.

Geophones, hydrophones, energy sources, recording equipment. Position-fixing methods.
Seismic reflection method: data acquisition on land and offshore, data reduction,
processing, velocity determination, interpretation, applications. Seismic refraction
method: data acquisition, reduction, processing, interpretation, applications.
Prerequisite: (S) ZGT 266/3 Solid Earth Geophysics I
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic aspects related to the seismic methods in exploration geophysics
2. explain the theory of seismic methods
3. classify the field procedure and interpretation techniques in seismic methods
Ref. Books: 1. Dobrin, M.B. & Savit, C.H. Introduction to Geophysical

Prospecting (4th Ed.), McGraw-Hill, 1988.
2. Telford, W.M., Geldart, L.P. & Sheriff, R.E. Applied

Geophysics (2nd Ed.), Cambridge University Press, 1990.
3. Sheriff, R.E. Geophysicalf Methods, Prentice-Hall, 1989.
ZGT 269/3 Exploration Geophysics II
Theory and practice of potential field methods for geophysical exploration, including the
gravity method, the magnetic method and electrical methods. For each method details
covered include a description of equipment used, field procedures, nature of data
acquired, methods of data processing and interpretation and applications.
Prerequisite: (C) ZGT 267/3 Solid Earth Geophysics II
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic aspects related to the potential field methods in exploration
geophysics
2. explain the theory of potential field methods
3. classify the field procedure and interpretation techniques in potential field methods
146
Ref. Books: 1. Dobrin, M.B. & Savit, C.H. Introduction to Geophysical
Prospecting (4th Ed.), McGraw-Hill, 1988.
2. Griffiths, D.H. & King, R.F., Applied Geophysics for Geologists

and Engineers, Oxford, Pergamon Press, 1981.
3. Nettleton, L.L. Gravity and Magnetics in Oil Prospecting,

McGraw-Hill, 1976.
4. Keary, P. & Brooks, M., An Introduction to Gephysical

Exploration, Oxford, Blackwell Scientific Publications.
5. Milson, J., Field Gephysics, John Wiley & Sons, Chichester,

1989.
6. Parasnis, D.S., Principles of Applied Geophysics, 4th Edition,

London, Chapman and Hall, 1986.
7. Telford, W.M., Geldart, L.P., Sheriff, R.E. and Keys, D.A.,

Applied Geophysics, Cambridge University Press, London, 1976.
ZGT 270/3 Meteorology II
Air motion: Coriolis force, gravity effect, pressure gradient, friction, equations of motion,
scale analysis. Horizontal flow: geostrophic, thermal, gradient winds, continuity
equation. Weather and climate, weather modification, boundary layer. Air pollution
meteorology, ozone layer, air-sea interaction. Introduction to numerical ransfor.
Lightning and biometeorology. Meteorological instrumentation and data acquisition
techniques. Weather systems, climatological variability due to winds.
Prerequisite: (C) ZCT 218/4 Mathematical Methods

(S) ZGT 265/3 Meteorology I
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the advanced concepts related to the meteorology phenomena
2. analyse and identify the meteorological features such as air masses, tornadoes and
hurricanes
3. analyse the weather forecasting models
147
Text Book: 1. Steven Ackerman, John A. Knox, Meteorology: Understanding
the Atmosphere, Brooks Cole; 2 edition (March 8, 2006).
2. C. Donald Ahrens, Meteorology Today: An Introduction to

Weather, Climate, and the Environment, Brooks Cole; 8 edition
(February 16, 2006).
Ref. Books: 1. Edward Aguado, James Burt, Understanding Weather and

Climate, Thomson 4th ed 2006.
2. C. Donald Ahrens, Essentials of Meteorology: An Invitation to

the Atmosphere, Brooks Cole; 5 edition (January 31, 2007).
3. Grant R. Bigg, The Oceans and Climate, Cambridge University

Press; 2 ed, 2004.
4. John Norbury and Ian Roulstone, Large-Scale Atmosphere-Ocean

Dynamics I, Cambridge University Press; 1 ed, 2002.
5. James R. Holton, An Introduction to Dynamic Meteorology,

Academic Press; 4 edition (March 31, 2004).
ZGT 272/3 Introduction to Oceanography
Shape of ocean basins, continental margins, morphology of the ocean floor. Temperature,
salinity and density distributions in oceans. Light and sound in sea water. Composition
of sea water, chemical and biological reactions in sea water. Air-sea interaction, heat and
water cycles. Causes of instability in oceans. Ocean circulation, current measurement.
Causes of currents; pressure gradient, Coriolis forces, geostrophic flow, wind-driven
circulation. Waves and tides. Marine biology.
Prerequisite: (P) ZCA 101/4 Physics I (Mechanics)

(S) ZGT 162/3 Geology II
Learning Outcomes:
1. describe the basic principles of oceanic structure and movement
2. describe the fundamental laws governing the ocean
3. explain some basic oceanic phenomena
148
Ref. Books: 1. Thurman H.V. & Trujilo A.P. Essential of Oceanography (7th
Ed.), Prentice Hall, 2002.
2. Pond, S. & Pickard, G.L. Introductory Dynamical

Oceanography, (2nd Ed.), Pergamon Press, 1983.
3. Pickard, G.L. & Emery, W.J. Descriptive Physical

Oceanography: An Introduction (4th Ed.), Pergamon Press, 1982.
4. The Open University, Seawater: Its Composition, Properties and

Behaviour, Pergamon Press, 1989.
5. The Open University, The Ocean Basins: Their Structure and

Evolution, Pergamon Press, 1989.
ZGT 295/4 Geophysics Practical (two semesters)
Experiments in geophysics and Geophysical Field Camp.
Prerequisite: (S) ZGT 190/2 Geology Practicals
Learning Outcomes:
1. measure and study the subsurface properties by using various geophysical

equipments
2. organize the geophysical field survey
3. study the advantages and limitations of each geophysical method
ZGT 374/3 Remote Sensing
Fundamental theory of remote sensing: units of measurement, electromagnetic energy,

electromagnetic spectrum, image characteristics, sources of remote sensing information,
interactions between light and matter, spectral reflectance.
Aerial photography: film technology, characteristics of aerial photographs, black-and-

white photography, colour science, infra-red colour photography, multispectral
photography. Sensors for environmental monitoring and platforms. Photogrammetry.
Multispectral, thermal and hyperspectral sensing. Microwave and Lidar sensing. Digitial
image processing.
149
Remote applications in meteorology: weather analysis and forecasting, remote sensing of
the atmosphere. Global climatology, atmospheric moisture distribution, synoptic
climatology of weather systems, water in the environment, hydrometeorology, surface
hydrology, hydrogeology and oceanography. Remote sensing of soils and landforms by
photography. Applications in geological mapping, resource exploration, hydrology, water
pollution, etc.
Prerequisite: (P) ZCA 102/4 Physics II (Electricity and Magnetism)

(S) ZCT 103/3 Physics III (Vibrations, Waves and Optics)
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic concepts used in remote sensing related to spectral regions and data
acquisition techniques
2. apply remote sensing techniques to retrieve information from remotely sensed data
3. analyze remote sensing images using basic image processing analysis
Ref. Books: 1. Lillesand, T.M., Kiefer, R.W., and Chapman, J.W., Remote
Sensing and Image Interpretation (Fifth Edition), John Wiley &
Sons., 2004.
2. Campbell, J.B., Introduction to Remote Sensing (3rd Edition),

Guilford, 2002.
3. Rees, W.G., Physical Principles of Remote Sensing (2nd

Edition), Cambdridge University Press, 2001.
4. Sabins, F.F. Remote Sensing Prinsiples and Interpretation,

W.H. Freeman, 1997.
5. Barret, E.C. & Curtis, L.F. Introduction to Environmental

Remote Sensing (2nd Ed.), Chapman and Hall, 1982.
ZGT 395/6 Geophysics Project (two semesters)
Project in geophysics or related fields.
Prerequisite: (S) ZGT 295/4 Geophysics Practical
150
Learning Outcomes:
1. measure basic parameters related to geophysical investigation
2. justify geophysical anomaly from the acquired data set
3. organize, present and defend the findings of the study
SYNOPSES OF ELECTIVE COURSES GEOPHYSICS
ZGE 277/4 Structure of the Universe
Size of the Universe. Electromagnetic waves as carriers of information. Understanding

the Solar System. Stars and the H-R diagram. Stellar evolution. Galaxies. Cosmology.
Probability of extraterrestrial lifeforms.
Learning Outcomes:
1. understand, evaluate and appreciate the structure and beauty of the universe
2. relate the components that make up the universe
3. trace and determine the physical processes operating within it
Ref. Books: 1. Astronomy : A Beginners Guide to the Universe (2006),

Chaisson, E., McMillan, S.
2. Astronomy : Structure of the Universe (1989, 3rd edition) Roy,

A.E., Clarke, D.
3. The Astronomy Encyclopaedia (2002), Gen. Ed. Moore, P.,

Phillips (an Octupus Publ Grp)
ZGE 360/3 Synoptic Meteorology
Instroduction to surface weather charts, the plotting meteorological codes. Air mass:
features, classification, modification. Features of the frontal system, its structure and
theory (classical Bergeron theory and current theory). Horizontal advection theory and
the continuity equation. Non-frontal low pressure systems e.g. typhoons and tornadoes.
General features of the anticyclone: warm and cold anticyclones. Development of the
cyclonic system, shearing and curvature for cyclonic and anticyclonic flow. Divergence,
convergence and vertical motion. Relative vorticity, potential vorticity and absolute
151
vorticity and their relation to divergence and convergence. Features of long waves:
structure and theory. Observations and analysis at the surface and upper levels. Weather
forcasting: numerical modeling.
Prerequisite: (S) ZGT 270/3 Meteorology II
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the concepts related to the large-scale weather system
2. analyse and identify the large-scale weather system
3. justify and analyse the model used for the weather forecasting
Ref. Books: 1. Wallace, J.M. & Hobbs, P.V. Atmospheric Science An

Introductory Survey, Academic Press, 1977.
2. Holton, J.R. An Introduction to Dynamic Meteorology,

Academic Press, 1979.
3. Atkinson, B.W. Dynamical Meteorology An Introductory

Selection, Methuen, 1981.
ZGE 361/2 Advanced Geology
Depositional environments; sedimentary facies. Facies models: alluvial fan, fluvial plain,
sandy desert, lake, coast, delta, glacier, terrigenous shelf, carbonate shelf, continental
slope, continental rise, basin plain, subducting plate margin, oceanic ridge and oceanic
basin. Stratigraphic framework and structural styles in petroleum exploration. Basin
analysis.
Learning Outcomes:
1. generalize the depositional environments, sedimentary facies and facies models
2. explain the reservoir rocks and sedimentary basin
3. describe the rock porosity, permeability, diagenesis and stratigraphy
4. justify on related aspect of hydrocarbon production and development
152
Ref. Books: 1. Einsele, G. Sedimentary Basins: Evolution, Facies and Sediment
Budget, Springer-Verlag, 1992.
2. Walker, R.G. (Ed.) Facies Models (2nd Ed.), Geological

Association of Canada, 1984.
3. Miall, A.D. Principles of Sedimentary Basin Analysis, Springer-

Verlag, 1984.
4. Lowell, J.D. Structural Styles in Petroleum Exploration, Oil &

Gas Consultants International Inc., 1985.
ZGE 364/3 Tropical Meteorology and Forecasting
Introduction; radiation processes in the tropics (the input and energy received at the
earths surface).
Circulation in the tropics, the ITCZ, trade-wind inversion, cumulus convection. Tropical
disturbances, their structures and theories according to different regions: the tropical
cyclone, warm low pressure, squalls, tornado, Hadley circulation, the easterly waves.
Equatorial atmospheric features: equatorial waves, Kelvin waves, mixed Rossby-gravity
waves. Analysis of synoptic charts in the tropics (streamlines, isotach and satellite
images). Tropical scalar analysis (continuity equation). Theory: barotropic instability,
barotropic-baroclinic instability, instability of the first, second kinds, CISK, parcel and
slice methods. The flow features, structure of the monsoon waves. Interaction and
variability of the monsoon and its relationship with the higher latitudes (north and south).
Disturbances over peninsular Malaysia. Short and long range forecasting (statistics and
numerical ransfor).
Prerequisite: (S) ZGT 270 Meteorology II
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the concepts of tropical circulations
2. analyse and identify the equatorial atmospheric features
3. justify and analyse the model used for the short and long range forecasting
Ref. Books: 1. Krihnamurti, T.N. & Chang, C.P. Monsoon Meteorology,

Clarendon Press, 1987.
2. Fein, J.S. & Stephens, P.L. Monsoons, Academic Press, 1987.
153
ZGE 371/3 Potential Field Interpretation
Interpretation of gravity and magnetic data: 2-dimensional and 3-dimensional models.

Kernel function in resistivity sounding; ransfor, inversion and interpretation.
Introduction to nonlinear optimization methods, linear inversion, generalized inverse
method.
Other optimization methods: simplex, least squares and steepest descent.
Prerequisite: (S) ZGT 269/3 Exploration Geophysics II
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic aspects related to the potential field methods
2. explain the interpretation techniques of potential field methods using two and three
dimesion
3. classify the nonlinear optimization methods in the interpretation techniques of

potential field methods
Ref. Books: 1. Daniels, R.W. An Introduction to Numerical Methods and

Optimization Techniques, North-Holland, 1978.
2. Koefoed, O. Geosounding Principles, I Resistivity Sounding

Measurements, Elsevier, 1979.
3. Talwani, M. Computer Usage in the Computation of Gravity

Anomalies, in Alders, B. (Ed.). 1973, Methods in Computational
Physics, v.13 Geophysics, Academic Press, 1973.
ZGE 373/4 Seismic Data Processing
Basic mathematics for Fourier Transform. Aliasing and phase considerations. Operations
in the time domain and frequency domain. Preprocessing. Main processing sequence.
Velocity analysis. Factors that influence velocity. NMO. Dipping cases. DMO.
Velocity spectrum.
Deconvolution. Convolution model. Inverse filtering. Minimum phase. Optimum-
Wiener filters. Predictive deconvolution. Migration in space and time: Kirchhoff, finite-
difference and frequency-wavenumber. Introduction to partial migration before stack.
154
Land and sea acquisition geometry. 3-D seismic data processing. Radon transform and
tau-p processing. Hilbert transform and complex trace analysis. AVO.
Prerequisite: (S) ZGT 268/3 Exploration Geophysics I
Learning Outcomes:
1. understand the overview of seismic data processing
2. explain the steps involved in seismic data processing
3. snalyze various techniques in different steps e.g. common signal processing

operations, velocity analysis, deconvolution, migration etc
4. familiar with few advanced techniques used in seismic data processing
Ref. Books: 1. Yilmaz, O. Seismic Data Processing, Society of Exploration

Geophysicists, 2001.
2. Mayeda, W. Digital Signal Processing, Prentice-Hall, 1993.
ZGE 375/2 Engineering and Environmental Geophysics
Introduction to environmental and engineering problems as well as geophysicals

technique. Relevant physical properties of rocks and soil, seismic reflection: Optimum
window and optimum offset techniques. Field procedure, techniques and instrumentation.
Data correction and interpretation. Seismic refraction: Interpretation techniques such as
GRM and others. Electrical Images: 2D Resistivity Modelling. Finite difference
method. 2D electrical imaging exploration and multi electrods. Data collection and
interpretation. Introduction to 3D electrical imaging. Relevant topics such as GPR and
others. Field examples for environmental, engineering and hydrogeology.
Prerequisite: (S) ZGT 268/3 Exploration Geophysics I
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the geophysics theory and concept related to the engineering and
environment, including their ethics
2. explain the geophysical techniques application in engineering and environmental

problems
155
3. classify the geophysical field procedure and interpretation techniques related to the
engineering and environment
Ref. Books: 1. Reynolds, J.M. An Introduction to Applied and Environmental

Geophysics, Wiley, 1997.
2. Ward, S.H. (ed). Geotechnical and Environmental Geophysics,

S.E.G., 1990.
3. Palmer, D. Generalized Reciprocal Method of Seismic

Refraction Interpretation, S.E.G., 1980.
ZGE 379/3 Geological Oceanography
Sources of sediments, grain size, grain size analysis and environmental interpretation of
grain size. Properties of fluid flow, sediment movement, sediment transport rate.
Bedforms and internal structures. Origin and morphology of ocean basins and margins.
Beach, salt marsh and estuarine sedimentation. Sources, composition and types of deep-
sea sediments. Patterns of deep-sea sedimentation. Effects of sea-level changes. Nature
of hydrothermal circulation. Resources from the ocean floor.
Prerequisite: (C) ZGT 272/3 Introduction to Oceanography
Learning Outcomes:
1. identify the source of sediment and the fundamentals of fluid flow
2. describe the trends of sediment transport and depositional environment
3. explain patterns of deep-sea sediment and resources from the ocean floor
Ref. Books: 1. The Open University, The Ocean Basins: Their Structure and
Evolution, Pergamon Press, 1989.
2. Pethick, J. An Introduction to Coastal Geomorphology, Edward

Arnold, 1984.
3. Seibold, E. & Berger, W.H. The Sea Floor: An Introduction to

Marine Geology, Springer-Verlag, 1982.
4. The Open University, Waves, Tides and Shallow-water

Processes, Pergamon Press, 1989.
156
SYNOPSES OF CORE COURSES ENGINEERING PHYSICS
ZKT 221/2 Engineering Design
The aim of this course is to give students on opportunity to experience the process of
carrying out a design project. It will thus enable them to appreciate that design involves
ransformer parameters which will effect the design solution. The topics to be covered
include:
(i) Preparing a design specification:

Identifying customer requirements (e.g. aesthetics, functions, performance, cost,
production parameters); identifying and matching design parameters and
resource requirements; extracting design information from appropriate sources;
specifying new technologies used; applying relevant standards and legislation.
(ii) Preparing a design report:

Analying possible design solutions (matrix analysis, brainstorming, mind
mapping, forced decision making); evaluating costs & future potential; using
chck lists & design review procedures; rationale for adopting proposed solution;
techniques and media in presentation of a report.
(iii) Using computer technology in the design process:

Key features of a computer aided design system; softwares and their
applications; idectifying limits and constraints.
Prerequisite: (S) MAT 181/4 Programming for Science Applications

or ZCE 111/4 Computational Physics
Learning Outcomes:

1. carry out a project of design involving synthesising parameters that will affect the
design solution
2. work with other members for solving the design problem and to achieve customers
needs
3. report the progress of project on design, present and defend the outcome of design
Ref. Books: 1. Perisian-perisian ransfor yang bersesuaian umpamanya

rekabentuk berpandu ransfor, prosedur asembli, lintasan genting,
penyelenggaraan terancang, pemilihan bahan dan analisa matriks.
2. Cullum, R.D. Handbook of engineering design, London:

Butterworths, 1998.
3. Dieter, G.E. Engineering design: A mvvbaterial and processing

approach. McGraw-Hill, 1986.
157
4. Lewis, W.P., Samuel A.E. Fundamentals of engineering design,
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1989.
5. Yousef Haik, Engineering Design Process, Thomson, 2003.
Classes of materials: metals, semiconductors, insulators, single crystals, polycrystals,

glasses, ceramics, polymers, bulk materials, thin films, nanostructures.
Growth of conducting single crystal material. Thin films growth methods, sputtering, sol-
gel, laser ablation, growth of single crystal epitaxial film and multilayers: LPE, VPE,
MOCVD, MBE methods.
Basic processing of bulk ceramic. Preparation of polymers and glass.
Characterization of thin film and bulk material: electrical, diffraction, optical, ion beam
microscopy, imaging.
Fabrication methods, diffusion, ion implantation, lithography, metallization, dielectric

deposition, wet and dry etching
Type of junctions. Materials for light emitting diodes. Materials for lasers. Materials for
photodetector. Materials for solar cell. Photorefractive materials and holography storage.
Photoconductor
Learning Outcomes:

1. define the class of materials using atomistic and bandgap theory
2. describe the class of materials based on their dimension
3. explain how the materials are grown, characterized and fabricated
4. describe the electronic and photonic devices and their operations
Ref. Books: 1. Streetman, B., Banerjee, S., Solid State Electronic Devices, 6th
Ed. Prentice Hall, 2005.
2. May, G. S., Sze S. M., Fundamentals of Semiconductor

Fabrication, Wiley, 2004
3. J. Wilson & J. Hawkes, Optoelectronics An Introduction, 3rd

Ed. Prentice Hall, 1998.
4. Neamen, D. A., Semiconductor Physics and Devices, Irwin, 1992.
158
5. Kasap, S. O., Optoelectronics and Photonics Principles and
Practices, Prentice Hall, 2001
6. Singh, J., Optoelectronics An Introduction to Materials and

Devices, Mc. Graw Hill, 1996
ZKT 296/6 Photonics Laboratory

Selected experiments in photonics
Prerequisite: (S) ZCT 293/2 Physics Practicals III
Learning Outcomes:

1. perform the photonics experiments in fundamental and complex fibre optic
communications
2. perform good practices in experimentation including keeping a lab book and keeping
the experiment station clean
3. report experimental results with manuscript quality
Ref. Books: 1. Buku Panduan eksperimen yang disediakan.
2. B. E. A. Saleh and M. C. Teich, Fundamentals of Photonics,

Wiley, 1991
3. M. Tischler, Optoelectronics, Fiber Optics and Laser, A Text-Lab

Manual, 2 nd Ed. 1992.
ZKT 297/3 Practical Training
Students will be introduced to the various basic processes commonly found in machine
and electronic workshops. They will be allowed to work on some of these processes.
Elements of safety will be emphasized. Students will also be introduced to the basics of
technical drawing and they will be given opportunities to practice independent design and
analysis. As such students will be required to build simple physical models/products
based on sound engineering principles.
Prerequisite: (S) ZCT 192/2 Physics Practicals II
Learning Outcomes:

1. perform machine operations following all safety precautions
2. use the equipment in the electronics workshop following all safety precautions
3. perform the design projects in the machine and electronics workshops
159
ZKT 321/3 The Engineer in Society
Engineering profession duties, responsibilities, work culture, professionalism.
Impact of technology on society and environment responsibility of engineers to develop

useful, safe and economical products for the society.
Code of ethics and professionalism of the engineer themes of ethics, views of ethical
conduct, meaning of responsibility, ethical dilemma, code of ethics, corporate social
responsibility,
Basic skills in management and law globalization impact, organizations, types of

managers, management processes and approaches, behavioral management.
Learning Outcomes:

1. describe the engineering discipline and identify the good qualities of an engineer
2. explain the ethical issues of engineering profession and justify the decisions to solve
ethical problems
3. explain the basics of management and industrial laws
4. demonstrate results of critical thinking in problem-based projects and practice
leadership roles
Ref. Books: 1. Ethics in Engineering, Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger,

4th edition, McGraw Hill, 2005
2. Management, John R. Schermerhorn Jr, 8th edition, John Wiley

& Sons, Inc, 2005
3. Engineering Ethics, C. E. Harris Jr, M. S. Pritchard, M. J.

Rabins, 2nd edition, Thomson Wadsworth, 2000
ZKT 396/6 Engineering Physics Projects
Consist of a selection of experiments and projects.
Prerequisite: (S) ZKT 296/2 Physics Practicals I
Learning Outcomes:

1. form a sufficient coordination with the project partner and conduct a physics project
successfully
2. perform the process including independent work, thinking and literature review
3. report the implementation of the project and the conclusions from the study
4. present the outcome of the project successfully
160
SYNOPSES OF ELECTIVE COURSES ENGINEERING PHYSICS
ZKE 322/3 Electronic and Photonic Materials II (Special Topics)
Ferroelectrics:
Basic ideas. Displacive ferroelectrics. Relaxor ferroelectrics. Landau theory of
displacive transitions. Susceptibility divergence. Materials design of perovskite ceramics
for specific applications. Properties of PZT family. Applications of bulk type
ferroelectrics; capacitors, pyroelectric detectors, strain sensors and actuators, nonlinear
optic crystals.
Applications of ferroelectrics thin film; capacitors, DRAM elements in Ics.
Processing routes and integration with IC technology.
Liquid crystals:
Basic definitions. Nematic ordering, definition of direction.
Alignment of direction by electric and magnetic fields and by pinning at surfaces. Free
energy in direction of divergence and curl. Electric field alignment and Frederiks
transitions. Optical anisotropy. Rotation of optical polarization in pure twist cell. Chiral
molecules and cholesteric ordering. Pitch of cholesteric spiral and variation with
temperature. Smectic ordering. SmA, SmC and SmC*.
Simple applications in display devices. Twisted nematic display cell and operation.
Dipole switching of SmC* cells and possible applications.
Definations of B, H, M. Hysteresis loops of ferromagnets, materials, domain walls.

Ferromagnetic thin film.
Microwave applications and ferrite devices.
Prerequisite: (S) ZKT 222/3 Electronic and Photonic Materials I

(C) ZCT 307/3 Solid State Physics I
Learning Outcomes:
1. define the ferroelectrics materials and properties; Piezoelectric and pyroelectric

materials, devices and applications
2. sketch the structure of ferroelectric and ferromagnetic materials and the structure of
liquid crystals display
3. describe types of ferroelectric, ferromagnetic and liquid crystals
4. define the advantages and disadvantages of different applications and integration

with technology
161
Ref. Books: 1. Setter and E.L. Colla (ed.), Ferroelectric Ceramics, N.
Birkhauser, 1993.
2. P.J. Collings, Liquid Crystals, IOPP, 1990.
3. S. Chandrasekhar, Liquid Crystals, Cambridge University Press,

1992.
4. P.G. de Gennes and J. Prost, The Physics of Liquid Cyrstals,

Oxford University Press, 1993.
5. R. Gerber, C.D. Wright and G. Asti (ed.), Applied Magnetism,

Kluwer, 1994.
6. J. Singh. Optoelectronics An Introduction to Materials and

Devices. McGraw Hill, 1996.
ZKE 323/3 Electronic and Photonic Devices and Systems
Electronic devices: Zener diode, tunnel diode, FET, MOSFET, UJT, SCR. LASCR,
Programmable logic controller (PLC).
Source and detectors: Lamps, LEDs, lasers, PMT, photodiodes, phototransistors, infrared
and microwave sources and detectors.
Electro-optic devices: Modulators (magneto-optic and acousto-optic), optical switches,
liquid crystal display and TV, CCD, integrated optics.
Optical instruments: Microscopes, interferometer, radiometer, cameras spectrometers.

(S) ZCT 213/2 Optics
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the principles of operation of several electronic, photonic, electro-optic and

acousto-optic devices
2. explain the concept of devices application in electronic and photonic systems
3. demonstrate the importance of certain parameters in the design of system based on

electronic and photonic devices
4. perform calculations that involve electronic and photonic devices and systems
performance
162
Ref. Books: 1. T.L. Floyd, Electronic Devices, 5th Ed. Prentice Hall, 1999.
2. R.L.Boylestad and L.Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuit

Theory, 8th Edition, Prentice hall, 2002
3. S.D. Smith, Optoelectronic Devices, Prentice Hall, 1995.
4. P. Bhattacharya, Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices, 2nd Ed.

Prentice Hall, 1997.
5. B.E.A.Saleh and M.C.Teich, Fundamentals of Photonics, John

Wiley, 1991
ZKE 324/2 Display and Storage Technology
Video output technique. TV line format. Text display. Dot matrix display. Segment
display. LED. Vacume fluorescence display (VFD). Electroluminescience display.
Colour CRT. Monochrome CRT. Plasma display. Display resolution.
Lyquid crystal devices: physics and applications. Electro-optical effect used in liquid
crystal displays (LCD). Multiplexing capability and optical memory of liquid crystal
cells and basic properties for applications in high information contentscreens. Supertwist
liquid crystal screens, active matrix addressing LCD, ferroelectric LCD.
Plasma fluycies, Polymer disflay
Electron beam storage. Bubble and charge coupled memories. Cassettes. Semiconductor
storage. Electromagnetic storage. Optical tape storage. Optical disc storage. Quantum
storage. Data storages: Hard disk, floppy disk, CD and DVD.
Prerequisite: (S) ZCT 213/2 Optics
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the theoretical concepts behind displays as well as information storage

techniques
2. describe the technological fabrication steps of different types of display as well as

data storage devices
3. explain the operations of several display and storage devices
Ref. Books: 1 Magnetic Materials, Structures and Processing for Information

Storage;
Ed by B. Daniels Hardcover (July 2000) Material Research
Society.
163
2 Display Technologies II by Fang-Chen Luo (Editor), et al.
Hardcover (June 1998). Society of Photo-optical
Instrumentation Engineers.
3 Advanced Optical Data Storage: Materials, Systems, and

Interfaces
to Computers by Pericles A. Mitkas (Editor) Zameer U. Hasan
(Editor),
Hans J. Caufal, (October 1999) Society of Photo-optical
Instrumentation Engineers.
4 Magneto-Optical Recording Materials by Richard J. Gambino

(Editor),
T. Suzuki (Editor) (August 1999) IEEE.
5 Advanced Optical Data Storage: Materials, Systems, and

Interfaces to
Computers by Pericles A. Mitkas (Editor) Zameer U. Hasan
(Editor),
Hans J. Caufal, (October 1999) Society of Photo-optical
instrumentation
Engineers.
ZKE 325/4 Optical Fiber Technology and Optical Communication
History of the optical fibre. Electromagnetic wave in optical fibre and optical fibre
material. Total internal reflection. Acceptance angle and cone. Characteristics of optical
fibre; numerical aperture, mode, V-number, attenuation, dispersion, and bandwidth.
Choosing of Wavelength. A variety of different fibre and their advantages; single mode,
multimode, step index, graded index, and other profiles.
Optical fibre design and fabrication. Preform fabrication; MCVD, PCVD, OVD, and
VAD. Fibre drawing system and manufacturing of various optical cables. Advantageous
and disadvantageous of plastic optical fibre (POF). Characteristics and fabrication of rare
earth doped optical fibre. Principles and operation of wave guide, interferometer,
coupler, modulator, splicer, switch, and some optical sensors. Characteristics and
fabrication of rare earth doped optical fabre. Polarization maintorining fibres.
Fundamental of optical communication. Wave guides and wave guide devices. Wave
division multiplexing (WDM). Transmitters in optical communication: LED and laser
diode, Fabry-Perot laser, and distributed feedback laser diode. Reciever for optical
signals. Theory and operation of optical connectors. Optical connection and launching
losses. Structure and operation of optical modulator such as LiNbO3 and Mach-Zehnder
interferometer. Theory and operation of optical amplifier: semiconductor and rare earth
doped optical amplifier.
164
Optical communication system and architecture; transmitter, receiver, modulator,
amplifier, repeaters, optical fibre medium, multiplexing, and demultiplex. Fiber optic
system design and ransformer ing. Information transmission: Modulation methods
(AM, FM, PCM) multiplexing methods (TDM,FDM, WDM), data rate, noise ratio,
bandwidth, bit error, repeaters, analysis of optical power budget, and system rise time.
Optical communication networks system.
Prerequisite: (S) ZCT 213/3 Optics

(C) ZCT 304/3 Electricity and Magnetism
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic concepts related to application of optical fibre technology in

communication
2. explain the principles of electromagnetic wave propagation in optical fibre,

characteristics of optical fibre, a variety of different fibre and their advantages,
process of optical fibre fabrication, transmitter and receiver in optical communication
and fibre optic system testing for application in communication.
3. perform calculation of attenuation and dispersion in optical fibre, optical connection

and launching losses and optical communication networks system
Ref. Books: 1. Fiber Optic Communication 4th Edition, by Joseph C. Palais,

Prentice Hall 1998.
2. Fiber Optic Test and Measurement by Dennis Derickson (Editor)

1998 Prentice Hall.
3. Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers; Fundamentals and Technology

by P.C. Becker, N.A. Olsson, Philippe M. Becker, Jay R.
Simpson, Anders A. Olsson (1999). Academic Press.
ZKE 326/4 Signal and Image Processing
Digital image and signal processing system; processors, digitizer, digital computer,
storage, display, scanner.
Sampling and quantization; image geometry, frequency domain, image and signal
transformations: Fourier transform, discrete Fourier transform, 2-D Fourier transform,
Laplace transform, convolution, fast Fourier transform, Walsh transorm, discrete cosine
transform, Hotelly transform and Hough transform.
165
Signal detection in frequency domain, power spectrum, filters. Encoding, different pulse
code modulation.
Image enhancement, histogramming, smoothing, sharpening, thresholding, edge detection,

spatial mask, linking. Image representation and description.
Industrial vision system; automated visual inspection, process control and assembly
application. Holografhy
Prerequisite: -
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain all basic principles in digital signal and image processing and display
including acquisition, processing and enhancement
2. explain image and signal transformation
3. relate the knowledge with the industrial applications
Ref. Books: 1. Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine Vision by M. Sonka,

V. Hlavac and R. Boyle, 3rd edition (830 p.) substantially
updated and published by Thomson Engineering in 2007, ISBN
0-495-08252-X.
2. Digital Image Processing by Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E.

Woods. Third Edition (2007) Addison-Wesley Pub Co.
3. Algorithms for Image Processing and Computer Vision by

James R. Parker, (November 1996) John Willey & Sons.
4. Digital Image Processing by Kenneth R. Castleman, (August 21,

1995) Prentice Hall.
Solid State Lighting I will cover a brief introduction to semiconductor material systems
and growth techniques used for producing light emitting diodes (LEDs). The basic of
structures, properties and operation as well as other applications of LEDs will be taught.
Prerequisite : (C) ZCT 307 Solid State Physics I
166
Learning Outcomes :
1. Explain in basic structures, properties and operation as well as other applications

of light emitting diodes.
2. Understand and explain the fabrication of LEDs, from the aspects of growth until
metallization process.
3. Know and differentiate the characterization techniques for LEDs.
Ref. Books: 1. Light Emitting Diodes, 2nd Edition, by E.F Schubert, Cambridge
University Press, 2006.
2. Introduction to Light Emitting Diode Technology and

Applications, by Gilbert Held, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis
Group, 2009.
3. Introduction to Solid-State Lighting, by A. Zukauskas, M.S Shur

and R. Gaska, Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2002.
4. Physics of Semiconductor Devices, 2nd Edition, by S.M Sze, John

Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pte., 1999.
5. An Introduction: The Physics of Low-Dimensional

Semiconductors, by J.H. Davies, Cambridge University Press,
1998.
ZKE328/3 Solid State Lighting II
To understand the electrical and optical properties of light emitting diodes and to study
how it could be modified for use in solid state lighting applications. Students will learn
the principles of calorimetry, photometry and color rendering as well as the thermal
resistances across the junctions in LEDs.
Prerequisite : (S) ZKE 327/3 Solid State Lighting I
Learning Outcomes :
1. identify the LEDS type and in depth understanding of LEDs electrical and optical
properties.
2. explain fundamentals and characteristics of visible and ultraviolet emitter materials

and able to design and simulate DBR reflectors for light extraction.
3. calculate and analyze thermal resistance network at various junction temperatures

for one dimensional heat flow and explain the principles of calorimetry,
photometry and relevant color rendering principles in LEDs.
167
Ref. Books : 1. Light Emitting Diodes, 2nd Edition, by E. F. Schubert,
Cambridge University Press, 2006.
2. Introduction to Light Emitting Diode Technology and

Applications , by Gibert Held, CRC Press, Taylor& Francis
Group, 2009.
3. Introduction to Solid-State Linghting, by A. Zukauskas, M. S.

Shur and R. Gaska, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2002.
4. Physics of Semiconductor Devices, 2nd Edition, by S. M. Sze,

John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pte. Ltd., 1999.
5. An Introduction: The Physics of Low-Dimensional

Semiconductors, by J.H. Davies, Cambridge University Press,
1998.
ZKE 378/4 Introduction to Radio Astronomy
History of radio astronomy. The radio universe. Cosmic microwave background (CMB).
Radio telescopes. Radio interferometry. Image systhesis. Active radio stars. Active
radio galaxies.
Prerequisite: (S) ZAE 376/4 Astronomy Principles and Practices
Learning Outcomes
1. understand and affirm the principles of radio astronomy
2. recognize and elaborate receiving and data processing instruments
3. recognize and appreciate the contributions of radio astronomy to knowledge
4. relate radio data with physical processes in the region
Ref. Books : 1. Radio Astronomy (1966), Kraus, J.D.
2. Radio Astronomy Projects (2003), Lonc, W., Radio Sky

Publishing
3. IInterferometry and Synthesis in Radio Astronomy (2001, 2nd

edition), Thompson, R., Moran, J, Swenson, G., Krieger Publ.
168
SYNOPSIS OF CORE COURSES MEDICAL PHYSICS
ZMT 298/2 Medical Physics Practical
Consist of a set of selected experiments.

Prerequisite: (S) ZCT 293/2 Physics Practical III
Learning Outcomes:
1. follow the instructions of the experiment and perform the experiment
2. analyze the acquired data
3. report the experimental result
ZMT 231/4 Human Anatomy and Physiology
Cell structure and function. Homeostasis.
Anatomy and Physiology in the following : Respiratory system, Nervous system,Gastro-

intestinal system, Cardiovascular system, Endrocrinology, including reproductive system,
Muscle and skeletal system, Genito-urinary system.
Learning Outcomes:
1. define the terms associated with human anatomy and physiology
2. explain the levels of structural organization in human body
3. explain the 10 human systems, its associated organs and the functions of the organs
4. understand and explain the functions of each system in order to maintain the
balancing of the activity in the human body
Ref. Books: 1. F H. Martini and E.F Bartholomew Benjamin/Cummings,
Essentials of Anatomy & Physiology, 4th edition (2006),
2. G.J. Tortora and S.R. Grabowski, Principles of Anatomy and

Physiology, John. Wiley & Sons; 11th edition (2005)
3. K. Saladin, Anatomy and Physiology: The Unity of Form and

Function, McGraw-Hill 4th edition; (2006)
4. Cameron J.R. and Skofronick J.G. Medical Physics Wiley, 1978.
169
ZCE 331/4 Radiation Biophysics
Introduction to atomic nucleus and its characteristics. Nucleus as a source of radiation.

Interaction of radiation with matter. Interaction mechanism of photons and electrons with
matter. Interaction of neutrons, alpha particles, heavy nuclei and nuclear fission
fragments with matter.
Detection and measurement of radiation. Radiation dosimetry. Production of
radionuclides and its use in tracer techniques. Biological effects of radiation.
Prerequisite: (P) ZCT 104/3 Physics IV (Modern Physics)
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the interaction mechanism of ionizing radiation with matter
2. explain the concepts of the detection and measurement of radiation
3. explain the process of production of the radionuclides and its use
4. explain the biological effects of radiation
Ref. Books: 1. Attix, F.H. Introduction to Radiological Physics and Radiation

Dosimetry, John Wiley & Sons, 1986 (2nd Edition, May 2002).
2. D.T. Graham, Principles of Radiological Physics Churchill

Livingstone, 2003.
3. Johns, H.E. & Cunningham, J.R., Physics of Radiology

(4th Ed.), Springfield, Illinois: Charles C., Thomas, 1983.
4. Abdul Ghaffar Ramli, Keradioaktifan: Asas dan Penggunaan

DBP, 1991.
ZMT 334/3 Physics of Diagnostic Radiology
X-ray tube and generators. X-ray spectrum. Interaction of X-rays in human body.
Scattering radiation. Film-screen radiography. Fluoroscopy, tomography, mammography.
Digital radiography. Quality control and testing of radiographic X-ray machine. Film
image quality: contrast, resolution. MTF. Radiation hazards associated with diagnostic
radiology. Current developments in diagnostic radiology.
170
Learning Outcomes:
1. understand and distinguish the basic concepts between conventional and digital
radiography
2. explain the work operation of fluoroscopy, tomography and mammography
3. explain the radiation hazards associated with diagnostic radiology
4. explain the current technology in diagnostic radiology
5. understand and explain the factors and parameters associated with film image quality
as well as quality control and testing of radiographic X-ray machine
Ref. Books: 1. P.P. Dedy & B Beaton Physics of Diagnostic Radiology 2nd
.ed., IOP 1999.
2. W.R. Hendee & E.R. Ritenour Medical Imaging Physics 3rd

ed., Mosby Yearbook Khas, 1994.
3. A.B. Wolbarst Physics of Radiology, Appleton & Lange, 1993.
4. Curry T.S. et al. Christensens Physics of Diagnostic Radiology

4th ed., Philadelphia, Lea & Febiger, 1990.
5. S. Webb The Physics of Medical Imaging, Adam Hilger, 1988.
6. P. Sprawls Physical Principles of Medical Imaging 2nd. Ed.,

Medical Physics Publishing, 1995.
ZMT 335/3 Physics of Radiotherapy and Nuclear Medicine
Introduction to radiotherapy. Radiobiology basics for radiotherapy. Isodose curves, depth

dose, field size, Corrections for body inhomogeneities and tissue curvature.
Radiotherapy equipment. Characteristics of Co-60 machines and linear accelerators.

Brachytherapy. Quality control. Safety aspects of treatment room design. Current
developments in radiotherapy.
Basic physics in radionuclide imaging. Principle of tracers in nuclear medicine. Ideal

characteristics of radioactive agents for diagnosis. Ideal characteristics of radioactive
agents for therapy. Rectilinear scanners. Gamma cameras. Technetium generator.
Internal dosimetry.
171
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the basic concepts related to radiotherapy and nuclear medicine
2. classify the radiotherapy and nuclear medicine equipments
3. explain the dose distribution and analyze the scattered radiation in radiotherapy
4. classify the radionuclide properties used in nuclear medicine
5. perform safety aspect related to radiotherapy and nuclear medicine sources
Ref. Book: 1. F.M. Khan, The Physics of Radiation Therapy 3rd . edition
(2003).
2. Cherry S.R., Sorenson J.A. and Phelps. M.E., Physics in Nuclear

Medicine, (2003).
3. Mettler F.A. and Guiberteau M.J., Essentials of Nuclear

Medicine Imaging, Saunders (W.B.) Co. Ltd., 5th edition (2005).
4. M.E.J. YOUNG., Radiological Physics, H.K. Lewis & Co., Ltd,

(2003).
5. J.R. Williams & D.I. Thwaites, Radiotherapy Physics in
Practice, Oxford University Press, 2nd edition (2000)
ZMT 397/6 Medical Physics Project (two semesters)
A course of two semesters duration inclusive of project and seminar. Where applicable,
the use of computers is employed in the project embarked.
Prerequisites: (S) MAT 181/4 Programming for Scientific Applications

and (S) ZMT 298/2 Medical Physics Practical.
Learning Outcomes:
1. study the literature review
2. write the project report
3. present the work in a seminar and viva-voce
172
SYNOPSES OF ELECTIVE COURSES MEDICAL PHYSICS
ZME 336/4 Medical Instrumentation
X-ray tube and generators. CT scanners. Gamma cameras, collimator design, crystal
selection, photomultiplier drift. Interface circuit. Multi-detector system and rotational
gamma camera. Instrumentation in magnetic resonance imaging. Ultrasound source and
detector. Characteristics of piezoelectric materials. Single element transducer design and
field characteristics. Medical lasers: types, properties and medical applications. Optical
microscopy and electron microscopy. Computers in medicine.
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain the X-ray tube structure, describe the fundamentals of X-ray generator and
discuss about X-ray production and detection
2. explain gamma camera components, MRI instrumentations, ultasound, medical

lasers, optical and electron microscope
3. discuss the hazards and aplications of lasers in medicine
4. discuss various computer applications in medicine
Ref. Book: 1. D.W. Chakeres & P. Schmalbrock Fundamentals of Magnetic

Resonance Imaging, Williams & Wilkins, 1993.
2. A. Katzir Laser & Optical Fibers in Medicine, Academic Press,

1993.
3. Mettler F.a. and Guiberteau M.J. Essentials of Nuclear Medicine

Imaging, Orlando, Grune & Strtton 3rd. Edition, 1991.
4. Matthew Hussey, Basic Physics and Technology of Medical

Ultrasound, MacMillan Publ. Ltd., London and Basingstoke,
1985.
5. McDicken w.N. Diagnostic Ultrasonics: Principles and Use of

Instruments 3rd. ed., Churchill Livingstone 1991.
173
ZME 338/4 Physics of Medical Imaging
Photography process, solid state detector and CCD. Signal/noise and sensitivity.
Calibration, horizontal field and splitting technique. Digitizer and plate scanner.
Hardware for image processing, software techniques, histogram, convolution, fringe
upgrading, Fourier techniques and slit synthesis. Discrete, 2-D, and fast. Fourier
transformer. Laplace, Hough, Walsh and Hotelly transforms and their applications.
Information acquired from imaging such as data acquired in CI., MRI, angiography,
infrared and ultrasound imagings.
Physical factors that may be considered in each technique to enhance imaging

information.
Learning Outcomes:
1. explain all basic principles of digital image processing
2. analyse digital images
3. explain the process of image acquisition, enhancement, storage, format, and display
4. discuss the principles of image processing and its applications in medical imaging
equipments systems
Ref. Books: 1. Sprawls P. Physical Principles of Medical Imaging 2nd. ed.,

Medical Physics Publishing, 1995.
2. W.R. Hendee & E.R. Ritenous Medical Imaging Physics 3rd.

ed., Mosby Yearbook, 1994.
3. Z.J. Cho, J.P. Jones & M. Singh Foundations of Medical

Imaging, John Wiley, 1993.
4. D.W. Chakeres & P. Schmalbrock Fundamentals of Magnetic

Resonance Imaging, Williams & Wilkins, 1993.
5. Richard R. Carlton & Arlene M. Adler. Principles of

Radiographic Imaging, Delmar Learning, 4Rev Ed edition, 2005.
174
SYNOPSES OF UNIVERSITY COURSE
Introduction to basic computer concepts: computer hardware and software. A brief

introduction to programming concepts. Problem solving and program design.
Introduction to C++ language: writing simple C++ programs but comprehensive. Program
control structures: sequence, selection and repetition. Basic C++ operators. Output
formatting.
Modular programming: functions. Strategies in solving complex problems.
File processing.
Advanced data types: arrays. Pointers. Enumerations and structures. Strings. Classes and
object oriented programming.
Learning Outcomes:
1. understand fundamental computer programming concepts and algorithm development

in problem-solving
2. apply appropriate programming techniques/structures and strategies in transforming
the description of a problem into executable computer codes
4. develop programs using advanced programming structures (modular programming,
files manipulation, pointers) which add values to the computer programs
Ref. Books: 1. Bronson Gary J. (2006) A First Book of C++: From Here to
There, 3rd edition, Course Technology, Thomson Learning,
Australia.
2. Cannon Scott (2001). Understanding Programming: An

Introduction Using C++, 2nd edition. Brooks Cole.
3. Malik D.S. (2002). C++ Programming: From Problem Analysis

To Program Design, Course Technology, Thomson Learning.
ZCU 100/2 Energy and The Environment
Energy and related concepts, history of energy use, sources of energy, energy units and
quality of energy.
World energy consumption. Consumption of fossil fuels and its effect on the environment.
Use of hydropower, nuclear, wind, geothermal, solar and ocean energy as well as biomass
and their effects on the environment.
Energy situation in Malaysia and her energy policy. Efficient use of energy. Modeling.
175
Learning Outcomes:
1. distinguish and explain the types of energy and differentiate between fossil energy
and renewable energy
2. relate the advantages of energy and its effects on the environment
3. explain the generation process of renewable and non-renewable energy resources
4. explain and analyze energy efficiency and discuss the current development of energy
usage in Malaysia
Ref. Books: 1. Energy and Environment Module, CETREE, 2008
2. Robert A. Ristinen and Jack P. Kraushaar, Energy and the

Environment (2nd Edition), John Wiley and Sons, 2006.
3. Roger A. Hinrichs and Merlin H. Kleinbach, Energy: Its Use and

the Environment (3rd Edition), Brooks Cole, 2001
176
INDEX OF COURSES (APPLIED)
Advanced Geology ZGE361/2 152

Applied Physics Project ZAT394/6 133
Applied Spectroscopy ZAE385/4 135
Astronomy Principles and Practices ZAE376/4 134
Atomic and Nuclear Physics ZCE305/3
Calculus and Linear Algebra ZCA110/4 113
Classical Mechanics ZCE208/2
Complex Analysis and Differential Equations ZCT210/4 121
Computational Physics ZCE111/4 137
Display and Storage Technology ZKE324/2 163
Electricity and Magnetism ZCT304/3 126
Electronic and Photonic Devices and Systems ZKE323/3 162
Electronic and Photonic Materials I ZKT222/3 158
Electronic and Photonic Materials II ZKE322/3 161
Electronics I ZCT106/3 116
Electronics II ZCT206/3 119
Energy and The Environment ZCU100/2 175
Energy Studies ZCE341/4 138
Engineering and Environmental Geophysics ZGE375/2 155
Engineering Design ZKT221/2 157
Engineering Physics Project ZKT396/6 160
Exploration Geophysics I ZGT268/3 146
Exploration Geophysics II ZGT269/3 146
Geology I ZGT161/3 141
Geology II ZGT162/3 141
Geology Oceanography ZGE379/3 156
Geology Practical ZGT190/2 142
Geophysical Data Analysis ZGT264/2 143
Geophysics Practical ZGT295/4 149
Geophysics Project ZGT395/6 150
Human Anatomy and Physiology ZMT231/4 169
Instrumentation ZAT283/3 129
Introduction to Astronomy ZCE275/4
Introduction to Microprocessors ZAT281/4 128
Introduction to Oceanography ZGT272/3 148
Introduction to Radio Astronomy ZKE378/4 168
Laser and Its Applications ZAE384/4 135
Low Dimensional Semiconductor Structures ZAT389/3 131
Material Science ZAE282/3 133
Mathematical Methods ZCT218/3 124
Medical Instrumentations ZME336/4 173
Medical Physics Practical ZMT298/2 169
Medical Physics Project ZMT397/6 172
Meteorology I ZGT265/3 143
Meteorology II ZGT270/3 147
177
Non Destructive Testing ZAE388/4 136
Optical Fiber Technology and Optical ZKE325/4 164
Communications
Optics ZCT213/2 124
Photonics Lab ZKT296/2 159
Physics I (Mechanics) ZCA101/4 112
Physics II (Electricity and Magnetism) ZCA102/4 112
Physics III (Vibrations, Waves and Optics) ZCT103/3 115
Physics IV (Modern Physics) ZCT104/3 116
Physics of Radiotherapy and Nuclear Medicine ZMT335/3 171
Physics of Diagnostic Radiology ZMT334/3 170
Physics of Medical Imaging ZME338/4 174
Physics of Semiconductors Devices ZAT386/4 130
Physics Practical I ZCT191/2 117
Physics Practical II ZCT192/2 118
Physics Practical III ZCT293/2 125
Physics Practical IV ZCT294/2
Potential Field Interpretation ZGE371/3 154
Practical Training ZKT297/3 159
Pure Physics Project ZCT390/6
Quantum Mechanics ZCT205/3 118
Radiation Biophysics ZCE331/4 170
Remote Sensing ZGT374/3 149
Seismic Data Processing ZGE373/3 154
Semiconductor Fabrication Processes ZAT387/4 130
Signal and Image Processing ZKE326/4 135
Solid Earth Geophysics I ZGT266/3 144
Solid Earth Geophysics II ZGT267/3 145
Solid State Lighting I ZKE327/3 166
Solid State Lighting II ZKE328/3 167
Solid State Physics I ZCT307/3 127
Solid State Physics II ZCT317/3
Statistical Mechanics ZCT207/2 120
Structure of The Universe ZGE277/4 151
Synoptic Meteorology ZGE360/3 151
The Engineer in Society ZKT321/3 160
Thermodynamics ZCT212/2 123
Tropical Meteorology and Forecasting ZGE364/3 153
Vector Analysis ZCT211/2 122
X-Ray Analysis ZCE351/3 139
178
SCHOOL OF
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
179
SCHOOL OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
INTRODUCTION
Excellence in research and teaching is our aspiration, which is driven by research-active

staff from diverse academic and research backgrounds. We offer exciting opportunities to
students over a wide variety of topics related to Biological Sciences. Students are exposed
to essential fundamental knowledge on ecosystem, biodiversity, plants, animals, microbial
and cellular processes in the first year. In the second year, students can choose to
specialise in either Agrobiology, Aquatic Biology, Biotechnology, Environmental
Biology or Biology and Management of Vector and Parasites leading to a degree in
Bachelor of Applied Science (Honours), in three years. In addition, students are also
encouraged to participate in an optional internship programme during the semester break
at the end of the second year. The 2 months internship programme will provide the
students with valuable industry and corporate exposures.
Students graduating from the School of Biological Sciences will be equipped with the
following knowledge:
1. The diversity of life forms and the reasons for this

2. The intricate relationships between life forms and their environments
3. Role of all life forms in maintaining the delicate balance of our ecosystem
4. Good Laboratory Practices and usage of common and advanced laboratory
equipment
5. Ability to design and implement scientific experiments
6. Ability to write reports and make scientific presentations
The knowledge acquired by the students of Biological Sciences will enable them to make
wise decisions with respect to the current global environmental issues such as pollution,
environmental deterioration, biodiversity loss, deforestation, global warming and climate
change. In addition, the students also develop innovative skills and are able to generate
and test new ideas. Students with this essential knowledge will excel in any career path
that they choose. The School of Biological Sciences is proud to produce students who can
think in a holistic manner to ensure a sustainable tomorrow.
Vision
Centre of excellence for education and research in the field of biological sciences.
Mission
1. To provide quality and innovative teaching and learning for its entire degree
program.
2. To achieve research excellence.
3. To establish and enhance the collaboration with industries for education input
and research.
4. To serve the society and country by providing the latest knowledge and
technology.
180
ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF
Dean
Prof. Dr. Abu Hassan Ahmad
Deputy Dean
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Amir Hamzah Prof. Dr. Siti Azizah Mohd Nor Assoc. Prof. Dr. Latiffah
Ahmad Ghazali (Post-Graduate Studies & Zakaria
(Academic & Student Research) (Industry & Community
Development) Network)
Programme Chairman
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Yahya Mat Assoc. Prof. Dr. Ahmad Ramli Dr. Sreeramanan a/l
Arip Mohd Yahya Subramaniam
(Microbiology) (Biotechnology) (Agrobiology)
Prof. Dr. Ng Wing Keong Dr. Zary Shariman Yahaya Assoc. Prof. Dr. Shahrul
(Aquatic and Environmental (Biology and Management Anuar Mohd Sah
Biology) of Vectors and Parasites) (Plant and Animal Biology)
181
Principal Assistant Registrar Senior Assistant Registrar
Mr. Abd Hadi Ahmad Ms. Noroslinda Hussain
182
ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF
Dean
PROFESSOR DR. ABU HASSAN AHMAD
Deputy Dean (Academic & Student Development)

ASSOC. PROFESSOR DR. AMIR HAMZAH AHMAD GHAZALI
Deputy Dean (Post Graduate Studies & Research)

PROFESSOR DR. SITI AZIZAH MOHD NOR
Deputy Dean (Industry & Community Network)

ASSOC. PROFESSOR DR. LATIFFAH ZAKARIA
Programme Chairman
Agrobiology
DR. SREERAMANAN A/L SUBRAMANIAM
Aquatic and Environmental Biology

PROFESSOR DR. NG WING KEONG
Biology and Management of Vectors and Parasites

DR. ZARY SHARIMAN YAHAYA
Plant and Animal Biology

ASSOC. PROFESSOR DR. SHAHRUL ANUAR MOHD SAH
Biotechnology
ASSOC. PROFFESOR DR. AHMAD RAMLI MOHD YAHYA
Microbiology
ASSOC. PROFESSOR DR. YAHYA MAT ARIP
Principal Assistant Registrar

MR. ABD HADI AHMAD
Senior Assistant Registrar

MS. NOROSLINDA HUSSAIN
183
ACADEMIC STAFF
PROFESSOR TELEPHONE E-MAIL

EXTENSION
Abd. Wahab A. Rahman 3505 arawahab@usm.my
Abu Hassan Ahmad 3815/3181/3504 aahassan@usm.my
Baharuddin Salleh 4001 sallehb@usm.my
Chan Lai Keng 3520 lkchan@usm.my
Che Salmah Md. Rawi 4061 csalmah@usm.my
Chong Shu Chien @ Alexander 4053/4532 alex@usm.my
Darah Ibrahim 2926 darah@usm.my
K. Sudesh Kumar a/l C. Kanapathi 4367 ksudesh@usm.my
Lee Chow Yang 3523/4151 chowyang@usm.my
Mashhor Mansor 3518 mashhor@usm.my
Mohammed Razip Samian 4007 razip.samian@gmail.my
Mohd. Nazalan Mohd. Najimudin 4007/3080 nazalan@usm.my
Ng Wing Keong 4005 wkng@usm.my
Roshada Hashim 2930/4016/2713 roshada@usm.my
Siti Azizah Mohd. Nor 4004/4174 sazizah@usm.my
Zairi Jaal 3053 zairi@usm.my
Zulfigar Yasin 3500 zulfigarusm@yahoo.my
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR
Ahmad Ramli Mohd Yahya 4002/4054 armyahya@usm.my

Ahmad Sofiman Othman 4019/4054 sofiman@usm.my
Amir Hamzah Ahmad Ghazali 4008/3503 amirhg@usm.my
Amirul Al-Ashraf Abdullah 4013 amirul@usm.my
Hamady Dieng 3011 hamachan1@yahoo.com
Hasnah Md Jais 4009 mjhasnah@usm.my
Hideyuki Nagao 3522 nagaoh@usm.my
Latiffah Zakaria 3506 lfah@usm.my
Kamaruzaman Mohamed 4005 mkamar@usm.my
Shahrul Anuar Mohd. Sah 3524 sanuar@usm.my
Shaida Fariza Sulaiman 4056 shaida@usm.my
Tan Shau Hwai, Aileen 3508 aileen@usm.my
Uyub Abdul Manaf 4002 uyub@usm.my
Wan Maznah Wan Omar 3533 wmaznah@usm.my
Yahya Mat Arip 4013 ymarip@usm.my
SENIOR LECTURER
Ahmad Ramli Saad 3516 aramli@usm.my

Amir Shah Ruddin Md Sah 2717 amirshah@usm.my
Asyraf Mansor 3525 asyrafm@usm.my
Baharuddin Sulaiman 3526 baha@usm.my
Darlina Md. Naim 4056 darlinamdn@usm.my
184
Foong Swee Yeok 3511 foong_sy@yahoo.com
Khairun Yahya 3509/8852750 khairun@usm.my
Khaironizam Md. Zain 3531 khaironizam@usm.my
Hamdan bin Ahmad 3048 hamdana@usm.my
Mansor Mat Isa 3524 drmansor@usm.my
Mahadi Mohammad 5912 mahadi@usm.my
Mohamed Hifni Mohd. Baharuddin 3510 mhifniusm@yahoo.com
Nik Ahmad Irwan Izzaudin Nik Him 5127 nikirwan@usm.my
Nik Fadzly Nik Rosely 5127 nfadzly@usm.my
Nurul Salmi Abdul Latip 3510 salmi@usm.my
Rahmad Zakaria 3524 rahmadz@gmail.com
Rashidah Abdul Rahim 2450/4006 rshidah@usm.my
Sreeramanan Subramaniam 3528 sreeramanan@usm.my
Suhaila Abd. Hamid 2381 ahsuhaila@usm.my
Suriyati Mohamad 4006 suri@usm.my
Wan Fatma Zuharah Wan Musthapa 4153 wfatma@usm.my
Zary Shariman Yahaya 4001 zary@usm.my
LECTURER
Chew Bee Lynn 5926 bee_lynn@hotmail.com
Hasnuri Mat Hassan 5929 hasnurie@yahoo.com
Research Officer
Hasni Abu Hassan 2713 hasni@usm.my

Hassan Hj. Abdullah 3515 ahassan@usm.my
Hj. Hazli Hj. Abd Muid 3515 hazli@usm.my
Nazri Abdullah 3525 nazri@usm.my
Rosilawati Abdullah 2713 tie@usm.my
Siti Ruzainah Omar 3963 sruzai@usm.my
Zarina Mohd. Yassan 4010 zarina@usm.my
Zulkaflee Ali 2713 zulkafle@usm.my
SENIOR SCIENCE OFFICER
Khoo Kay Hock 4954 kkh@usm.my

Adanan Che Rus 4229 adnanrus@usm.my
SCIENCE OFFICERS
Roziana Mat Khairuddin 4661 roziana@usm.my

Siti Najmi Shuhadaa Bakar 3514 ctnajmi@usm.my
185
CHIEF SENIOR ASSISTANT
SCIENCE OFFICER
Mohd Kassim Abdul Razak 5133 kassimar@usm.my
SENIOR ASSISTANT SCIENCE

OFFICER
Hamizah Zulkurnain 4018 hamizahz@usm.my

Khalid Puteh 3532 junled@usm.my
Mohd Hadzri Abdullah 3532 amhadzri@usm.my
ASSISTANT SCIENCE
OFFICER
Abdul Malik Yahaya 4228 abdulmaliky@usm.my

Johari Othman 3502 emunit@usm.my
CHIEF LABORATORY
ASSISTANT
Adrian Kessler Oswald 3584 rp_bio@usm.my

Jamilah Afandi 3502 emunit@usm.my
Mohd Yusof Omar 3537 omyusof@usm.my
Mohd Rashid Othman 3507 omrashid@usm.my
SENIOR ADMINISTRATIVE
ASSISTANT
Jamaliah Ismail 3906 ijamaliah@usm.my
186
General Information
Career
The School of Biological Sciences is located at the main campus of Universiti Sains
Malaysia (USM), Penang. It is one of the three pioneering schools to be set up when
USM was established in 1969. Ever since then, it has grown rapidly to become an
outstanding research-intensive school, which now boasts the largest number of post-
graduate students in the university. Because of the presence of a large population of
graduate students, the undergraduates are naturally inspired to continue with postgraduate
studies. Every year, a significant number of undergraduates continue to pursue their
Masters and PhD. Those that choose to pursue their careers elsewhere are usually
recruited by pesticide and pest management industries, aquaculture industries, food
industries, electronics industries, biotechnology industries and medical devises industries.
In addition, various governmental and semi-governmental organizations and R&D centers
also hire a significant number of the graduates. These include Forest Research Institute of
Malaysia (FRIM), Federal Land Development Authority (FELDA), Malaysian Palm Oil
Board (MPOB), Institute for Medical Research (IMR) and many more.
Alumni
The graduates of the School of Biological Sciences are automatically entered to become
members of the growing family of USMs alumni, which to date amounting to some
100,000 members! Its mission is to mobilise resources and advance the USM alumni as
an innovative fraternity which nurtures its members and rallies its stakeholders to
contribute to the university and to society. For further details, please visit:
http://alo.usm.my/
Awards and Deans certificate
The graduating students from the School of Biological Sciences are considered for a
number of awards at both the university and the school levels. These awards are available
to outstanding students:
1. Cancellors Gold Medal Award - awarded to the best final year student in all fields.
2. Royal Education Award - awarded to the best student in all fields, by the Majlis
Raja-Raja Melayu.
3. USM Gold Medal Award, awarded to the best female final year student in all
fields., by Persatuan Wanita USM
4. USM Gold Medal Award, awarded to the best Bachelor of Science (Honours)
degree final year student, given by Tun Dato Seri Dr. Lim Chong Eu.
5. USM Gold Medal Award, awarded to the best Bachelor of Applied Science
(Honours) degree final year student, by Nestle Products Sdn. Bhd.
6. USM Gold Medal Award, awarded in memory of Professor E. Balasingham is to
the best final year student in the field of Biology.
7. USM Book Prize, awarded by Datuk Abdul Rahman Yaakub is to the best Bachelor
of Science (Honours) degree final year student.
187
In addition, at each semester, the students who achieved academic excellence will also be
awarded the Deans Certificate.
Clubs and Society
Bio Society (BioSoc) is a platform for students to interact with one another, as well as
with the academic, administrative and supporting staff. Led by the undergraduates, the
society is advised by a faculty member and the Dean. BioSoc regularly organizes
academic, non-academic, recreation and student development programmes that are
essential in creating versatile students and individuals. As a result of these initiatives, the
School of Biological Sciences Alumni Society was created to gather and reunite as
many former students and staff of the school. Bio Society motto Inspire Your Life is
timely as it is also involved with the community and schools through awareness
programmes on the potentials of biology as well as addressing the issues of sustainable
development.
Higher Education
A large number of students from the School of Biological Sciences pursue higher degrees
with us. We offer both full and part-time programmes leading to degrees of the Master of
Science and Doctor of Philosophy by research.
For further details please contact:

Deputy Dean (Research and Postgraduate Studies)
School of Biological Sciences
Universiti Sains Malaysia
11800 Minden
Pulau Pinang
Malaysia
Tel: 604-6533888 ext. 4174/4004

Fax: 604-6565125
For more information pertaining to postgraduate studies in USM, please visit:

http://www.ips.usm.my/
Industry and Community Network
The school reaches out to the local and international communities via active research and
academic collaborations. Locally, the School of Biological Sciences has very close
relationships with FRIM, Forest Department, Department of Agriculture, FELDA,
Fisheries Department, MACRES and SIRIM. Internationally, the school has student and
staff exchange programmes with world-class research institutions such as Universite
Henri Poincare (France), RIKEN (Japan), Purdue University (USA), Mississippi State
University (USA), University of Georgia (USA) and Kyoto University (Japan).
188
Facilities
As a research-intensive school driven by research-active staff, the School of Biological

Sciences is equipped with various cutting-edge facilities such as the Electron Microscopy.
This facility is used heavily by students and researchers from our school as well as from
other schools in USM and other universities in Malaysia.
In addition, the Electron Microcopy Unit has also been providing services to the
manufacturing industries in this region for the last 20 years particularly for Failure
Analysis, Quality Control, and R & D investigations. The facilities provided by the unit
include Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM), Scanning Electron Microscopy
(SEM), Energy Dispersive X-Ray Microanalysis (EDX), Light Microscopy (LM) and
Image Analysis (IA). The school has recently acquired an EF-TEM (Zeiss-Libra120) with
EELS, ESI and electron diffraction accessories.
DEGREE IN APPLIED SCIENCE PROGRAMME
Under the Applied Biology Programme, undergraduates may specialize in one of the
fields listed below:
Agrobiology
Aquatic Biology
Biotechnology
Environmental Biology
Biology and Management of Vectors and Parasites
CURRICULUM
A. CORE COURSES (70 Units)
The Core Courses component is made up of courses of level 100, 200 and 300. They
include the Basic Core courses (Teras Asas), the Compulsory Core courses (Teras
Wajib), the Required Core courses (Teras Perlu) and the Elective Core courses (Teras
Pilihan). Courses in the Basic Core and Compulsory Core groups are compulsory Level
100 courses where students must attain passing Grades. Level 200 and 300 courses are
courses from Required Core, Elective Core and Electives for a chosen specialization.
189
(i) YEAR I CORE COURSES (30 Units)
Level 100 core courses are offered by the various Science Schools, e.g. School of
Physics, Biological Sciences, Chemical Sciences and Mathematical Sciences. All
undergraduates of the School of Biological Sciences must enrol and attain passing grades
for these courses. Students must obtain a total of 30 units. The courses are as follows:
Year Semester Course Code Course Title Unit

Requirement
Basic Core [10 Units]
KOT 121/3 Organic Chemistry
I I & II MAA 101/4 * Calculus (for First Year 10
Science Students)
MAT 181/4 * Programming For Scientific
Application
Compulsory Core [20 Units]
BOI 101/3 Biodiversity
BOI 102/3 Ecology
I & II BOI 103/3 Cellular Biochemistry
BOI 104/3 Genetics
BOI 105/2 Biodiversity and Ecology
Practical
BOI 106/2 Cellular Biochemistry and 20
I & II
Genetics Practical
BOI 109/4 Biostatistics
* Students are allowed to enroll in either MAA 101/4 or MAT 181/4.
(ii) YEAR II AND III REQUIRED CORE COURSES (35 Units)
Required Core courses are those courses offered at Levels 200 and 300 that have been
identified according to each specialisation program namely Agrobiology, Aquatic
Biology, Environmental Biology, Biotechnology and Biology and Management of
Vectors and Parasites. Students must enrol in all the Required core courses that are
listed in their respective field of specialisation.
190
(B) FINAL YEAR PROJECT
All final year Biology students are given the option to register for a final year project of 8
units which spans over 2 semesters. At the end of the second semester, a thesis based on
the existing regulations and format must be submitted for examination.
Before a student is allowed to register for the final year project in their respective field of
specialisation, the student must have achieved these minimum cumulative unit
requirement.
Total overall unit 60 units

Total unit for Biology courses 30 units
Students who do not register for a final year project must substitute the 8 units with BOE
300/2 Special Topics in Biology (which carries 2 units), while the remaining 6 units are
fulfilled by taking courses in biological sciences that are suitable to his/her field of
specialisation and approved by the programme.
191
FIELD OF SPECIALISATION: AGROBIOLOGY
Objective
The Agrobiology programme encompasses the use of modern biological techniques in the
agricultural output system. The main objective of this programme is to explore various
approaches in the agriculture system to ensure optimum and economical plant health and
yield. Students learn basic entomology and the role of insects in agricultural systems, and
an introduction to plant pathology centered on an understanding of plant diseases, disease
mechanisms and pathogen interactions. Students are also equipped with basic knowledge
in insect pest management strategies to gain an insight to the development of plant disease
control methods and management strategies. The ultimate goal of the program is to be
able to handle problems related to plant productivity in the development of agriculture
based industry in the country.
Course Code Course Title Semester Course

Prerequisite
Required Core: Level 200 [15 Units]
BGT 211/4 Entomology I BOI 101/3 (S)
BGT 212/2 Entomology Practical I BGT 211/4 (C)
BOI 105/2 (S)
BGT 213/3 Plant Pathology II BOI 103/3 (S)
BGT 214/2 Basic Laboratory Course in Plant II BGT 213/3 (C)
Pathology BOI 106/2 (S)
BBT 213/4 Plant Physiology and Development II BOI 103/3 (S)
BGT 300/8 Project in Agrobiology I & II
BOE 300/2 Special Topics in Biology I or II
BBT 302/3 Economic Botany I BOI 101/3 (S)
BST 313/3 Ecology and Management of Weeds I BOI 102/3 (S)
BOI 105/2 (S)
Elective Core: [15 Units]
BGT 311/4 Plant Disease Management I BGT 213/3 (S)
BGT 312/2 Advanced Plant Pathology I BGT 214/2 (S)
Laboratory BGT 311/4 (S)
BGT 313/3 Agricultural, Forest and Stored II BGT 211/4 (S)
Product Entomology
BGT 314/4 Insect Pest Management and II BGT 211/4 (S)
Control
BBT 301/3 Plant Genetics I BOI 104/3 (S)
BOT 205/3 Microscopy and Histological II BOI 101/3 (S)
Techniques
BMT 217/3 Virology I BOI 101/3 (S)
192
Prerequisite
BMT 302/3 Environmental Microbiology II BMT 202/3 (S)
BMT 204/3 (S)
BST 202/3 Soil Science and Environment I BOI 102/3 (S)
BVT 313/4 Medical and Veterinary Parasitology I BVT 211/3 (S)
BZT 311/3 Biology of Vertebrate Pest Animals I BOI 101/3 (S)
Elective (4/20 Units)
Any biology course that supports the Agrobiology component.
(S) = Sequential (Course must be taken earlier)
(C) = Concurrent (Course can be taken earlier or concurrent)
FIELD OF SPECIALISATION: AQUATIC BIOLOGY
Objectives
The main objective of the aquatic biology specialisation is to expose students to the basic
principles of aquatic science. With the basic knowledge acquired in this thrust area,
students can then utilise it in applied fields. Students will be exposed to the structures and
functions of aquatic flora and fauna. They will also be exposed to basic ecological
aspects of various ecosystems and economics of management, utilization and
conservation of aquatic resources. The use of aquatic resources in agriculture and
fisheries together with culture techniques will also be discussed. Upon successful
completion of the programme, students are expected to have grasped the necessary
knowledge and skills to manage the utilization of aquatic resources together with the
proper use of aquatic resources for agricultural production. Students should then also be
able to carry out research in the field of aquatic sciences.
Course Code Course Title Semester Course Prerequisite

BAT 201/3 Limnology I BOI102/3 (S)
BAT 202/3 Oceanography I BOI102/3 (S)
BAT 213/4 Coastal and Marine Ecosystem II BOI102/3 (S)
BST 203/3 Population and Community II BOI102/3 (S)
Ecology
BOT 205/3 Microscopy and Histological II BOI101/3 (S)
Techniques
BAT 215/3 Ichthyology I BOI101/3 (S)
193
BAT 300/8 Project in Aquatic Biology I & II
BAT 311/3 Management of Aquatic II BAT 213/4 (S)
Ecosystems
BAT 302/3 Fisheries Management II BAT 205/3 (S)
BAT 313/4 Aquaculture I BOI 102/3 (S)
BST 201/3 Environmental Pollution I BOI 102/3 (S)
Any biology course that supports the Aquatic Biology component.
FIELD OF SPECIALISATION: ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY
Objectives
The Environmental Biology specialisation is structured to strengthen the knowledge and

understanding of the various concepts of ecology, function and interaction between the
abiotic and biotic components of various ecosystems. This will give a broad
understanding about the diversity together with structure and function of tropical
ecosystems, the importance of environmental protection and conservation of natural
resources. Students will also gain valuable exposure to various ecological methods
including EIA and GIS technology for environmental management and conservation of
natural resources.
Course Code Course Title Semester Course Prerequisite

BST 201/3 Environmental Pollution I BOI 102/3 (S)
BST 202/3 Soil Science and Environment I BOI 102/3 (S)
BST 203/3 Population and Community II BOI 102/3 (S)
Ecology
BST 204/3 Tropical Ecosystems II BOI 102/3 (S)
BST 300/8 Project in Environmental Biology I & II
BST 301/3 Environmental Management II BST 201/3 (S)
BST 304/3 Wildlife Ecology and II BST 203/3 (S)
Management
194
BST 312/3 Conservation Ecology and I BST 204/3 (S)
Natural Resources
BST 313/3 Ecology and Management of I BOI 102/3 (S)
Weeds BOI 105/2 (S)
BAT 201/3 Limnology I BOI 102/3 (S)
BAT 202/3 Oceanography I BOI 102/3 (S)
BAT 311/3 Management of Aquatic II BAT 213/3 (S)
Ecosystems
BBT 302/3 Economic Botany I BOI 101/3 (S)
Any biology course that supports the Environmental Biology component.
FIELD OF SPECIALISATION: BIOTECHNOLOGY
Objectives
Biotechnology, an area of applied biology, involves the practical application of cells or

their components in the manufacturing and service industries. Biotechnology is
multidisciplinary, involving the integration of knowledge from microbiology,
biochemistry, genetics, molecular biology, chemistry as well as chemical and process
engineering.
The programme offered, aims to develop in the students a sound understanding of cellular
biology involving microbiology, biochemistry, genetics, molecular biology and some
chemical engineering principles.
The programme begins with core courses in the sciences especially biology, to build a
strong foundation, which is then followed by an introduction to the various techniques
employed in the biotechnology industry and several key aspects of microbiology. This is
followed by several advanced topics of biotechnology that cover animal and plant cell
culture, chemical engineering principles, bioinformatics and an in-deepth treatment of
genetic engineering.
195
Prerequisite
BTT 202/3 Techniques In Biotechnology I* & II BOI 103/4 (S)
BMT 202/3 Mycology I BOI 101/3 (S)
BMT 203/3 Microbial Genetics II BOI 104/3 (S)
BMT 204/3 Bacteriology I BOI 101/3 (S)
BMT 205/3 Immunology II BOI 103/3 (S)
BMT 206/3 Physiology and Nutrition of II BOI 103/3 (S)
Microbes
BMT 217/3 Virology I BOI 101/3 (S)
BBT 301/3 Plant Genetics I BOI 104/3 (S)
BTT 300/8 Project In Biotechnology I & II
BTT 301/3 Tissue Culture Technology I BMT 205/3 (S)
BTT 302/3 Fermentation Technology II BMT 206/3 (S)
BTT 303/3 Biochemical Engineering II BMT 206/3 (S),
BTT 202/3 (S)
BTT 304/3 Genetic Engineering I BMT 203/3 (S)
Any biology course that supports the Biotechnology component.
* For Biotechnology students only.
FIELD OF SPECIALISATION: BIOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT OF VECTORS

AND PARASITES
Objectives
Even in the midst of modernization, Malaysia continues to be affected by the vector-borne

diseases like malaria, filariasis, dengue/haemorrhagic dengue and other diseases. These
issues have brought high rate of illness and mortality to many tropical nations. The field
of Biology and Management of Vectors and Parasites was initiated with the objective of
increasing the knowledge and understanding of the biology of insect vectors such as
mosquitoes and house-flies, and their relationships with the disease parasites or pathogens
that they transmit. In this thrust area, the students are exposed to the structure and
function, life history, ecology and vector and parasite behaviour that will assist in the
understanding of disease epidemiology as well as various management strategies. In
addition, students specializing in the field will also learn the biology, ecology, behaviour
and management of important urban and industrial insect pests such as cockroaches, pest
ants, termites, bed bugs and stored product insects that are most relevant to the pest
management industry.
196
Course Course Title Semester Course
Code Prerequisite
BVT 211/3 Biology of Vectors and Parasites II BOI 101/3 (S)
BVT 212/2 Basic Parasitology Practicals II BOI 105/2 (S)
BGT 211/4 Entomology I BOI 101/3 (S)
BGT 212/2 Entomology Practical I BOI 105/2 (S)
BVT 300/8 Project in Biology and Management of I & II
Vectors and Parasites
BVT 311/4 Medical and Urban Entomology I BVT 211/3 (S),
BGT 211/4 (S)
BVT 312/2 Practicals on Vectors and Urban Pests I BGT 212/2 (S)
BVT 313/4 Medical and Veterinary Parasitology I BVT 211/3 (S)
BVT 314/2 Advanced Practicals in Parasitology II BVT 212/3 (S)
BGT 314/4 Insect Pest Management and Control II BVT 211/3 (S),
BGT 211/4 (S)
BMT 205/3 Immunology II BOI 103/3 (S)
BOT 205/3 Microscopy and Histological Techniques II BOI 101/3 (S)
BOE 201/3 Biological Instrumentation I BOI 103/3 (S)
BST 203/3 Population and Community Ecology II BOI 102/3 (S)
BST 301/3 Environmental Management II BST 201/3 (S)
BZT 211/3 Invertebrate Zoology I BOI 101/3 (S)
BZT 212/3 Vertebrate Zoology I BOI 101/3 (S)
BZT 213/3 Animal Behaviour II BOI 101/3 (S)
BZT 211/3 (C)
BZT 212/3 (C)
BZT 214/3 Animal Physiology I BOI 103/3 (S)
BZT 311/3 Biology of Vertebrate Pest Animals I BZT 212/3 (C)
BOI 105/2 (S)
Elective (4/20 Unit)
Any biology course that supports the Biology and Management of Vectors and Parasites
component.
(C) = Concurrent (Course can be taken earlier or concurrent)
197
Programme Outcomes
Upon completion of the programme, students will be able to:
Knowledge
Acquire knowledge and understand the concepts of applied biology.
Apply knowledge to solve problems related to applied biology
Practical Skills
Plan and execute experiments according to scientific methods.
Use modern instrumentation and procedures as well as classical techniques, to design
and conduct experiments and to properly record the results of experiments.
Perform laboratory techniques safety, accurately and effectively.
Scientific Methods Critical Thinking & Problem Solving Skills

Interpret data and express the results in clearly written laboratory reports and in oral
presentations.
Identify, analyse and solve problems in applied biology by using systematic methods.
Communication Skills
Express ideas in an informed and effective manner, articulate and develop a sustained
argument, both orally and in writing.
Interpret data and communicate the results to biologists and non-biologists.
Social Skills, Team Working and Responsibility

Demonstrate the ability to work effective with peers and in teams.
Execute the tasks given responsibly.
Perform multi-tasking and function in multidisciplinary teams and communicate
effectively.
Professionalism, Humanities Value, Attitudes, Ethics

Demonstrate commitment to ethical issues.
Compile, analyse and interpret data honestly and ethically.
Develop interest, curiosity, persistence, eagerness and confidence as applied
biologist.
Life Long Learning & Information Management

Use knowledge gained for self development and continuous improvement.
Demonstrate the ability to use various retrieval methods to obtain information on
issues related to biology.
Identify the relationship between biology and other disciplines, the applications and
impact of applied biology in society.
Managerial & Entrepreneurial Skills

Apply basic knowledge and principles of management and entrepreneurship related
to applied biology field.
198
Leadership Skills
Demonstrate the ability to lead/facilitate teams.
SYNOPSIS OF BIOLOGY COURSES
BOI 101/3: Biodiversity
This course covers elements of biodiversity involving genes, species and ecosystem.
Emphasis will be on biological diversity including discussion on characteristics of various
biological groups. The students will also be exposed to the problems of loss of species,
habitat and ecosystem and the importance of biodiversity conservation as well as efforts
taken by the government in biodiversity conservation. Discussion will also include topics
on legislations and international agreements for the protection of biodiversity and will end
with some discussion on biodiversity hotspots.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
Have basic knowledge on the species diversity for plant, microorganisms and animals
related to the economic values, ecological importance and conservation.
Be equip with practical skills involve in the identification of a diversity of plants,
microbes and animals based on their distinguishing features.
Understand the basic concept in biodiversity and the need to preserve it.
Develop awareness about the rich biodiversity especially in the tropical rain forest.
Since specimens used in the lab are collected from the local environment either in its
preserved form or fresh forms, the students are expected to familiarize themselves
with the importance of preserving biodiversity.
BOI 102/3: Ecology
Basic ecological concepts such as ecosystem, community, population will be taught. The
basic components, structures and processes occur in the ecosystem will be discussed.
Functional aspects of ecosystems including factors controlling distribution of organisms,
primary and secondary production and succession will also be discussed. Field work
techniques will be included. As ecology is mainly based on field experiences, therefore
students will be exposed to examples of field experiments where data gathering and
observation will be included.
Learning Outcomes

Demonstrate an understanding of the basic components, structures and processes
occur in the ecosystems.
Determine the limiting factor that characterizes the ecosystems.
Demonstrate an understanding of the contribution of ecological principles to
conservation.
199
BOI 103/3: Cellular Biochemistry
This course discusses the cell in terms of its basic structure, organelles and their function.
It also includes building blocks of macromolecules such as amino acids, fatty acids and
monosaccharides. This leads to discussions on the structure and function of
macromolecules e.g. proteins, fats, carbohydrates and nucleic acids. The biochemical
processes that occur in the cell such as enzymes as catalysts, carbohydrate, fat and protein
metabolism, metabolic regulation and biosynthesis of macromolecules are also discussed.
At the end of this course, students should be able to differentiate between prokaryote and
eukaryote as well as name the organelles and their functions. In addition, students should
be able to identify the chemical characteristics all the major biological macromolecules
and describe their structures and functions.
Learning Outcomes
Differentiate between prokaryote and eukaryote as well as name the organelles and
their functions.
Identify the chemical characteristics of all the major biological macromelecules and
describe their structures and functions.
Describe the structure and mechanisms of enzymes.
Describe the mechanisms and regulation of the major metabolic pathways in a living
cell.
BOI 104/3: Genetics
The aim of this course is to introduce the basic principles of genetics which has emerged
to be an important field in the understanding of various aspects of biology. This course
begins with discussions on the basic concepts of genetics from inheritance pattern
according to Mendels Law as well as non-Mendelian inheritance. Topics to be discussed
also include sex linkage, cytoplasmic and maternal inheritance, mapping and gene order
determination, mutation, types of mutants and their applications and gene action and its
interaction. Population genetics dealing with gene transmission through space and time
will be covered. The structure and function of DNA and RNA as genetic materials will
also be presented. This includes chromosome organisation, replisome and DNA
replication, gene expression and its regulation and RNA processing in eucaryotes.
Interesting discussion regarding gene regulation in procaryotes will also be done. This
course will also cover the basic concepts of genetic engineering and recombinant DNA
technology and their applications in industry, medicine and agriculture. Related ethical
and moral issues concerning modern genetics will be discussed.
200
Learning Outcomes
Predict the outcome of crosses and differentiate between Mendelian and non-
Mendelian inheritance, and also the extranuclear inheritance.
Show how DNA and RNA were proven to be the genetic materials and know the
composition and structures of DNA, RNA and chromosome organization.
Understand the concept of central dogma which encompasses replication,
transcription, translation and reverse transcription.
Know the processes of gene expression and gene regulations (lac and trp operons),
Know various types of mutation, their causes and effects on life.
BOI 105/2: Biodiversity and Ecology Practical
Students will experience biodiversity principles and concepts in the field. Introduction to
biodiversity from species and ecosystem perspectives will be strengthened by hands-on
approach of these concepts.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course student will be able to:
Familiarize field and laboratory research methods and get hands on used of scientific
equipments.
Organize field and laboratory research methods.
Familiarize with various field and laboratory procedures.
Gain knowledge and exposure on field and laboratory working conditions.
BOI 106/2: Cellular Biochemistry and Genetics Practical
Students will learn basic practical methods and techniques in biochemistry and genetics.
Students will be introduced to basic practical principles and concepts as well as
familiarise themselves with the use of standard equipment in the field of biochemistry and
genetics. This can help consolidate their skills and expertise in both fields. Students will
also get opportunities to learn other relevant practical methods and techniques that can
assist them in their understanding of these fields.
Learning Outcomes
Determine membrane transport processes such as permeation, osmosis as well as

plasmolysis.
201
Determine the factors that affect enzyme activity.
Understand Mendelian genetics.
Construct genetic map.
Understand gene interaction and determine karyotype analysis.
BOI 109/4: Biostatistics
The course includes a discussion on variability in biological data; probability distribution

for binomial, Poisson and normal distributions. Basic training on the use of statistics for
data analysis in biological research will be given. Topics to be discussed include
variability of biological data, hypothesis testing (including non-parametric), as well as
correlation and regression. It is hoped that after going through this course, students will
have a better idea on how to properly present their data and will be able to analyse their
data using the most appropriate statistical method/s in order to make a good inference and
conclusion on their research results. Hypothesis testing for one and two samples,
including parametric and non-parametric methods; correlation and regression. The second
part of this course will discuss sampling and sample size (for one and two samples); one
and two way analysis of variance; experimental design - randomised complete block,
Latin square; treatment designs such as factorial experiments; special techniques in
biology.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of this course, students should be able to:
Understand on how to present data that are produced from their studies.
Appropriately select statistical procedure/s to analyse their data in order to make
conclusions on their studies.
BAT 201/3: Limnology
Limnology is the study of fresh or saline waters contained within continental boundaries,
including lakes, ponds, reservoirs, streams, rivers, wetlands and estuaries. Limnology
includes standing and running water, both salt and fresh, as long as the body of water is
not oceanic. Brackish waters in estuaries also constitute important areas of limnological
investigation. Emphasis will be given on the characteristics of these inland water bodies,
the biotic community and the dynamic activities within this environment. Both the
physical and chemical aspects of these aquatic ecosystems will be discussed.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course the students should be able to:
Understand the functional relationships and productivity of freshwater biotic

communities as they are affected by the dynamics of physical, chemical and biotic
environmental parameters
202
BAT 202/3: Oceanography
This course encompasses all four aspects of oceanography geological, chemical,

physical and biological oceanography. Lectures will start with discussions on the
formation of the ocean basins, sliding of continents and the deep-sea floor. Other topics
will include the cycle of elements and materials in the marine systems and the
introduction to water flow phenomena such as tides, waves and ocean currents.
Biological oceanography will include discussion on organisms that inhabit the marine
environment and marine productivity. Sampling techniques, use of oceanographic
equipment and seawater analysis will be taught during laboratory classes. Field studies to
provide students exposure to experimental design, sampling methods and analysis in
oceanography will be conducted.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course the students will be able to :
Define various aspects of the oceans including its geology, chemical contents,
biology and biological processes as well as its physical features, including tides,
waves and currents.
Use various instruments associated with oceanographic research and be able to
conduct simple field studies.
Carry out some analysis particularly on water quality.
BAT 213/4 : Marine and Coastal Ecosystem
The course introduces marine and coastal ecosystems. This includes the sandy beaches,
rocky shores, coral reefs, mangroves, estuaries and the open sea. Emphasis will be given
on the processes and dynamics of these ecosystems. The relationship of these systems to
other relevant ecosystems will be studied. The economic importance of each ecosystem
will be discussed.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be able to :
Have knowledge and understanding about important marine ecosystems and

processes.
Appreciate historical impacts of past human activities on marine ecosystems.
Be aware of how different fauna and flora adapt themselves in different ecosystems,
which are currently threatened by humans and what options exist for dealing with
these problems.
203
BAT 215/3: Ichthyology
This course will discuss various aspects of the biology, taxonomy, evolution and ecology
of fish. Emphasis will be given on aspects of adaptation for living in the aquatic habitat.
Such aspects including anatomy, and external morphology, physiology, respiratory and
circulatory systems, feeding and digestion, excretion and osmotic control, nerves and
sensory organs, muscle and movement, reproduction and development of larvae, and also
pattern of behaviour. The economic importance, zoogeography, ecology and life history
of a few species of fish will be highlighted.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the biology, taxonomy, evolution and ecology of fish.

Understand the morphology, anatomy and roles and function of structures and organs
and their adaptation to the environment.
Understand the behaviour of fish reproduction, feeding, development and growth in
relation to environmental conditions.
Identify the fish species in the Lab and in the field.
Understand the importance of fish biology for stock assessment and management.
BAT 300/8 : Project in Aquatic Biology
A final year research project that aims to expose students to research methods for solving
various scientific questions related to the Aquatic Biology sciences. At the end of this
course, students are able to carry out scientific research in aquatic biology and present
their research work in a written thesis and scientific oral presentations.
Learning Outcomes
Carry out proper and well planned scientific research and have the ability to solve
problems related to the Aquatic Sciences.
Acquire technical skills and knowledge in various research areas of Aquatic Biology.
Apply recent techniques and methodologies in the course of conducting research in
various areas of Aquatic Biology.
Learn professionalism and high ethics in the working environment.
Initiate creative and pro-active thinking, improve communication skills, learn to write
scientific reports and to correctly handle scientific data in research.
BAT 311/3: Management of Aquatic Ecosystems
In this course students will be introduced to various types of aquatic pollution, their
causes and methods of pollution abatement and prevention. The types of pollution
discussed will include those by heavy metals, organic wastes, natural pollutions, and other
204
toxic wastes. The course also includes interactions and conservation of the aquatic
environment including the riparian, limnological, marine and coastal systems. Aspects of
integrated aquatic system management as well as case studies involving local examples
will be discussed.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the holistic interactions between land and water.

Characterize different types of water pollution, including causes, effects and their
control.
Recognize the basics of integrating strategies and approaches in management options.
BAT 302/3: Fisheries Management
This course encompasses the freshwater (inland fishery and paddy field fishery) and
marine fishery (capture fishery) in Malaysia. The fisheries principles and methods used in
Malaysia will be discussed in relation to the sustainable exploitation of marine fishery
resources. The principle of ecosystem approach in fishery management is also
emphasized. The fishery law and administration for conservation and its management are
also discussed. The course also includes the fishery industries in term of fishery products,
models and marketing strategies.
Learning Outcomes
Distinguish between inland and marine capture fishery resources and type of gears
and methods used for exploitation.
Understand the effect of fish population size and catch to exploitation of fishery
resources.
Understand the concept and application of fish stock assessment for fisheries
management.
Interlink the fish population dynamics for fisheries management.
Understand and utilise laws and regulations on conservation and management of the
fishery resources.
BAT 313/4: Aquaculture
This course introduces the culture principles of commercially important aquatic

organisms of freshwater, brakishwater and marine origins. Case studies involving
examples from all over the world with a focus on Asian tropical aquaculture will be
discussed. The biology of cultured species, the choice of culture sites, culture systems,
management strategies, disease prevention, breeding, nutrition as well as the economics
of aquaculture will be discussed. Field visits to aquaculture sites will be an important
component of this course.
205
Learning Outcomes
Have a basic understanding of the local and global aquaculture industry.

Acquire a fundamental knowledge in the management and husbandry techniques
related to the culture of various aquatic animals and plants of commerical
importance.
Have practical knowledge on how to successfully manage an aquaculture farm.
Acquire critical thinking skills in discussing various current and controversial issues
affecting the global aquaculture industry.
Have the ability to write scientific reports and give effective scientific oral
presentations on aquaculture-related topics.
BGT 211/4: Entomology
This course looks into insects from 5 fundamental perspectives: structure and function,
insects and its environment, insects as a unit and its diversity, applied entomology, and
modern molecular approach. The subjects covered include: the integument system,
nervous systems, glands and muscles, breeding and development, sensory mechanisms,
movement and behaviour. Communication between insects and its biotic and abiotic
environment will also be discussed. In addition, students will be exposed to the methods
and principles of taxonomy and the evolution of the Insecta class. This course will also
discuss the advantages and disadvantages of insects, conservation of biodiversity, control
of insects, and molecular entomology.
Learning Outcomes
Apply knowledge of entomology to identify insect in field work.

Use practical skills, and expert in current insect classification technique.
Understand social skill and responsible to insect identification, evolution and insect
modification in field of forensic.
Perform ethically, professionally and caring in several situations particularly in
agriculture to increase product and economy.
Communicate, to be leaders and work in teams to identify, analyse, and to solve
problems pertaining insect ecology, behaviour, control of insect which harmful to
man and farm animals and also the importance of pollination.
206
BGT 212/2: Entomology Practical
Students will dissect various insects to see different structures of each system.
Classification and insect systematics will be the main topic of the course. Students are
required to initiate an insect collection with diversity at order and family levels. Field
trips will enhance the learning experience about insects in the natural environment.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students:
Are equipped with knowledge on insect morphology useful for identification of main
groups of insects in Malaysia.
Will be able to identify major groups of insects to families by sight as well as using
identification keys.
BGT 213/3: Plant Pathology
The course introduce students to the concept of disease as an interaction between the
pathogen and host under influence of environmental factors, definition of inoculum
potential, pathogenicity and virulence, mechanisms of pathogen attack and entry into host
tissue, mechanisms by which plants resist disease and the process of pathogenesis. Plant
pathogens such as fungi, virus, viroid, actinomycete, bacteria, mycoplasma and nematode
will be studied with emphasis to their life cycles and disease cycles, production, survival
and dispersal of inoculum.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the basic concept of plant pathology.

Prepare the applied research of plant pathology.
BGT 214/2: Basic Laboratory Course in Plant Pathology
This course introduces students to research methods in plant pathology. It includes topics
such as preparation of media and nutrient solutions, sterilization and disinfection,
isolation and culture of pathogens, preservation and maintenance of plant pathogens,
collection and preservation of diseased specimens, principles of disease determination,
inoculation methods, research methodology in the plant house and the field, experimental
design, micrometry, photography and microphotography, plant disease diagnosis, library
research and writing for publication, principles and methods of disease assessment and
crop loss.
207
Learning Outcomes
Understand principles of disease determination and inoculation methods.

Understand research methodology in plant house and the field.
Understand experimental design, microscopy, micrometry, plant disease diagnosis
and library research.
BGT 300/8: Project in Agrobiology
A final year research project aims to expose the students to research methods for solving
proposed problems. The results of the project will be presented in a seminar and a thesis
at the end of the year.
Learning Outcomes
Conduct independent scientific research in the field of Agrobiology.

Carry out literature searches in relation to the proposed research project.
Deliver effective scientific presentation both in writing and oral presentation.
BGT 311/4: Plant Disease Management
This course discusses various principles of plant protection and control methods and their
effectiveness, including chemical controls, biological and cultural control, the use of
resistant cultivars and control through legislation. Integrated control and application of
biotechnology in plant pathology will also be discussed. This course will conclude with a
discussion on selected important diseases and pathogens in the tropics.
Learning Outcomes
Apply principles of plant protection and various control methods in integrated plant
disease management.
Apply biotechnology and molecular techniques in integrated plant disease
management.
Understand important plant diseases and pathogens in the tropics.
BGT 312/2: Advanced Plant Pathology Laboratory
Exposure to experiments pertaining to control of plant diseases using chemical, cultural

and biological methods. Visits to research stations to observe disease control
implementation in the field.
208
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be :
Equipt with knowledge on various plant disease control methods such as chemical
and biological methods.
Exposed to experiments on integrated plant disease management conducted in the
field.
Exposed to learning on disease control method in agriculture research station.
BGT 313/3: Agriculture, Forest and Stored Product Entomology
The course will focus on the insects of economic importance to agriculture, forestry and
stored products in Malaysia. The roles of insects on crop production, stored products and
quality of forest products will be discussed. Emphasis will be given on major insect pests.
Pests of cocoa, rice, coconut, oil palms, rubber, vegetables, fruits, sugar cane and coffee
will be studied. The ecological roles of insects in natural forest, agro forests and
plantation forests and forest products will be discussed. The unique ecosystem of stored
products and the roles of insect pests which cause the damage will be studied.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be :
Equipped with knowledge on common pests on crops or forest trees/products and

stored products.
Equipped with tools on dealing with the pests and how to manage or control them.
BGT 314/4: Insect Pest Management and Control
This course explores the factors affecting insect population survivorship, and various
insect management strategies such as chemical, physical, biological, cultural, as well as
genetic, plant resistance and quarantine methods. In chemical control section, mode of
action of various insecticide groups, semiochemicals, insect growth regulators,
toxicology, physiology, formulation technology, resistance, pollution and
biomagnification due to insecticidal usage will be discussed. Integrations between various
control strategies against insect pests, and their suitability from economical, ecological
and safety aspects against non-target organisms will also be emphasised.
Learning Outcomes
Understand and appreciate various underlying ecological concepts behind insect pest
management and the importance of understanding the biological principles of the
targeted organisms when managing them.
Apply these principles into solving pest management issues.
209
BST 201/3: Environmental Pollution
This course covers the origin of various types of pollutants that are found in the aquatic,
terrestrial and atmospheric environment. Noise pollution, solid wastes, radioactive wastes
and toxic and hazardous residues and their effects on the biota and man will be examined.
The course will conclude with a discussion on the principles and implementation of
pollution control and environmental monitoring. The main objective of this course is to
expose students on various issues pertaining to environmental pollution. Although global
issues will be discussed, emphasis will be on local problems. Discussions will involve
kinds of pollutants that are received by the aquatic and terrestrial environment as well as
air and noise pollution. Sources of various kinds of pollutants such as industrial
discharges, municipal wastes, radioactive and other hazardous wastes and their impacts
on human health & environment integrity will also be discussed. The course will end with
a look at the existing legislation as well as principle of control strategies and
environmental monitoring and to assess their effectiveness in protecting the environment.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the kinds of main pollutants, their sources and their effects on the
environment and living organisms.
Understand the existing legislation, particularly in Malaysia, that can be used to
overcome environmental pollution.
Understand the management and control efforts carried out by the Malaysian
Department of Environment and improvement suggestions.
BST 202/3: Soil Science and Environment
The aim of this course is for students to understand the basic chemical, physical and
biological principles of soils. The students will be able to relate the principles of soil
science to ecological systems, agricultural production, world food needs, engineering uses
of soils and waste disposal. Soils are complex biogeochemical materials on which plants
may grow. The soils have the structural and biological properties that distinguish soils
from rocks and sediments. Soil supports dynamic ecological systems and provides plants
with support, water, nutrients and air. Soil can support all ecosystems on land including
large populations of microorganisms that recycle the materials of life, providing the entire
human population with food, fiber, water and building materials, and sites for
construction and waste disposal. Soil also plays an important role in carbon sequestration
and prevention of global warming. Understanding soil and managing it well is essential to
human welfare.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the basic chemical, physical and biological properties of soils.
210
Have basic knowledge on soil functions as affected by the environment with special
emphasis on human population activities.
Identify the source of problems related to soils and how to draw potential steps to
remedy the situations.
Develop social skills, leadership abilities, communication skills and team work skills
through group laboratory practicums.
BST 203/3: Population and Community Ecology
Population Ecology and Community is developed to introduce and expose students to

population and community based partly on mathematical approaches. Unique ecological
characteristics acquired by a population or community will be discussed. The community
distributions are mainly based on multivariate analysis. The first part will focus on habitat
distributions based on the vegetation patterns; random, uniform and change. The part
involves basic population parameters for single species. This includes density, degree of
survival, biotic capability, age distribution and life tables. Types of relationships between
populations like neutralism, cooperation, mutualism, comensalism, predation, and
ecological niches as well as principles of competitive exclusion will be discussed. The
third part touches upon the basic characteristics of a natural community including a
number of important concepts like form and structure of terrestrial communities,
dominance, species diversity and community succession.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the basic and advance principles of population ecology and community
ecology.
Apply ecological knowledge in the environmental projects.
Understand the concept of species richness, species diversity and distribution.
Understand the community distribution and vegetation patterns.
BST 204/3: Tropical Ecosystems
This course provides an overview to tropical ecosystems and ecology. The main themes
revolve around key concepts and characteristics of terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems of
the tropics with emphasis on Malaysia. Approach to the topics begins with an introduction
to tropical environment and its high biodiversity followed by various ecosystems found in
Malaysia. The focus will be on the ecology, processes and interactions of biotic and
abiotic elements in tropical rain forest, mangrove, inland water bodies, marine and coral
reef ecosystems. Current and pressing issues on humankinds impact on these ecosystems
locally as well as globally will also be discussed with coverage on ecological principles
for their conservation. Fieldwork, with mini projects, is an important part of this course to
clarify ecological concepts.
211
Learning Outcomes
Understand characteristics of various tropical ecosystems and their diversity

including ecosystem processes involved.
Apply theoretical knowledge to hands-on fieldwork with practices in the field.
BST 300/8: Project in Environmental Biology
A final year research project that aims to expose students to research methods for solving
a proposed research problem. At the end of this course, students will be able to carry out
scientific research in environmental biology and present their research work in written
thesis and oral presentations.
Learning Outcomes
Carry out proper and well planned scientific research and in solving environmental-
related problems.
Acquire skill and knowledge for future studies in environmental biology
related areas.
Apply current techniques and methods in the field of environmental biology.
Apply professionalism and high ethical standards in the working environment.
Initiate creative thinking, improve communication skills, learn report writing skills
and analyse scientific data in research.
BST 301/3: Environmental Management
This is an advanced course in environmental science and management, thus requires

students to have prerequisite fundamentals of second year environmental biology/aquatic
biology courses. The course is developed to introduce environmental management within
the context of sustainability. The concept of sustainability is heavily emphasized
throughout the course content in many forms and applications. Topics focus on integrated
management of potential impacts to the environment during development activities and
their mitigation measures. These concepts are presented in diverse topics in land use
planning and Integrated River Basin Management (IRBM). Discussion also covers
management of protected areas, various methods in Integrated Waste Management
(IWM), approaches and processes in Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) operated
in the context of Malaysia. The role and importance of stakeholders, legislation, the
media and environmental education in the community are further emphasised. Other
important components of this course are field visits, a mini-project on current-issue
problems and assignments.
212
Learning Outcomes
Understand concept of sustainability and its applications in human-environment

interactions.
Have good knowledge of applications in environmental assessment techniques.
Provide critical views of best practices and enhanced decision-making skills in
managing environmental issues.
BST 304/3: Wildlife Ecology and Management
The purpose of this course is to increase understanding about the ecology and
management of wildlife in tropical areas especially Malaysia. Other than ecological
aspects based on the whole ecosystem, dinamics and regulation of species and of
populations will be considered. This course will also consider management techniques for
wildlife in Malaysia. Field work is an important component that will expose students to
natural settings and techniques for field studies.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, students will be:
Fluent in the terminology of wildlife biology, wildlife management, conservation

biology and general biology.
Familiar with problem solving skill and quantitative approaches to wildlife biology.
Exhibit effective oral and written communicative skills.
Acquire enough knowledge to further or continues their education at graduate level.
BST 312/3: Conservation Ecology and Natural Resources
The course will emphasize on basic conservation ecology on all species and natural
ecosystem of the world in general and focus will be given for Malaysia. Specific
examples will be discussed. Discussion on endangered species and ecosystems, including
factors involved in the process. Roles of natural conservation areas and national parks for
species and natural ecosystem conservation will also be discussed. Aspects on species or
ecosystem protection under conservation acts and regulations and conservation strategic
action plan at Malaysian and global levels will be discussed.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the important aspects of conservation ecology.

Understand the important and more critically the wise use of world natural resources.
Understand the ecosystem protection under conservation acts and regulations.
213
Understand the strategic action plan at Malaysian and global levels in term of the
sustainability of natural resources
BST 313/3: Ecology and Management of Weeds
In this course, the ecological-management perspective of weeds is discussed. It is crucial

to understand the role of fundamental ecological concepts, especially the weed-crop
relationship to be manipulated for an effective weed management, so that growth of the
crop is favored over that of the weeds. Biological and ecological aspects of weeds need to
be studied in order to control and manage weed populations to maintain or improve yield
of desirable plant species, especially in agroecosystems. Herbicides and their use as an
important aspect of modern weed management are also addressed.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of this course, students should be able to understand:
The types and distribution of weed species.

The degree of weed infestation.
The control and management of weeds in the agro ecosystems.
BMT 202/3: Mycology
The course provides basic knowledge on various aspects of fungi. These include topics
such as fungal existence, habitat, and mode of life, general characteristics of fungi, its
origin and phylogeny, methods in fungal nomenclature and classification, specific features
and examples from various fungal groups. Other topics include the economic importance
of fungi such as alcohol fermentation and fungal application in industries, fungi as food
and mushroom cultures. Medically important fungi, fungi as food spoilage agent, spoilage
of timber products and plant pathogens will also be discussed.
Learning Outcomes
Distinguish the characteristics and basic structures of true fungi and fungal-like
organisms.
Differentiate among the microfungi, macrofungi, unicellular fungi and fungal-like
organisms.
Distinguish the phyla of true fungi and fungal-like organism.
Differentiate various fungi life-styles which related to their role in the ecosystem and
envionments.
Identify the economic importance of fungi in food industry, medicine, manufacturing
and as plant pathogens.
214
BMT 203/3: Microbial Genetics
This course involves the discussion on bacterial and viral chromosomes; gene transfer in
bacteria such as transformation, transduction (general, specific and F-duction) and
conjugation (mating type, zygote forming kinetics, chromosome replication, F element,
HFr, chromosomal transfer and analysis); characteristics and importance of plasmids,
episome and transposon. Recombination (by general, specific sites, recombinant model,
DNA hybrids, exchange of genes); gene regulation (operon concept, lactose operon,
tryptophane operon, and attenuation); mutagenesis and mutant (mutagenesis agent, types
of mutants and in situ mutagenesis); bacteriophage as genetic system (transfection,
lysogeny and lysis cycle); fungal and yeast genetics.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the principles of operons and gene regulation using the bacteriophage, lactose
and tryptophan operons as examples.
BMT 204/3: Bacteriology
The course will cover in depth discussion on bacteria in aspects of systematics of archaea
and Gram negative bacteria, Gram positive bacteria, abnormal bacteria and filament-like
Gram positive bacteria and morphologically complex bacteria. Bacterial and archaeal
systematics will cover classification, taxonomy, nomenclature, identification, phylogeny
and concept of species and numerical taxonomy. Students will also learn the base
composition of nucleic acid, hybridization and amino acid sequencing as other
approaches in the taxonomy. This particular aspect will enable examination of various
characteristics of bacteria and archaea to determine how these characteristics affect their
roles in the daily life of mankind.
Learning Outcomes
Relate the functions or importance of archaeal and bacterial fine structures to their
chemical constituents.
Strategize the enrichment, isolation and maintenance of some important archaea and
bacteria.
Describe the basis for characterization of archaea and bacteria.
Relate their characteristics to economic importance.
BMT 205/3: Immunology
This course covers the principles and basic concepts of immunology. The areas to be
studied include the historical development and scope of immunology, natural immunity,
acquired immunity and the complement system, antigen and antibody, antigen and
antibody interaction, fundamentals of cellular immunity responses, hypersensitivity
215
(allergy) immediate type and late type, graft immunity, autoimmunity and immunity
against cancer.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the basic concepts of immunology and apply the knowledge in infection
and protective immunity.
Understand the basic concepts of immune disorders.
Understand and apply the knowledge in immuno-diagnostic tests.
BMT 206/3: Physiology and Nutrition of Microbes
The course discusses the processes that take place in the development of microorganisms
such as growth, microbial cell cycle, effect of environmental factors on growth, growth
kinetics and energetics, transport model and types of transport in aerobes and anaerobes
and photosynthesis, energy transduction energy source and carbon framework,
autotrophy and heterotrophy, anaerobic, aerobic and photosynthetic pathways.
Identification of metabolic pathways, carbon equilibrium and redox in fermentation,
methylotrophy, microbial electron transport system, coupling of electron transport with
phosphorylation, adaptation of microorganisms in environment, biomolecules and its
regulation nucleic acid, protein, carbohydrates and lipids, synthesis and construction of
cell membrane and cell wall and enzyme and coenzyme regulation will be discussed.
Learning Outcomes
Describe and explain the process that take place in the development of
microorganism such as growth, growth kinetics and energetics, transport model and
types of transport in aerobes and anaerobes.
Describe, explain and analyze various metabolic pathways and its regulation.
Describe and explain the regulation of enzyme and coenzyme, nutrient stress and
stringent control.
Describe and explain the synthesis of biomolecules and its regulation.
Describe and explain global Control Network, genomics and proteomics tools in
bacterial physiology.
BMT 217/3: Virology
This course aims at the introduction and understanding of virology. Virus is a minute
entity that has a significant effect as it causes various diseases in microorganisms,
animals, plants and human. The cost implication in viral diseases is large. The problems
become more complicated because viral diseases cannot be cured. The strategies in
handling viral problems are different from other organisms.
216
Learning Outcomes
Describe the basic concepts in general virology and its significant in medical,
agriculture and environment fields.
Understand the molecular aspects of virology.
Understand and appreciate the virus existence.
BMT 302/3: Environmental Microbiology
The course emphasises on the principles of microbial behavior in an ecosystem, growth

kinetics in open and closed systems, the role of microorganisms in the natural ecosystem
such as terrestrial, aquatic, animal, extreme environments, air borne microbial dispersion,
development of microbial community and microbial activities which have economic and
social implications. In relation to that, fields such as nitrogen fixation, food spoilage by
microorganisms, air pollution and its prevention, the role of microorganisms in sewage
and domestic treatment and biodegradation of complex chemical compounds and
recalcitrants, will also be discussed.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the importance of microbial interactions and the effects on the

environment.
Describe the principles of microbial behavior in an ecosystem.
Understand roles of microorganisms in the natural ecosystem and microbial activities
which have economic and social implications.
BTT 202/3: Techniques in Biotechnology
The objective of this course is to develop skills in various techniques in enzyme

technology, fermentation, and biochemical engineering. Practical skills that will be
introduced also include characterization of microbial growth, methods of separation and
purification of materials from different types of fermentors, immobilization of biocatalyst
(cells and enzymes) and biocatalytic fermentors. Fundamental techniques dealing with
recombinant DNA technology involving methods of DNA cloning, restriction
endocleases, DNA ligase, DNA transformation and DNA sequencing will also be
covered. Latest tools dealing with bioinformatics will be presented.
Learning Outcomes
Know and perform DNA cloning pronciples and analysis techniques.

Explain bioreactor designs, characteristics and functions of its major components.
217
Explain various downstream processes and enrichment techniques.
Describe various purification techniques and chromatography principles.
BTT 300/8: Project in Biotechnology
In this course, the final year student is offered a research project that introduce the
students to research methods for solving a proposed problem. The results of the project
will be presented in a seminar and a thesis at the end of the academic year.
Learning Outcomes
Manage time between lab work and lectures.

Manage and carryout a Biotechnology research project.
Prepare a thesis and a scientific report.
Present an oral scientific seminar.
BTT 301/3: Tissue Culture Technology
This course will discuss current developments in the application of plant and animal cell
culture in biotechnology. Among the areas covered are: methods for culturing and
maintaining cell cultures; hybridisation and organogenesis (plants); cell cultures in plant
breeding; production of metabolites, monoclonal antibodies, hormones and interferons.
Learning Outcomes
Understand different plant tissue culture techniques for mass propagation of plantlets
and for germplasm conservation.
Establish plant cell suspension cultures for the production of secondary metabolites.
Execute plant modification technique for production of transgenic plants.
Understand the importance of aseptic techniques and to describe the reasons for the
use of cell cultures and the types of culture which may be used.
Produce and maintain healthy mammalian cell cultures.
BTT 302/3: Fermentation Technology
The major topics covered in this course are organism selection, improvement and
preservation, coordination of microbial metabolism, substrate and inoculum preparation,
fermenter design and operation, industrial waste treatment, and biotransformations
involving free and immobilised cells/enzymes. The technology and kinetics of large scale
fermentations will also be discussed.
218
Learning Outcomes
Manipulate microbial metabolism, prepare substrate and inoculum.

Develop a fermentation process train, involving upstream and downstream
processes.
Discuss biological reactions involving free and immobilised cells/enzymes.
Discuss biochemical reactions in wastewater treatment processes.
BTT 303/3: Biochemical Engineering
The objective of this course is to introduce of engineering methods and principles in

industrial fermentation processes. The course includes engineering processes in large
scale fermentation and process control for product formation. Topics to be discussed will
include fermentation kinetics in batch, fed-batch and continuous cultures, broth rheology,
agitation and aeration, scale-up processes, sterilization of media and air, instrumentation
for process control and downstream processes such as centrifugation, filtration,
extraction, industrial chromatographic techniques and purification. The operational
stability and selectivity and performance of bioreactor systems will also be discussed.
Learning Outcomes
Appreciate the importance of engineering principles in applied science.

Understand the principles and operation of a bioreactor and auxilliary
instrumentations.
Engineer biochemical processes involving microbial or enzymatic product
formation.
Describe mathematically enzymatic and microbal fermentation kinetics.
Understand operational stability, selectivity and factors involved in
controlling bioreactor systems.
BTT 304/3: Genetic Engineering
Taking off from BTT 202/3: Techniques in Biotechnology, this course will
introduce the students to various techniques involved in genetic engineering such as
library construction, gene cloning, plant genetic transformation, bioinformatics and
heterologous protein over-expression. Students completing the course would have sound
footing in basic techniques to conduct research in molecular genetics with minimal high-
level supervision. Latest tools dealing with bioinformatics will be presented and practised.
219
Learning Outcomes
Understand genetic engineering techniques.

Perform genetic engineering techniques.
Perform Bioinformatics analysis.
BVT 211/3: Biology of Vectors and Parasites
Students will be exposed to the biological concepts encompassing parasites and vectors,
with emphasis on interactions (parasitism and symbiosis), life cycles, effects of parasites
on their hosts and the ecology of parasites and vectors. The course will be taught from a
global viewpoint, with emphasis on the ecology and biology of arthropod populations,
vertebrates, parasites and pathogens. Insect of medical importance and its involvement
with other animals in relation to disease epidemiology will be discussed. Vector insect
groups will be emphasized.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the basic biological concept of vectors and parasite diseases, treatment
using drug/anthelmintics, and preautions/hygienic steps for disease control.
Identify the life cycle end ecology of some arthropod vector as well as parasites and
pathogens.
Apply knowledge of vector an parasites to differentiate major types of diseases like
malaria, dengue fever, trypanosomiasis, etc
BVT 212/2: Basic Parasitology Practicals
This course will give emphasis to protozoan animals and helminthes that cause diseases in
man and domestic animals. The taxonomy and morphology of protozoa in the intestine,
blood and other organs will be introduced. For helminthes, specimen to be studied will
include tapeworms, nematodes and trematodes.
Learning Outcomes
Identify some protozoan and helminthes that cause diseases in human and domestic
animals and demonstrate essential knowledge in taxonomy, morphology and
physiology of some protozoa and helminthes in animals.
Determine parasitic infection and use current knowledge, technique and skill to
identify parasites.
220
Understand and adhere to professional parasitological practices and responsible to
the publics interest.
Verifies the impact of parasitological solutions in a global economic environmental
and societal context.
BVT 300/8: Project in Biology and Management of Vectors and Parasites
This course involves with students each doing a research as a final year research project
for two semesters. It aims to expose the final year students to research methodology
which are commonly use for solving a proposed problem. The results of the project will
be presented in a thesis and a viva voce at the end of the project.
Learning Outcomes
Carry out research and solving scientific problems.

Use the acquired knowledge for future studies on the control of vectors and parasites.
Demonstrate skill in the collection of insects, their classification and mounting for
permanent display.
Apply professional working environments and activities, role of journals, career
development opportunities, technical support structures, and can explore some
research areas of the discipline.
BVT 311/4: Medical and Urban Entomology
This course discusses the biology, behaviour, ecology and management of medically-
important insects (mosquitoes, house flies and biting flies) and urban insects
(cockroaches, termites, ants, bed bugs and stored product insects). Emphasis will be given
on Malaysian insect pest species and insect orders such as Diptera, Blattodea,
Hymenoptera, Hemiptera, Anoplura, Mallophaga, Siphonaptera, Coleoptera and
Lepidoptera. The role of insect vectors in the transmission of tropical diseases (malaria,
filariasis, dengue, Japanese-B encephalitis, and others) will also be discussed. In
addition, students will also learn the philosophy of urban entomology and concepts of
human environment, biocoenoses and urban ecosystem.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the biology, behavior and management of medical and urban insect
pests.
Understand the role of insects in transmission of diseases, as well as diagnosis of
several diseases caused by insect vectors.
Understand the basic philosophy of urban pest management.
Use current technique in various ecosystems.
221
Plan and design an integrated pest management programme against medical and
urban insect pests in a specific environment.
BVT 312/2: Practicals in Vectors and Urban Pests
This course gives students an insight into various biological aspects and identification of
vectors such as mosquitoes, house flies and biting flies as well as urban pests such as
cockroaches, lice, fabric moths, domestic ants, wood-boring beetles, and biting hornets.
Emphasis is given on the habitats of these insects as well as control approaches that can
be under taken to overcome the breeding of such insects. Students are also exposed to
insect sampling and culture technigues and techniques for the bioefficacy evaluation of
insecticide products.
Learning Outcomes
Comprehend the basic biological concept and morphology of vector and urban pests.
Indentify the species, culture technique, life cycle and ecology on mosquitoes,
cockroaches, ants, termites, houseflies and rodents.
Apply knowledge of vectors and urban pests in controlling their abundance and
population dynamics.
Select techniques and comparison of household insecticide in controlling vectors and
urban pests.
BVT 313/4: Medical and Veterinary Parasitology
This course will discuss important aspects of protozoa and helminths that infect man and
animals. Topics in this course will include epidemiology, diagnosis, pathological effects,
pathogenesis, chemotherapy, prevention and disease control. Emphasis will be given on
protozoan and helminthic diseases of man and domestic animals in Malaysia and Asia.
Zoonotic diseases will also be discussed.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the biology, behavior and control of medically important parasites.

Understand the role of parasite and prevention on some zoonotic diseases.
Apply knowledge of parasite classification and their evolution in order to understand
effective methods used for controlling these parasites
Discuss various aspects of important groups of protozoa and helminthes which infect
and cause diseases in man and domestic animals.
Understand the taxonomy, anatomy and physiology, epidemiology, life cycle,
pathology and parthenogenesis and control methods of parasite.
222
BVT 314/2: Advanced Practicals in Parasitology
This practical course is intended to expose students to various parasitological techniques

which can help a parasitologist in carrying out research. Techniques that will be taught
include post-mortem of small animals (mice, frogs, etc.), stool and blood film
examinations.
Learning Outcomes
Demonstrate competency in conducting parasitology practicals.

Diagnose several diseases caused by parasites.
Prepare preserve specimens and also thick and thin slides.
Inspect various types of slides, including blood stain, and protozoan slide.
To calibrate size of adult and eggs of nematode, trematode, and cestode.
BBT 213/4: Plant Physiology and Development
This course involves the various aspects of plant growth and development such as water
and nutrients transportation, plant development, photorespiration, photosynthesis,
metabolism and nitrogen fixation, seed dormancy, germination, photoperiodism and
developmental regulatory systems. The role of plant physiology in some aspects of
biotechnology such as to improve crop yield, increase resistance of plants to herbicides
and pathogens, enhance vegetative propagation and production of secondary products will
be emphasized..
Learning Outcomes
Understand the concept of plant physiology and development from the perspectives
of biochemical and genetic processes.
Demonstrate knowledge of the fundamentals plant biochemistry and metabolism,
including photosynthesis process and roles of hormones in plant growth and
development.
Describe in detail plant morphological and physiological responses and adaptations
to variations in selected environmental variables, including those of extreme
environments.
BBT 301/3: Plant Genetics
The course is tailored to provide a comprehensive understanding in the area of plant

genetics. Emphasize will be given on the areas of advanced Mendelian and non-
Mendalian genetics together with their application in agriculture. Various types of
mutations and their consequences and also the behaviour of chromosomes in euploids and
aneuploids. The effect of transposition will also be discussed. Various types of plant
223
breeding systems will be introduced. Emphasis will also be given on the areas of
evolution and chromosome changes, gene mutation, linkage and gene mapping as well as
the application of recombinant DNA technology in plant. In addition the characteristics of
the three plant genomes will be discussed. Answering evolutionary and plant population
questions using numerous genetic / molecular approaches will be provided.
Learning Outcomes
understand advanced Mendelian and non Mendelian genetics application of

Mendelian genetic in agriculture
know molecular basis of inheritance, the biology of eukaryotic genes, the mobile
genetic elements and itsconsequences after transposition, and understand
chromosome behavior in euploids and aneuploids
know the objectives and the types of plant breeding system
map the gene arrangement based on three factor linkage analysis
describe factors that are required for the Hardy-Weinberg equilibrium to apply and
those that violates the equilibrium, and describe factors that contributes towards
phenotipic variance
differentiate the structure and features of the three plant genomes
BBT 302/3: Economic Botany
This course will discuss the relationship between plants and man, the origins of
agriculture and the influence of plants on history, economy and culture of man. Important
plant groups from the economic point of view products and use will also be taught. These
will include aspects of plant diseases and their consideration concerning world problems
about plant usage, food source and the future of plants. Evolution of cereal plants such as
rice, maize and wheat; centre of origin and Vavilor's theory about economic plants are
included. Student will be introduced to plant genetic resources; namely erosion of plant
genetic resource variability and plant conservation. The green revolution and problems of
food sources will be discussed.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the basic and applied concept of economic botany.

Understand the importance of plant to the history and culture of human and their
economic importance.
Understand the importance of various plant groups, products, diseases and genetic
resources.
Equip with knowledge on the relationship between plant, economy and human.
224
BOE 201/3: Biological Instrumentation
This course is intended to introduce students to the theoretical principles and use of
laboratory equipment. The course is divided into two parts, namely theory and practical,
emphasis being given to the practical aspects. Among the principles/techniques that will
be discussed are assay principles, extraction and purification and analysis such as
respirometer, manometer, kjeldahl, spectrophotometry, electroforesis and
chromatography. Emphasis will be given to the use of extractor equipment (centrifuge,
electrophoresis, chromatography, freeze drying) and analysis equipment (Kjeldahl, atomic
spectrophotometer, UV/Vis, flame photometer and pH, CO2 & O2 meters). This course is
geared for students that are interested in courses that involve the study and efficient use of
laboratory equipment in research.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of this course, students should be able to understand the theoretical principles,
techniques and use of laboratory equipment such as Centrifuge, Spectrophotometer,
Electrophoresis, Freeze dryer, Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer (AAS), Gas
Chromatography, Flame photometer and other analysis equipments
BOE 300/2: Special Topics in Biology
This course is intended to increase and deepen students knowledge in their respective
fields of specialization. Student will be requested to conduct data mining on a relevant
topic through the use of library facilities and the internet. Subsequently, students will be
required to give a seminar and an essay on the topic which has been researched on.
Learning Outcomes
Use the internet and library in data mining in their relevant fields.
Improve on their soft skill namely in presenting their findings orally.
BOT 205/3: Microscopy and Histological Techniques
This course is aimed at introducing students to the basic principles and concepts of
microscopic and histological techniques. Basic principles and applications of light, dark-
field, phase contrast, fluorescence, confocal and electron microscopes will be taught
and demonstrated. Concepts such as resolution, contrast, numerical aperture, illumination,
and depth of field will also be taught. Students will be given the opportunity to study
techniques in fixation and preservation of specimens, staining and sectioning,
construction and use of the microtome, and the preparation of histological slides.
225
Learning Outcomes
Understand how a microscope accomplishes its three tasks: produce a magnified

image of the specimen (magnification), separate the details in the image (resolution),
and render the details visible to the eye, camera, or other imaging device (contrast).
Understand the functions of the microscope components and their basic principles.
Gain basic knowledge on the current informations pertaining to the microscopic and
histological techniques technologies.
Master selected microscopic preparations and also understand basic histological
techniques.
BZT 211/3: Invertebrate Zoology
This course will discuss numerous aspects of Invertebrate Zoology, namely on

classification and phylogeny, species evolution, invertebrates diversity, structure,
adaptation, function and physiology in order to survive in various environments. Several
phyla will be discussed, including Protozoa, Porifera, Coelenterata, Nematoda,
Platyhelminthes, Mollusca, Echinodermata and Annelida.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the phylogeny of invertebrates.

Differentiate different groups of invertebrate animals.
Understand the diversity, evolution, function and adaptation of invertebrates.
Understand the classification of invertebrates such as Protozoa, Porifera, Cnidaria,
Nematoda, Platyhelminthes, Mollusca, Echiinodermata, Arthropoda and Annelida.
BZT 212/3: Vertebrate Zoology
The course will discuss Hemichordata and Protochordata and their relationships with the
Vertebrates. Characters and success of various vertebrate (e.g. Agnatha, Placoderma,
Ostracoderm, Chondrichthyes, Osteichthyes, Amphibians, Reptiles, Birds and Mammals)
will be discussed with reference to vertebrate Paleontology and modern structure. The
main focus will be on adaptation, anatomy, structure, functional homology and life cycles.
Adaptive radiation and success shown by various groups of vertebrates will be presented
and compared with the present-day fauna.
226
Learning Outcomes
Understand the historical background, pioneering scientists, and earliest principles of

the vertebrate zoology.
Understand different group of vertebrate animals.
Understand the diversity, evolution, function, adaptation and conservation of
vertebrate animals.
Deliver effective scientific essay on vertebrate zoology.
BZT 213/3: Animal Behaviour
Students will be introduced to animal behaviour as a scientific discipline that touches

basic concepts of ethiology. The way a particular behaviour is expanded, type of
stimulants and how it is accepted will be discussed. In addition, motivation and its
function in behaviour and physiological influence towards behaviour will also be
discussed. Other important topic includes social behaviour and their importance, social
organisation and the function of dominant hierarchy, territorial concept, activity and
altruistic and behavioural evolution.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the basic concepts of behaviour and ethology.

Understand the function and importance of behaviour and the evolution of behaviour.
Understand the important subjects in behaviour such as mating strategies,
communications, territoriality, social and learning behaviour.
BZT 214/3: Animal Physiology
This course centers on the mechanisms which underlie the functioning of the main
physiological systems in Vertebrates. Emphasis will be placed on the functional
characteristics of the respiratory, circulation, excretion, nervous and reproductive systems
and their control.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the basic concept of animal physiology.

Understand the mechanisms and the different functioning of the main physiological
systems in animals.
Understand the functional characteristics of respiratory, homeostatis, excretion,
circulation, nervous and reproductive systems in animals.
227
BZT 311/3: Biology of Vertebrate Pest Animals
This course will discuss on numerous factors which allow classes of vertebrates to live as
pest populations and various steps taken to control them, namely physical, chemical,
mechanical and biological controlling methods as well as reduction of their source of food
and regulatory control measures. Within the context of chemical control, aspects of
action, toxicity, physiology and pesticide technology as well as its effect on environment
and magnification will be discussed. Combinations of two or more methods of control to
manage vertebrate pests, and the best possible approach and its effects on the ecological,
environmental and economical aspects will also be discussed.
Learning Outcomes
Understand the factors which enable various group of vertebrates to survive as pest
animals.
Understand the importance of vertebrate pest in the urban, agricultural and secondary
growth areas.
Understand the different approach in the control of vertebrate pest.
Deliver effective scientific report and presentation.
228
SCHOOL OF
MATHEMATICAL
SCIENCES
229
SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES
(www.mat.usm.my/math)
INTRODUCTION
The Bachelor of Applied Science degree program in this School was introduced in the
1987/88 Academic Session. The program emphasizes the applications of mathematics
and gives emphasis to computing in the study of mathematical sciences. This is to
produce graduates who are capable of carrying out research and development works in
industries as well as in public and private agencies.
The School offers four areas of specialization:

(i) Applied Statistics
(ii) Operations Research
(iii) Mathematical Modelling
(iv) Mathematics and Economics
The above specializations were created in an effort to produce trained graduates in areas
of applied mathematical sciences to support the nations manpower need. The courses
have been structured to provide a specialized and solid applied mathematical sciences
education. The skills acquired provides a solid foundation for further development of
mathematical skills.
VISION
To be a recognised department of mathematics that can attract excellent students and

produce quality mathematicians nationally and internationally.
MISSION
To lead and innovate in achieving excellence in Mathematical Sciences at the

international level through advancing and disseminating knowledge and truth; instilling
qualities that stress academic excellence and professionalism; developing holistic
individuals; and providing a strong commitment towards the aspiration of society; the
countrys vision and universal aspirations.
230
BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE (APPLIED STATISTICS)
Programme Objectives
Graduates of Bachelor of Applied Science (Applied Statistics) will
(i) have a specialized and solid applied statistics education.
(ii) have a solid foundation for further development of mathematical skills.
(iii) possess professional attitudes, good ethics and leadership qualities.
(iv) have an educational experience that motivates them to pursue life-long learning.
(v) have a solid foundation to be enrolled in a university graduate programme or
employed.
Programme Learning Outcomes

At the end of the program, the student is
1. competent in the fundamental concepts, theories and results of statistics and able to
apply skills in statistical reasoning.
2. The student is also competent in a variety of statistical techniques to solve problems.
3. able to identify, formulate, analyze and solve applied and industrial problems through
the integration of statistical techniques with other disciplines.
4. able to convey ideas and statistical knowledge clearly and effectively in both written
and oral form.
5. able to work collaboratively as part of a team.
6. able to pursue independent study and continuous personal and professional
development.
7. able to be a skilled and innovative leader.
8. professional, responsible and ethical.
9. able to identify business and entrepreneurship opportunities.
BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE (OPERATIONS RESEARCH)
Graduates of Bachelor of Applied Science (Operations Research) will
(i) have a specialized and solid operations research education.
employed.

1. competent in the fundamental concepts and theories of operations research.
2. able to apply analytical skills and is competent in a variety of operations research
techniques to solve problems.
3. able to identify, formulate, analyze and solve applied and industrial problems through
the integration of operations research techniques with other disciplines.
231
4. able to convey ideas and operations research knowledge clearly and effectively in
both written and oral form.
5. able to work collaboratively as part of a team.
6. able to pursue independent study and continuous personal and professional
development.
7. able to be a skilled and innovative leader.
BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE (MATHEMATICAL MODELLING)
Graduates of Bachelor of Applied Science (Mathematical Modelling) will
(i) have a specialized and solid mathematical modelling education.
employed.

1. knowledgeable in the fundamentals of mathematical sciences and competent in the
application of mathematical modelling to science and engineering.
2. capable of identifying, formulating, analyzing and solving problems in science and
engineering, skilled in computer programming, computational techniques and ICT.
3. a team player who is accountable and responsible.
5. an effective and confident communicator.
6. a critical thinker who adopts a scientific approach towards solving problems.
7. capable of improving his or her mathematical knowledge as part of a life long
learning process.
8. a skilled and innovative leader and manager of resources.
9. able to identify business and entrepreneurship opportunities.
BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE (MATHEMATICS AND ECONOMICS)
Graduates of Bachelor of Applied Science (Mathematics and Economics) will
(i) have a specialized and solid mathematics and economics education.
(ii) have a solid foundation for further development of mathematical and economics
skills.
employed.
232
At the end of the program, the student
1. understands how mathematical concepts and processes can be used to develop
economics and financial knowledge.
2. is competent in a variety of mathematical techniques to solve problems.
3. is able to identify, formulate, analyze and solve economic problems through the
integration of mathematical techniques .
4. is able to communicate ideas and knowledge in mathematics and economics clearly
and effectively in both written and oral form.
5. is able to work collaboratively as part of a team.
6. is able to pursue independent study and continuous personal and professional
development.
7. is able to be a skilled and innovative leader.
8. is professional, responsible and ethical.
9. is able to identify business and entrepreneurship opportunities.
233
MAIN ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF
DEAN
Professor Ahmad Izani Md. Ismail
DEPUTY DEANS
Assoc. Prof. Hailiza Kamarulhaili Professor Low Heng Chin Professor Jamaludin Md. Ali
(Academic and Student Development) (Industry & Community Network) (Graduate Studies and Research)
PROGRAM CHAIRPERSONS
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Mohd. Tahir Ismail Assoc. Prof. Adam Baharum Assoc. Prof. Dr. Rosmanjawati
Andrew Rajah Applied Science Applied Science Ahmad Abdul Majid Abd. Rahman
Science (Mathematics) (Mathematics and (Applied Statistics/Operations Applied Science Academic
Economics) Research) (Mathematical Modelling) Co-ordinator
ASSISTANT REGISTRARS
Mr. Ihsanul Anwar Shamsur Rahim Ms. Nor Farah Shaik Omar
Senior Assistant Registrar Assistant Registrar
234
ADMINISTRATION
E-mail
DEAN
Professor Ahmad Izani Md. Ismail dean_mat@usm.my
DEPUTY DEAN (Academic and Student Development)

Assoc. Prof. Hailiza Kamarulhaili ddsa_mat@usm.my
DEPUTY DEAN (Graduate Studies and Research)

Professor Jamaludin Md. Ali ddpg_mat@usm.my
DEPUTY DEAN (Industry & Community Network)

Professor Low Heng Chin hclow@cs.usm.my
PROGRAM CHAIRPERSONS
SCIENCE (MATHEMATICS)
Assoc. Prof. Andrew Rajah andy@cs.usm.my
(Acting (1/3/12-31/12/12): Dr. Hajar Sulaiman hajar@cs.usm.my
APPLIED SCIENCES (MATHEMATICS AND ECONOMICS)

Dr. Mohd Tahir Ismail mtahir@cs.usm.my
APPLIED SCIENCES (APPLIED STATISTICS/OPERATIONS RESEARCH)

Assoc. Prof. Adam Baharum adam@cs.usm.my
APPLIED SCIENCE (MATHEMATICAL MODELLING)

Assoc. Prof. Ahmad Abd. Majid majid@cs.usm.my
ACADEMIC CO-ORDINATOR
Dr. Rosmanjawati Abdul Rahman rosmanjawati@usm.my
SENIOR ASSISTANT REGISTRAR

Mr. Ihsanul Anwar Shamsur Rahim anwar@usm.my
ASSISTANT REGISTRAR
Ms. Nor Farah Shaik Omar nor_farah@usm.my
235
ACADEMIC STAFF
PROFESSOR TELEPHONE E-MAIL

EXTENSION
Dato Rosihan M. Ali, Dr 3966 rosihan@cs.usm.my
Abd. Rahni Mt. Piah, Dr 3945 arahni@cs.usm.my
Ahmad Izani Md. Ismail, Dr 3657 izani@cs.usm.my
Jamaludin Md. Ali, Dr 3656 jamaluma@cs.usm.my
Low Heng Chin, Dr 3641 hclow@cs.usm.my
Michael Khoo Boon Chong, Dr 3941 mkbc@usm.my
Zarita Zainuddin, Dr 3940 zarita@cs.usm.my
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR
Adam Baharum, Mr 3942 adam@cs.usm.my

Ahmad Abd. Majid, Dr 3965 majid@cs.usm.my
Andrew Rajah, Dr 4780 andy@cs.usm.my
Hailiza Kamarulhaili, Dr 3648 hailiza@cs.usm.my
Norhashidah Hj. Mohd. Ali, Dr 3960 shidah@cs.usm.my
Ong Hong Choon, Dr 4763 hcong@cs.usm.my
SENIOR LECTURER
Adli Mustafa, Dr 3968 adli@cs.usm.my

Ang Miin Huey, Dr 4772 mathamh@cs.usm.my
Azhana Ahmad, Dr 4771 azhana@usm.my
Ena Jamal, Ms 3658 ena@cs.usm.my
Fam Pei Shan, Dr 5908 fpeishan@usm.my
Farah Aini Abdullah, Dr 4765 farahaini@usm.my
Hajar Sulaiman, Dr 4779 hajar@cs.usm.my
Husna Hasan, Dr 3969 husna@cs.usm.my
Joshua Ignatius, Dr 3384 josh@usm.my
Kong Voon Pang, Dr 3943 kongvp@cs.usm.my
Lee See Keong, Dr 2070 sklee@cs.usm.my
Mohd. Tahir Ismail, Dr 2071 mtahir@cs.usm.my
Noor Atinah Ahmad, Dr 4767 atinah@cs.usm.my
Noor Hayati Marzuki, Ms 2356 hayati@cs.usm.my
Norhashidah Awang, Dr 4774 shidah@usm.my
Norlida Mohd. Noor, Ms 3958 norlida@sm.my
Nuzlinda Abdul Rahman, Dr 4781 nuzlinda@usm.my
Rosmanjawati Abdul Rahman, Dr 4778 rosmanjawati@usm.my
Saratha A/P Sathasivam, Dr 2428 saratha@usm.my
Sek Siok Kun, Dr 5338 sksek@usm.my
Shamsul Rijal Muhammad Sabri, Dr 3964 rijal@usm.my
Suraiya Kassim, Ms 4773 ksuraya@cs.usm.my
236
Syakila Ahmad, Dr 4782 syakilaahmad@usm.my
Tan Guat Yew, Ms 3944 gytan@cs.usm.my
Teh Su Yean, Dr 4770 syteh@usm.my
Yahya Abu Hasan, Dr 4783 ahyahya@cs.usm.my
Yazariah Mohd Yatim, Dr 3384 yazariahmy@usm.my
Zalila Ali, Ms 4775 zalila@cs.usm.my
Nur Atiqah Jamaluddin Secretary

Norrizah Hj. Abd. Hamid Secretary
Azizah Abdul Rani Senior Administrative Assistant
(Clerical/Operation-Finance)
Faridah Hashim Senior Administrative Assistant (Clerical/Operation)
Khairul Azly Abdul Kadir Administrative Assistant (Clerical/Operation)
Rohartina Razali Administrative Assistant (Clerical/Operation)
Suriati Mukhtar Administrative Assistant (Clerical/Operation)
Yusnita Yusop Administrative Assistant (Clerical/Operation)
Zalem Tekor Administrative Assistant (Clerical/Operation)
Syed Mohamed Hussain Syed Osman Senior Technician
Hartini Ahmad Computer Technician
Arzahar Ismail Senior Office Assistant
Mohd Ibrahim Mohd Shariff Senior Office Assistant
237
REQUIREMENT OF THE PROGRAM
(a) Specialization in Applied Statistics, Operations Research and Mathematical

Modelling
Type of Courses Classification Units

Core T 70
Minor / Elective M/E 20-24*
University U 15-18
Total Number of Units 105-112
* A student who choose a Minor needs to accumulate 16 or 20 units from one

of the Minor programs and obtain units from MAT181/4 : Programming for
Scientific Applications as an Elective. Note that some minor programs offer
16 units and some offer 20 units.
(b) Specialization in Mathematics and Economics
Type of Courses Classification Units
92 (Mathematics : 50)
Core T
(Economics : 42)
University U 15-18
Total Number of Units 107-110
238
CORE COURSES
Students in the specialization areas of Applied Statistics, Operations Research and

Mathematical Modelling must accumulate 70 units while 92 units is required for students
in Mathematics and Economics:
Applied Statistics
Compulsory (46 units)
MAT 101/4 : Calculus

MAT 111/4 : Linear Algebra
MAT 161/4 : Elementary Statistics
MAT 102/4 : Advanced Calculus
MAT 122/4 : Differential Equations I
MSG 162/4 : Applied Statistical Methods
MAT 251/4 : Introduction to Operations Research
MAT 263/4 : Probability Theory
MSG 285/2 : Statistical Laboratory
MSG 286/2 : Operations Research Laboratory
MAT 363/4 : Statistical Inference
MSG 391/6 : Project
Specialization Options (16 units)
MSG 262/4 : Quality Control

MSG 265/4 : Design and Analysis of Experiments
MSG 366/4 : Multivariate Analysis
MSG 367/4 : Time Series Analysis
MSG 368/4 : Sample Survey and Sampling Technique
Operations Research

MSG 391/6 : Project
239
MSG 252/4 : Linear and Integer Programming

MSG 253/4 : Queueing System and Simulation
MSG 354/4 : Network Flows
MSG 355/4 : Inventory Control
MSG 356/4 : Mathematical Programming
Mathematical Modelling

MAT 102/4 : Advance Calculus
MAT 202/4 : Introduction to Analysis
MAT 203/4 : Vector Calculus
MAT 222/4 : Differential Equations II
MAT 282/4 : Engineering Computation I
MSG 228/4 : Introduction to Modelling
MSG 281/2 : Modelling Laboratory I
MSG 282/2 : Modelling Laboratory II
MSG 322/4 : Fluid Mechanics
MSG 327/4 : Mathematical Modelling
MSG 389/4 : Engineering Computation II
MSG 391/6 : Project
Applied Statistics, Operations Research and Mathematical Modelling students are also
required to acquire 8 units from the following list:
BOM 111/4 : Biodiversity

BOM 112/4 : Ecology
CPT 112/4 : Discrete Structure
CPT 114/4 : Logic & Applications
KFT 131/3 : Physical Chemistry I
KOT 121/3 : Organic Chemistry I
KTT 111/3 : Non-Organic Chemistry I
KUT 101/2 : Chemistry Practical I
KUT 102/2 : Chemistry Practical II
ZCA 101/4 : Physics I (Mechanics)
ZCA 102/4 : Physics II (Electricity & Magnetism)
240
Mathematics and Economics
Compulsory Mathematics Courses (46 units)

MSG 391/6 : Project
MSG 356/4 : Mathematical Programming

MSG 367/4 : Time Series Analysis
Compulsory Economics Courses (24 units)
SKW 109/3 : Introduction to Economic Issues

SEW 101/3 : Microeconomics
SEW 103/3 : Macroeconomics
SEW 202/3 : Intermediate Microeconomics
SEW 204/3 : Intermediate Macroeconomics
SEW 303/3 : Economics History
SEP 206/3 : Malaysian Economics
SEP 324/3 : Elementary Econometrics
Choose 2 from 4 of the following courses:
SEU 224/3 : Agricultural Marketing and Cooperative Economics

SEU 227/3 : Development Economics
SEU 230/3 : Labour Economics
SEU 231/3 : Islamic Economics
241
SEU 332/3 : Behavioral Economics

SEU 334/3 : Money, Banking and Financial Market
SEU 335E/3 : Public Sector Economics I
SEU 336E/3 : Environment Economics and Natural Resource
SEU 339E/3 : Economic Planning and Project Analysis
SEU 411E/3 : International Trade

SEU 413E/3 : Monetary Economics
SEU 416E/3 : Public Sector Economics II
SEU 421E/3 : International Finance
SEU 422E/3 : Applied Economics
SKILL / OPTIONAL COURSES
In order to fulfill this requirement, students of the School of Mathematical Sciences are
allowed to take any course outside the Schools of Mathematical Sciences, Chemical
Sciences, Biological Sciences and Physics. Students are encouraged to take English
language [LHP code], foreign languages, thinking techniques, history and philosophy of
science courses.
242
COURSE PREREQUISITE AND SEMESTER OF OFFERING
The prerequisites and semester of offering of the compulsory core and specialization
optional core courses and MAT 181/4 are as follows:
Applied Statistics Specialization / Operations Research
No. Code & Title of Courses Prerequisite Semester Offered

1. MAT 101/4 : Calculus - 1
2. MAT 111/4 : Linear Algebra - 1, 2
3. MAT 161/4 : Elementary Statistics - 1, 2
4. MAT 102/4 : Advanced Calculus MAT 101 (S) 2
5. MAT 122/4 : Differential Equations I MAT 101 (S) and 2
MAT 111 (S)
6. MAT 181/4 : Programming for - 1, 2
Scientific Applications
7. MSG 162/4 : Applied Statistical MAT 161 (S) 2
Methods
8. MAT 251/4 : Introduction to MAT 111 (S) and 1
Operations Research MAT 161 (S)
9. MAT 263/4 : Probability Theory MAT 161 (S) and 1, 2
MAT 102 (S)
10. MSG 252/4 : Linear and Integer MAT 251 (S) 2
Programming
11. MSG 253/4 : Queueing System and MAT 263 (S) and 2
Simulation MAT 181 (S)
12. MSG 262/4 : Quality Control MSG 162 (S) 2
13. MSG 265/4 : Design and Analysis of MSG 162 (S) 2
Experiments
14. MSG 285/2 : Statistical Laboratory MSG 162 (S) 1
15. MSG 286/2 : Operations Research MAT 251 (S) 2
Laboratory
16. MAT 363/4 : Statistical Inference MAT 263 (S) 1
17. MSG 354/4 : Network Flows MAT 251 (S) 1
18. MSG 355/4 : Inventory Control MAT 251 (S) 2
19. MSG 356/4 : Mathematical MAT 251 (S) 2
Programming
20. MSG 366/4 : Multivariate Analysis MSG 162 (S) and 1
MSG 285 (S)
21. MSG 367/4 : Time Series Analysis MSG 285 (S) 2
22. MSG 368/4 : Sample Survey and MSG 162 (S) 2
Sampling Technique
23. MSG 391/6 : Project Applied Statistics : 1 and 2
MAT 263(S) and
MSG 285 (S)
Operations
Research :
MSG 286 (S)
243
Mathematical Modelling Specialization
Semester
No. Code & Title of Courses Prerequisite
Offered
1. MAT 101/4 : Calculus - 1
2. MAT 111/4 : Linear Algebra - 1, 2
3. MAT 161/4 : Elementary Statistics - 1, 2
4. MAT 102/4 : Advanced Calculus MAT 101 (S) 2
5. MAT 122/4 : Differential Equations I MAT 101 (S) and 2
MAT 111 (S)
6. MAT 181/4 : Programming for - 1, 2
Scientific Applications
7. MAT 202/4 : Introductions to MAT 102 (S) 2
Analysis
8. MAT 203/4 : Vector Calculus MAT 102 (S) 1
9. MAT 222/4 : Differential Equations MAT 122 (S) 1

II
10. MAT 282/4 : Engineering MAT 181 (S) 1
Computation I
11. MSG 228/4 : Introduction to MAT 122 (S) 2
Modelling
12. MSG 281/2 : Modelling Laboratory I MAT 181 (S) 1
13. MSG 282/2 : Modelling Laboratory MSG 281 (S) 2
II
14. MSG 284/4 : Introduction to MAT 181 (S) and 2
Geometric Modelling MAT 102 (S)
15. MSG 322/4 : Fluid Mechanics MAT 222 (S) 2
16. MSG 327/4 : Mathematical MSG 228 (S) 1
Modelling
17. MSG 383/4 : Data Structures for MAT 181 (S) 2
Computer Graphics
18. MSG 387/4 : Computer Graphics MAT 181 (S) 1
19. MSG 388/4 : Mathematical MSG 284 (S) 1
Algorithms for
Computer Graphics
20. MSG 389/4 : Engineering MAT 282 (S) 2
Computation II
21. MSG 391/6 : Project Mathematical Modelling : 1 and 2
MSG 228 (S)
Computer Modelling :
MSG 284 (S)
The offering and prerequisites of courses for the mathematics component of

Mathematics and Economics specialization are the same as for those in Applied
244
Statistics specialization. The prerequisites of courses for the Economics component are as
follows:
No. Code & Title of Courses Prerequisite
1. SKW 109/3 : Introduction to Economic Issues -

2. SEW 101/3 : Microeconomics SKW 109 (S)
3. SEW 103/3 : Macroeconomics SKW 109 (S)
4. SEW 202/3 : Intermediate Microeconomics SEW 101 (S)
5. SEW 204/3 : Intermediate Macroeconomics SEW 103 (S)
6. SEW 303/3 : Economics History
7. SEP 206/3 : Malaysian Economics SKW 109 (S)
8. SEP 324/3 : Elementary Econometrics SEW 101 (S), SEW 103 (S)
9. SEU 224/3 : Agricultural Marketing and SKW 109 (S)
Cooperative Economics
10. SEU 227/3 : Development Economics SKW 109 (S)
11. SEU 230/3 : Labour Economics SKW 109 (S)
12. SEU 231/3 : Islamic Economics SKW 109 (S)
13. SEU 332/3 : Behavioral Economics SEW 101 (S)
14. SEU 334/3 : Money, Banking and Financial
Market
15. SEU 335E/3 : Public Sector Economics I SEW 202 (S)
16. SEU 336E/3 : Environment Economics and SEW 101 (S)
Natural Resource
17. SEU 339E/3 : Economic Planning and Project SEW 101 (S), SEW 103 (S)
Analysis
18. SEU 411E/3 : International Trade SEW 101 (S)
19. SEU 413E/3 : Monetary Economics SEW 103 (S)
20. SEU 416E/3 : Public Sector Economics II SEW 202 (S),SEU 335E (S)
21. SEU 421E/3 : International Finance SEW 103 (S)
22. SEU 422E/3 : Applied Economics SEW 202 (S), SEW 204 (S)
Sequential prerequisite (S) means if course A is a sequential prerequisite (S) to course B,

then course A must be taken and assessed before course B is taken.
245
SPECIALIZATION AND COMPULSORY CORE COURSES REGISTRATION
GUIDE
Applied Statistics Specialization
Year of
Semester 1 Units Semester 2 Units
Study
MAT 101 4 MAT 111 4
1 MAT 161 4 MAT 102 4
MAT 181 4 MSG 162 4
MAT 122 4
MAT 251 4
MSG 262* 4
2 MAT 263 4
MSG 265* 4
MSG 285 2
MSG 286 2
MAT 363 4 MSG 367* 4
3 MSG 366* 4 MSG 368* 4
MSG 391 6 MSG 391 6
* Optional Courses : Choose 4 from the 5 listed courses.
Operations Research Specialization
Year of
Study
MAT 101 4 MAT 111 4
1 MAT 161 4 MAT 102 4
MAT 181 4 MSG 162 4
4 MAT 122 4
MAT 251
4 MSG 252* 4
2 MAT 263
2 MSG 253* 4
MSG 285
MSG 286 2
MAT 363 4 MSG 355* 4
3 MSG 354* 4 MSG 356* 4
MSG 391 6 MSG 391 6
* Optional Courses : Choose 4 from the 5 listed courses.
246
Mathematical Modelling Specialization
Year of
Study
MAT 101 4 MAT 161 4
1 MAT 111 4 MAT 102 4
MAT 181 4 MAT 122 4
MAT 222 4 MSG 228 4
2 MAT 282 4 MSG 282 2
MSG 281 2 MSG 389 4
MAT 203 4 MAT 202 4
3 MSG 327 4 MSG 322 4
MSG 391 6 MSG 391 6
At the end of their third semester, students specializing in Mathematical Modelling will
be given the option of joining the B. App. Sc (Computer Modelling) program, subject to
the agreement of the Dean. In which case, the courses to be taken are as follows:
Semester Courses Unit

MSG 383 4
4 MSG 282 2
MSG 284 4
MAT 203 4
5 MSG 387 4
MSG 391 6
MAT 202 4
6 MSG 388 4
MSG 391 6
247
Mathematics and Economics Specialization
Students are required to check the list of courses offered at the beginning of each
academic session.
Year of
Study
MAT 111 4
MAT 102 4
MAT 101 4
MSG 162 4
1 MAT 161 4
SEP 206 3
SKW 109 3
SEU 224b 3
SEU 227b 3
MAT 251 4
MAT 263 4 MAT 122 4
MSG 285 2 MSG 286 2
SEW 101 3 SEW 202 3
2 SEW 103 3 SEW 204 3
SEU 230b 3 SEP 304 3
SEU 231b 3 SEU 334 c 3
SEW 303 3 SEU 336 cE 3
SEU 339 cE 3
MAT 363 4 MSG 356a 4
MSG 391 6 MSG 367a 4
SEU 332c 3 MSG 391 6
3
SEU 335 cE 3 SEU 416d E 3
SEU 411d E 3 SEU 421d E 3
SEU 413d E 3 SEU 422d E 3
a
Optional Courses - Choose 1 from these courses.
b
- Choose 2 from these courses.
c
- Choose 2 from these courses.
d
Choose 2 from these courses
MATHEMATICS MINOR PROGRAM
1. MAA 101/4 : Calculus for Science Students I

2. MAA 102/4 : Calculus for Science Students II
3. MAA 111/4 : Algebra for Science Students
4. MAA 161/4 : Statistics for Science Students
5. MAT 122/4 : Differential Equations I
6. MSG 162/4 : Applied Statistical Methods
7. MAT 203/4 : Vector Calculus
8. MAT 263/4 : Probability Theory
9. MSG 262/4 : Quality Control
10. MSS 211/4 : Modern Algebra
248
Mathematics minor students have to accumulate 16 units and it is compulsory for them to
take both MAA 101/4 and MAA 111/4 either as core or minor courses. Courses which
they have taken to fulfill the core requirements must be replaced by the above listed
courses. Please refer to the minor program guide book for further details.
SCHOOLS FACILITIES
The School of Mathematical Sciences has 3 undergraduate computer laboratories, a

postgraduate computer laboratory and a research and development laboratory. These
laboratories are equipped with MS Windows based computer facilities, net-worked laser
printers and CD Writers. Besides that, the School has also a graphic calculator laboratory.
Awards
Besides awards from the University, there are 3 other specific awards for mathematics
students:
1. Tan Sri Dato' Professor Sir Alexander Oppenheim Book Prize for the best first year
student.
2. Dato Abdul Razak Yusof Gold Medal Award to the best final year student in the
field of Mathematical Sciences.
3. Telesol Sdn. Bhd. Gold Medal Award to the best final year student in the field of
Applied Sciences (Mathematics).
The Dean Lists certificates are awarded every semester to each academically excellent
student who has obtained a GPA of at least 3.5 and accumulated at least 14 units.
The Deans Award will be conferred to a student who has excelled both academically and
in co-curriculum activities. Only one award is available for each year of study from each
program. A student of a CGPA of 3.7 and above in an academic session is qualified to be
considered for this award.
Mathematical Sciences Society
This society organizes various activities in order to promote Mathematics amongst USM
and secondary school students. Students of School of Mathematical Sciences are
encouraged to join this society.
Graduate Program
The School also offers the following graduate programs:

Master of Science (Mathematics) by research
Master of Science (Statistics) by research
Mixed Mode Master of Science (Mathematics)
Mixed Mode Master of Science (Statistics)
Master of Science (Teaching of Mathematics) by course-work
Doctor of Philosophy by research
249
Industry Advisory Panels for School of Mathematical Sciences
1. Ms Michelle Leong
IT Program Manager & AP IT Vendor Manager
IT | Information Technology
Agilent Technologies Malaysia
FTZ, Bayan Lepas
11900 Penang
2. Mr. Edward Chooi Kok Kee

Quality Management & Methods (QMM)
Robert Bosch (M) Sdn. Bhd.
Free Industrial Zone, Phase 1
11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang
3. Mr. Amir Hamzah Mohd. Nawawi

Senior Engineering Manager
Advanced Manufacturing Technology
Motorola Technology Sdn. Bhd.
Plot 2, Bayan Lepas Technoplex Industrial Park
Mukim 12 SWD
4. Dr. Teoh Ping Chow

Principal Staff Engineer
Motorola Technology Sdn. Bhd.
Plot 2, Bayan Lepas Technoplex Industrial Park
Mukim 12 SWD
5. Dr. Lee Wen Jau

Senior Staff Engineer / Technical Manager
Intel Technology Sdn. Bhd.
(Company No. 36420-H)
Bayan Lepas Free Industrial Zone
Phase 3, Halaman Kampung Jawa
11900 Penang
250
SYNOPSIS OF COURSES
1. MAT 101/4 Calculus
Functions:
Concept of function.
x , [ x ] , rational functions, trigonometric functions.
Operations of functions (including composite functions).
Graph of functions.
Inverse functions (including inverse of trigonometric functions).
Limit:
Definition using , proof is emphasized using definition of limit.
sin x
One-sided limits, limit theorems, squeezing principle, lim , properties of
x 0 x
limits (uniqueness, preservation of order).
Continuity:
Concept of continuity, one-sided continuity, continuity on a closed interval.
Intermediate value theorem, extremum theorem, completeness axiom for R .
Derivatives:
Concept of derivative.
Differentiability and continuity, properties and rules of differentiation,chain rule.
Parametric representation for curves, implicit function and its derivatives.
Rolles theorem, mean value theorem.
Tests for monotonicity, concavity, local extremum.
Applications - curve sketching, rates of change and modelling problems.
Antiderivatives.
Riemann integral:
Upper and lower sums, integratibility, fundamental theorem of calculus, integral
as a limit of Riemann sums.
Exponential and logarithmic functions.
Techniques and applications of integration:
Various techniques of integration, arc length, area, volume and surface area of
revolution.
Learning Outcomes
Upon completion of this course, students are able to
1. know about functions and limits, and their connection with differentiation
and integration
2. find the derivative of functions using various rules of differentiation
3. evaluate integral of functions using various quadrature methods
4. prove, interpret and apply key theorems in differential and integral calculus
5. apply method in differential and integral calculus to problems in life and
physical sciences
251
Reference Books
1. Spivak, M. (1994). Calculus, 3rd edition. Publish or Perish, Inc.
2. Apostol, T.M. (1967). Calculus Vol I, 2nd edition. John Wiley & Sons.
3. Stewart, J. (2003). Calculus, 5th edition. Thomson Brooks/Cole.
2. MAA 101/4 Calculus for Science Students I
Functions:
Domain, co-domain, range, 1-1 function, onto function.
x , [ x ] , rational functions, transcendental functions (including hyperbolic
functions).
Operations of functions (including composition of functions).
Graph of functions.
Inverse function.
Polar coordinates.
Limit:
Concept of limit and its basic properties.
Continuity:
Concept of continuous functions.
Intermediate value theorem and extremum theorem.
Differentiation:
Differentiability and continuity, rules of differentiation, chain rule.
Parametric representation for curves, implicit function and its derivative.
Rolles theorem, mean value theorem.
Applications - tangent, normal, maximum and minimum, curve sketching,
rates of change, differential, LHospitals rule, Newton Raphson method.
Antiderivative.
Integration:
Definite integral as a limit of Riemann sum, condition for integrability.
Fundamental theorem of calculus.
Exponential function and logarithmic function.
Techniques and applications of integration:
Various techniques of integration, arc length, area, volume and surface area of
revolution, centre of gravity, trapezoidal rule and applications in biology,
chemistry and economics.
Learning Outcomes
1. know about functions and limits, and their connection with differentiation
and integration
2. find the derivative of functions using various rules of differentiation
3. evaluate integral of functions using various quadrature methods
4. apply method in differential and integral calculus to problems in life and
physical sciences
252
Reference Books
2. Weir, M.D., Hass J. and Giordano F. R. (2005). Thomas Calculus, 11th
edition. Pearson Addison Wesley.
3. Berrosford, G.C. and Rocket, A.M. (2004). Applied Calculus, 3rd edition.
Houghton-Mifflin.
4. Tan, S. (2005). Applied Calculus for Managerial, Life and Social
Sciences, 6th edition. Thomson Brooks/Cole.
3. MAT 111/4 Linear Algebra
Vectors in R n :
Vector operations, position vectors, inner product, cross product, equations of
line and plane.
Matrices:
Matrix operations, row and column elementary operations, elementary matrix,
system of linear equations (solutions in the form of homogeneous solution and
particular solution), Gauss elimination process, inverse matrix.
Vector spaces in R n :
Linear independence, basis, dimension, subspace, R n as an inner product space,
Cauchy Schwartz inequality, Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization process.
Linear transformation T : R n R m :
Matrix representation of linear transformation with respect to an ordered basis,
proof of matrix properties in terms of linear transformation, row space, column
space, kernel and images, applications for least squares problems.
Eigen values, eigen vectors, diagonalization of matrices.
Learning Outcomes
1. use the elementary row operations to obtain solutions of systems of linear
equations
2. interrelate concepts of the vector space R n with the general vector space
3. apply concepts of inner product to find the orthonormal basis through Gram-
Schmidt process and least squares solutions
4. interrelate matrices with linear transformations
5. identify the concepts of diagonalizing a matrix.
Reference Books
1. Smith, L. (1998). Linear Algebra, 3rd edition. Springer-Verlag.
2. Halmos, P.R. (1974). Finite Dimensional Vector Space, 2nd edition.
Springer-Verlag.
3. Leon, S.J. (1990). Linear Algebra with Applications, 3rd edition. Macmillan.
253
4. MAA 111/4 Algebra for Science Students
Matrices:
Matrix operations, elementary row and column operations, elementary matrix,
echelon form, row reduced echelon, finding inverse of a matrix.
System of linear equations :
Homogeneous system and non-homogeneous system, Gauss elimination, Gauss-
Jordan elimination, solutions of linear system of equations with LU
decomposition.
Determinants:
Finding a determinant through a minor expansion, properties of determinant,
finding the inverse of a matrix using determinant, Cramers rule.
Vector space in R n :
Concept of linear independence, spanning sets and bases, dimensions.
Null space, column space and row space of a matrix.
Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization process.
Matrix diagonalization:
Eigen values and eigen vectors, Cayley-Hamilton theorem, methods of matrix
diagonalization.
Learning Outcomes
1. find solutions of linear systems effectively using the theory of matrices, and
develope a firm understanding of the solutions structure of linear systems
2. describe the key concepts of Euclidean vector space n and linear
transformations on n
3. link between the orthogonality concept with the least square method to solve
inconsistencies
4. solve many problems on matrix diagonalization.
Reference Books
1. Anton, H. (2005). Elementary Linear Algebra, 9th edition. John Wiley &
Sons.
2. Noble, B. and Daniel, J.W. (1988). Applied Linear Algebra, 3rd edition.
Prentice Hall.
3. Edward, C.H., Jr. and Penney, D.E. (1988). Elementary Linear Algebra,
Prentice-Hall.
4. Roman, S. (1985). An Introduction to Linear Algebra with Applications,
Saunders College Publication.
5. MAT 161/4 Elementary Statistics
Numerical and graphical description of data.

Empirical law and Chebyshev theorem.
Introduction to probability: concept of probability, counting techniques, rules of
probability, independence, conditional probability, Bayes Theorem.
Random variables and its probability distributions:
254
Discrete distribution: expected value and standard deviation.
Special discrete distributions: Bernoulli/binomial distribution, Poisson,
hypergeometric.
Poisson approximation to binomial distribution.
Continuous distributions: expected value and standard deviation.
Special continuous distributions: uniform distribution, normal, Chi-square
distribution, F distribution.
Normal approximation to binomial distribution, Poisson.
Sampling distributions: mean, proportions and variance of one and two samples,
applications of central limit theorem.
Estimation: point estimation, interval estimation for mean, proportions and
variance of one and two populations.
Hypothesis testing: mean, proportions and variance of one and two populations.
Chi-square test: multinomial distribution and test of goodness of fit, contingency
table-test of independence and test of homogeneity.
Tests based on binomial distribution: sign test and Cox-Stuart test.
Tests based on rank: Wilcoxon sign rank test and Mann-Whitney test.
Run tests: Wald Wolfowitz test, Fisher exact test, Tukey quick test, Mc Nemar
test
Learning Outcomes
1. identify different types of data and the appropriate way to manage each type
of data
2. describe data graphically and numerically and communicate their meanings
in general
3. identify the appropriate statistical methods to be used in making inferences
about one and two populations based on information from relevant samples
4. perform data analysis correctly and make appropriate decisions and
conclusions in solving problems
5. differentiate between situations that are suitable for the application of
parametric methods and non-parametric methods.
Reference Books
1. Freund, J. (2003). Modern Elementary Statistics, Prentice Hall.
2. Seber, G.A.F., Alan, J.L. (2003). Linear Regression Analysis, J. Wiley.
3. Freund, J.E. & Perles, B.M. (1999). Statistics: A First Course, Prentice
Hall.
255
6. MAA 161/4 Statistics for Science Students
Numerical and graphical description of data.

Empirical law and Chebyshev theorem.
Introduction to probability: concept of probability, counting techniques, rules of
probability, independence, conditional probability, Bayes Theorem.
Random variables and its probability distributions :
Discrete distribution: expected value and standard deviation.
Special discrete distribution: Bernoulli/binomial distribution, Poisson,
hypergeometric.
Poisson approximation to binomial distribution.
Continuous distributions: expected value and standard deviation.
Special continuous distributions: uniform distribution, normal, Chi-square
distribution, F distribution.
Normal approximation to binomial distribution, Poisson.
Sampling distributions: mean, proportions and variance of one and two samples,
applications of central limit theorem.
Estimation: point estimation, interval estimation for mean, proportions and
variance of one and two populations.
Hypothesis testing: mean, proportions and variance of one and two populations.
Chi-square test: multinomial distribution and test of goodness of fit, contingency
table-test of independence and test of homogeneity.
Tests based on binomial distribution: sign test and Cox-Stuart test.
Tests based on rank: Wilcoxon sign rank test and Mann-Whitney test.
Run tests: Wald Wolfowitz test, Fisher exact test, Tukey quick test, McNemar
test
Learning Outcomes
1. have a clear understanding of the basic concepts of statistics such as
probability and random variables
2. differentiate between discrete and continuous random variables and use
them appropriately
3. make statistical inferences for population parameters based on sample
statistics
4. identify the appropriate parametric and non-parametric methods in making
statistical inferences.
Reference Books
1. Freund, J. (2003). Modern Elementary Statistics, Prentice Hall.
2. McClave & Sincich, T. (2006). Statistics, Prentice Hall.
3. Prem, S.M. (2005). Introductory Statistics, J. Wiley.
4. Freund, J.E. & Perles, B.M. (1999). Statistics: A First Course, Prentice
Hall.
256
7. MAT 102/4 Advanced Calculus
LHospitals rule.
Improper integrals.
Sequence and series of numbers:
Monotone convergence theorem for sequence.
Divergence and convergence of series, absolute and conditional convergence, n-
th term test, integral test, comparison test, ratio test, root test, alternating series
test (may include Raabe test).
Taylor polynomials, Taylor Series,
approximation of function by Taylors polynomial with remainder.
Power series, radius of convergence, interval of convergence, differentiation and
integration of power series term by term.
Function of several variables:
Limit and continuity.
Partial derivatives, directional derivatives, total differential, chain rule, partial
derivatives for implicit functions.
Maximum and minimum, Lagrange multiplier method.
Multiple integrals, iterated integrals, change of variables.
Learning Outcomes
1. know about sequences and series of real numbers, and their relationship
2. find series representation for certain basic functions
3. identify different type of improper integrals and determine their
convergence
4. know about functions of several variables and the concepts of limit,
continuity, derivative and integration of these functions
5. evaluate multiple integral of functions of several variables using the iterated
integral or/and transforming into other types of coordinates.
Reference Books
1. Spivak, M. (1994). Calculus, 3rd edition. Publish or Perish Inc.
2. Apostol, T.M. (1967). Calculus, Vol. I, 2nd edition. John Wiley & Sons.
3. Apostol, T.M. (1969). Calculus, Vol. II. John Wiley & Sons.
257
8. MAA 102/4 Calculus for Science Students II

Monotone convergence theorem for sequence.
Divergence and convergence of series, n-th term test, integral test, comparison
test, ratio test, alternating series test.
Improper integral.
Power series:
Taylor series and Maclaurin series, radius and interval of convergence,
differentiation and integration of power series term by term.
Taylor polynomials, approximation of function by Taylors polynomial with
remainder.
Function of several variables:
Partial derivatives, directional derivatives, chain rule.
Maximum and minimum, Lagrange multiplier method.
Multiple integrals.
Differential equations:
First order differential equation and methods of solution, applications in
economics, biology and chemistry.
Learning Outcomes
1. determine the convergence of a sequence, series, power series and improper
integrals
2. select and use an appropriate test to determini the convergence of the series
3. find the partial derivatives using chain rule, directional derivatives and their
applications
4. evaluate a double integral in cartesian and polar coordinates apply the
methods in first order differential equation to problems in life and physical
sciences.
Reference Books
1. Stewart, J. (2003). Calculus, 5th edition. Thomson, Brooks/Cole.
2. Strauss, M.J., Bradley, G.L. and Smith, K.J. (2002). Calculus, 3rd edition.
Prentice-Hall.
3. Weir, M.D., Hass, J. and Giordano, F. R. (2005). Thomas Calculus, 11th
edition. Pearson Addison Wesley.
258
9. MAT 122/4 Differential Equations I
Ordinary differential equations: linear and nonlinear, homogeneous and

nonhomogeneous, degree and order. The existence and uniqueness theorem.
First order equations: introduction to standard solution techniques.
Second order equations with constant coefficients. Standard methods for solving
homogeneous and nonhomogeneous equations.
Numerical methods : Eulers method and Heuns method, simple error analysis.
Power series solutions: ordinary points only.
Systems of first order linear equations: introduction.
Applications: economics, ecology, etc.
Software: usage of standard software such as MATLAB is encouraged.
Learning Outcomes
1. understand fundamental concepts and theory of differential equations (DE)
and able to apply DE procedures in routine and non-routine concepts
2. select and use appropriate DE strategies and techniques
3. demonstrate an understanding of the appropriate use of DE modeling
4. gain computational skills needed in understanding applied problems
5. have quantitative reasoning skills, conceptual understanding and are able to
effectively communicate in mathematics.
Reference Books
1. Edwards, C. H. & Penney, D. E., (2004). Differential Equations and
Boundary Value Problems: Computing and Modeling, 3rd edition. Upper
Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Education.
2. Zill, D.G. & Cullen, M. R., (2005). Differential Equations with Boundary
Value Problems, 6th edition. Toronto:Thomson/Brooks/Cole.
3. Boyce, W.E. & DiPrima, R.C., (2005). Elementary Differential Equations &
Boundary Value Problems, 8th edition. Pacific Grove: John Wiley & Sons.
10. MAT 181/4 Programming for Scientific Applications
Introduction to basic computer concepts: Computer hardware and software. A

brief introduction to programming concepts. Problem solving and program
design.
Introduction to C++ language: Writing simple C++ programs but comprehensive.
Program control structures; sequence, selection and repetition. Basic C++
operators. Output formatting.
Modular programming: Functions. Strategies in solving complex problems.
File processing.
Advanced data types: Arrays. Pointers. Enumerations and stuctures. Strings.
259
Learning Outcomes
1. understand fundamental computer programming concepts and algorithm
development in problem solving
2. apply appropriate programming techniques/structures and strategies in
transforming the description of a problem into executable computer codes
4. develop programs using advanced programming structures (modular
programming, files manipulation, pointers) which add values to the
computer programs.
Reference Books
1. Norhashidah M. Ali and Tan Guat Yew, 2007, C++ Programming An
Introduction (Reprint 2008), Penerbit USM.
2. Bronson Gary J. (2006) A First Book of C++: From Here to There, 3rd
edition, Course Technology, Thomson Learning, Australia.
3. Cannon Scott (2001). Understanding Programming: An Introduction
Using C++, 2nd edition. Brooks Cole.
4. Malik D.S. (2002). C++ Programming: From Problem Analysis To
Program Design, Course Technology, Thomson Learning.
11. MSG 162/4 Applied Statistical Methods
Introduction to Experimental Design

Elements of experimental design. Principles of experimental design: Replication,
randomization, local control.
Test to compare several means of treatments: Analysis of Variance
Completely randomized design. Test for equality of k variances. Orthogonal
contrast. Post-hoc contrasts: the least significant difference method, Duncans
multiple range test, Bonferroni test, Scheffes test, Tukeys test and Dunnetts
test for comparing treatment means with a control. Randomized complete block
design and Latin square design. Analysis of variance for unbalanced design.
Nonparametric tests: Kruskall-Wallis test, median test, Friedman test and
Cochran test.
Applied linear regression
Correlation coefficient: Pearson. Non-parametric tests: Spearman and Kendall
test.
Simple linear regression model: Least squares method, residual analysis,
coefficient of determination, significance tests, interpreting coefficients,
estimation and prediction.
Multiple linear regression model: Multicollinearity, identification of outliers and
influential observations.
Analysis of variance approach to regression analysis.
260
Learning Outcomes
1. identify the different basic designs of an experiment
2. check for model assumptions
3. select and apply the appropriate statistical technique for an experimental
design
4. differentiate between a parametric test and a non-parametric test
5. analyze data for regression models.
Reference Books
1. Montgomery, D.C. (2000). Design and Analysis of Experiments, Wiley.
2. Ott, R.L. and Longnecker, M. (2001). An Introduction to Statistical
Methods and Data Analyis, 5th edition. Duxbury.
3. Seber, G.A.F. and Alan, J.L. (2003). Linear Regression Analysis, Wiley.
12. MAT 202/4 Introduction to Analysis
Real numbers:
Algebraic and order properties, infimum and supremum, completeness axiom,
the extended real number system.
Countability of sets.
Metric spaces:
Limit point, interior point, closed and open sets, compact sets,
Bolzano-Weierstrass theorem, Heine Borel theorem, Cantor set, connected set.
Convergent sequence, subsequence, Cauchy sequence, upper and lower limits,
absolutely convergent series, addition and multiplication of series,
rearrangements.
Continuity:
Limit of a function, continuous function, continuity and compactness, continuity
and connectedness, discontinuities, monotonic functions.
Sequence and series of functions:
Pointwise convergence and uniform convergence, interchange of limits,
equicontinuous families of functions, Stone-Weierstrass theorem.
Learning Outcomes
1. have a firm understanding of the real number system and its topological
properties
2. state mathematical definitions precisely, illustrate them with examples, and
use them in writing proofs
3. relate topics from calculus such as limit and continuity from a more
advanced view point
4. construct mathematical proof using mathematical logic.
261
Reference Books
1. Rudin, W. (1976). Principles of Mathematical Analysis, 3rd edition.
McGraw Hill.
2. Apostol, T.M. (1974). Mathematical Analysis, 2nd edition. Addison-Wesley.
3. Goldberg, R.R. (1976) Methods of Real Analysis, 2nd edition. John Wiley &
Sons.
13. MAT 203/4 Vector Calculus
Vectors:
Vector product, triple product, linearly independent vectors, analytic geometric
vector.
Vector function:
Curve, arc length, tangential vector, Frenets formula, curvature, torsion.
Differential:
Limit, continuity, partial differentiation, differential, directional differentiation,
tangent, chain rule, mean value theorem, Taylors theorem for function of
several variables, divergence, curl.
Inverse function theorem, implicit function theorem, global inverse,
curvilinear coordinates, and extreme values.
Integration:
Iterated integration, double integration, line integration, independent path,
Greens theorem, surface integration, divergence theorem, Stokes theorem,
change of variables in multiple integration.
Learning Outcomes
1. evaluate scalar, vector and triple products and their uses in the description
of lines and planes
2. analyze the differential geometry of 3-dimensional curves
3. evaluate the gradient, divergence and curl of scalar and vector fields in
terms of artesian, cylindrical and spherical coordinates
4. evaluate line, surface and volume integrals
5. state and use Greens theorem in the plane, divergence theorem and Stokes
theorem.
Reference Books
1. Colley, S.J. (2005). Vector Calculus, 3rd edition. Pearson Prentice Hall.
2. Matthews, P.C. (1998). Vector Calculus, Springer-Verlag.
3. Marsden, J.E. and Tromba, A.J. (2003) Vector Calculus, W.H. Freeman
and Co.
262
14. MAT 222/4 Differential Equations II
Advanced theory on system of differential equations and its solutions: focus will
be given on methods for solving nonhomogeneous systems, autonomous system
and its stability.
Orthogonal function, Fourier series and the Sturm-Liuoville problem.
Partial differential equations: some introduction to partial differential equations
that are normally used to solve problems in mathematical physics and methods
for solving these equations.
Learning Outcomes
1. solve problems involving linear system of equations, both homogeneous and
non-homogeneous
2. analyze the local stability of plane autonomous systems
3. interpret series expansion of functions based on infinite set of orthogonal
functions into the solution of Sturm-Liouville problem
4. solve partial differential equations using separation of variables
5. analyze solutions of boundary-value problems for different forms of
boundary and intial values.
Reference Books
1. Boyce, W.E. & DiPrima, R.C., (2005). Elementary Differential Equations &
Boundary Value Problems, 8th edition. Pacific Grove: John Wiley & Sons.
2. Andrews L.C., (1986). Elementary Partial Differential Equations with
Boundary Value Problem, Academic Press.
3. Zill, D.G. & Cullen, M.R., (2005). Differential Equations with Boundary
Value Problems, 6th edition. Toronto: Thomson/Brooks/Cole.
15. MAT 251/4 Introduction to Operations Research
Scientific methods and operations research. Applications of operations research

in decision analysis.
Linear programming: modelling, graphical solution, standard form and simplex
method. Sensitivity analysis.
Transportation and assignment problems.
Project scheduling: PERT-CPM. Project crashing. Project planning.
Exposure to some relevant software packages.
Learning Outcomes
1. formulate problem into a linear programming model
2. choose and use a suitable method to solve a problem
3. do the economic interpretation of the optimal solution and do the sensitivity
analysis.
263
Reference Books
1. Taha, H.A. (2007). Operations Research: An Introduction, 8th edition. New
Jersey: Prentice Hall.
2. Muhammad Jantan. Pengantar Penyelidikan Operasi, Siri Edisi Awal.
Pulau Pinang: Penerbit USM.
3. Norman, J. and Titchie, E. (1981). Problem Solving Exercise In OR,
Lancaster Lancord.
16. MAT 263/4 Probability Theory
Probability: Expansion of the axioms of probability, the concept of mutually

exclusive and independence, conditional probability. Bayes theorem.
Random variables, probability density function and distribution function,
expectation and moment generating function, Markov and Chebyshev inequality,
Law of Large numbers, distribution function of random variables.
Some special distribution: Bernoulli, binomial, Poisson, hypergeometric,
negative binomial, uniform, normal, exponential, chi-square, gamma,beta.
Bivariate random variables: density function and joint distribution function,
conditional probability density function and distribution function, covariance,
onditional expectation, independence of two random variables, bivariate normal
random variables.
Transformation 1-1. Sampling distribution: chi-squares, t and F. Central limit
theorem.
Learning Outcomes
1. define probability and prove basic theorems in probability
2. find the probability density function( p.d.f.) and distribution function (d.f.)
of any random variables (r.v.) and hence, obtain the mean, variance,
moment generating function and the kth. moment from this p.d.f. or d.f.
3. identify daily problem that can be solved in terms of r.v. and the properties
of its distribution
4. examine problems of joint and conditional p.d.f.s and d.fs and their
moments and determine the dependence between two r.vs
5. develop distributions of sample mean and variance from a normal
distribution and distribution of functions of two or more r.vs.
Reference Books
1. Hogg, R.V. and Craig, A.T. (1995). Introduction to Mathematical Statistics,
5th edition. Prectice Hall.
2. Hogg, R.V. and Tanis, E.A. (2001). Probability and Statistical Inference,
6th edition. Prectice Hall.
3. Ross, S. (2006). A First Course in Probability, 7th edition. Pearson Prentice
Hall.
264
17. MAT 282/4 Engineering Computation I
Introduction to basic numerical methods: rounding errors and computer

arithmetic.
Solution of non-linear equations.
Solution of linear systems of equations: direct methods and iterative methods.
Solution of non-linear systems of equations.
Polynomial interpolation.
Numerical differentiation and integration.
Numerical methods to compute eigenvalues and eigen vectors.
Learning Outcomes
1. apply numerical methods to solve a given non-linear equation and state the
general conditions which guarantee the convergence of the methods
2. construct interpolating polynomials for a given set of data
3. state and analyze the formulas for error in polynomial interpolation
4. apply numerical integration and differentiation to find an approximate value
of an integral
5. construct and apply formulas to approximate specific derivatives of
functions by differentiating appropriate interpolating polynomials.
Reference Books
1. Fausett, L.V. (1999). Applied Numerical Analysis Using MATLAB,
Prentice-Hall.
2. Cheney, E.W. and Kincaid, D.R. (2004). Numerical Mathematics and
Computing, 5th edition. Thomson.
3. Schilling, R.A. and Harris, S.L. (2000). Applied Numerical Methods For
Engineers Using MATLAB, Thomson.
18. MAT 363/4 Statistical Inference
Revision of probability theory. Sampling distributions, order statistics, limiting

distribution, stochastic convergence.
Point estimation: properties of estimatorsconsistency, unbiasedness, efficiency
and sufficiency. Point estimation using the method of maximum likelihood and
the method of moments. Completeness property for a family of distributions.
Unbiased estimators with minimum variance.
Interval estimation : confidence intervals for small and large samples. Pivotal
quantity.
Hypothesis testing : statistical hypothesis, types and sizes of errors, power
function, critical region, most powerful test, fundamental lemma of Neyman-
Pearson, uniformly most powerful test, likelihood ratio tests for testing the mean,
variance, equality of two means and equality of two variances for normal
distribution, analysis of variance, non-parametric statistics, goodness-of-fit tests.
265
Learning Outcomes
1. have a firm understanding of probability theory and statistical inference
2. find the distributions and joint distributions of random variables and random
vectors
3. derive point estimators and construct confidence intervals
4. conduct testing of hypotheses to verify claims.
Reference Books
1. Khatijah, S.A. (1995). Pengantar Teori Statistik, Penerbit USM.
2. Hogg, R.V., Craig, A.T. (1978). Introduction to Mathematical
Statistics, 4th edition. New York, Macmillan.
3. Miller, I. & Miller, M. (2004). Mathematical Statistics with Application,
7th edition. New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall.
19. MSG 228/4 Introduction to Modelling
The aims of this course are to:

a) expose students to the basic concepts and methodology in modelling,
b) introduce standard mathematical tools in modelling.
Topics include:
(i) interpreting graphs
(ii) optimization
(iii) ordinary differential equations
(iv) data analysis
(v) difference equations
(vi) simulation.
Areas of interest may consist of biology, environment, engineering, and

economics.
Learning Outcomes
1. build a simple mathematical model from a verbal description or a tabular
data
2. demonstrate understanding of methods, skills and tools used in a variety of
models
3. interpret models and solutions (if appropriate) and draw inferences from
them
4. recognise and use the connections between mathematics and other
disciplines.
266
Reference Books
1. Frank, R. Giordano, Maurice, D. Weir, Williams P. (2003). Fox; A First
Course in Mathematical Modeling, 3rd edition. Brooks-Cole.
2. Frederick, R. Marotto (2005). Introduction to Mathematical Modeling using
Discrete Dynamical System: Brooks-Cole.
3. Beltrami, E. (2001). Mathematical Models for Society and Biology,
Academic Press.
20. MSG 252/4 Linear and Integer Programming
Linear programming: revised simplex method, duality theory, dual simplex

method, sensitivity analysis.
Integer programming model: pure integer and mixed integer model, 0-1 model,
cutting plane technique, branch and bound method, implicit enumeration.
Goal programming: formulation and solution.
Applications to practical problems. Exposure to relevant software packages.
Learning Outcomes
1. detect the similarities and differences between simplex and revised simplex
methods
2. apply the duality theory to any linear programming problem
3. use any of the techniques taught in this course to solve linear and integer
programming problems
4. formulate a goal programming problem and find its solution using suitable
methods.
Reference Books
1. Che Rohani Yaacob (2001). Pengaturcaraan Linear dan Integer, Penerbit
USM.
2. Taha, H.A. (1992). Operations Research An Introduction, New York:
Macmillan.
3. Winston, W.L. (1993). Operations Research Applications and Algorithms.
Belmont, California: Duxbury.
21. MSG 253/4 Queueing System and Simulation
Queuing theory: general queueing model, terminologies and notations.

Characteristics of exponential and Poisson distributions. Birth and death process.
Discussion about the theoretical and also the application of queueing models :
M/M/1 and its extension.
Queueing models involving nonexponential distributions.
Queueing networks.
Simulation: general simulation concept. Random numbers. Discrete event
simulation.
Applications of software packages for modelling and simulation of queueing
systems.
267
Learning Outcomes
1. derive the performance measurement formulas of various queueing models
2. assess queueing systems using analytical methods and simulation
3. master the use of a computer simulation package
4. strengthen their mathematical and professional report writing ability.
Reference Books
1. Gross, D. & Harris, C.M. (1998) Fundamentals of Queuing Theory, 3rd
edition. John Wiley& Sons.
2. Chisman, J.A. (1992) Introduction to Simulation Using GPSS/PC. Prentice
Hall.
3. Taha H.A. (2003) Operation Research: An Introduction, 7th edition.
Prentice Hall.
22. MSG 262/4 Quality Control
Seven tools for statistical quality control: check sheet, histogram, Pareto
diagram, cause-and-effect diagram, stratification, scatter diagram and control
charts.
Statistical process control: control charts X R, X S , median-range, EWMA,
CUSUM, p, np, c and u. Specification limits. Process capability.
Acceptance sampling plans. Producer risk and consumer risk. Single sampling
plan. Double sampling plan. Operating characteristic curve of a sampling plan,
MIL-STD 105E and Dodge-Romig sampling plans.
Learning Outcomes
1. define and describe the concepts of quality, total quality management(TQM)
and quality control (QC)
2. apply both graphics and quantitative quality measurement and quality
analysis tools
3. analyze, interpret and solve quality-related problems
4. work as a team to solve quality related issues
5. communicate orally and in written form pertaining to quality.
Reference Books
1. Besterfield, D.H. (2004). Quality Control, 7th edition., New Jersey, U.S.A :
Pearson Prentice Hall.
2. Montgomery, D.C. (2005). Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, 5th
edition. U.S.A : John Wiley & Sons.
3. Oakland, J.S. (1996). Statistical Process Control, 3rd edition. Oxford, U.K.
Butterworth-Heinemann
268
23. MSG 265/4 Design and Analysis of Experiments
Introduction to factorial designs: the general factorial design; two-factor and

three-factor factorial designs, statistical analysis of the fixed effects model and
the random effects model, model adequacy checking, fitting response curves,
blocking in a factorial design.
The 2k Design: 22 design and 23 design, a single replicate of the 2k design.
Blocking and confounding in the 2k factorial design: blocking a replicated 2k
factorial design, confounding in the 2k factorial design, confounding the 2k
factorial design in two blocks, confounding the 2k factorial design in four blocks,
confounding the 2k factorial design in 2p blocks, partial confounding.
Two-level fractional factorial designs: the one-half fraction of the 2k design;
definitions and basic principles, design resolution and construction and analysis
of the one-half fraction, the one-quarter fraction of the 2k design and the general
2k-p fractional factorial design.
Three-level and mixed-level factorial design.
Nested and split-plot designs: the two-stage nested design and the general m-
stage nested design, design with both nested and factorial factors, the split-plot
design; split-plot designs with more than two factors and the split-split-plot
design.
Taguchi approach.
Response surface methods.
The analysis of covariance.
Learning Outcomes
1. identify the different design of experiments and explain the procedures of
designing those experiments
2. perform the analysis of variance for the data obtained from different designs
3. interprete the results and write the conclusions for the different designs.
Reference Books
1. Montgomery, D.C. (2005). Design and Analysis of Experiments, 6th edition.
John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Berger, P.D. and Maurer, R.E. (2002). Experimental Design with
Applications in Management, Engineering and the Sciences. Duxbury
3. Snedecor, G.W. and Cochran, W.G. (1967). Statistical Methods, The Iowa
State University Press, Ames, Iowa.
269
24. MSG 281/2 Modelling Laboratory I
The objectives of this course is to introduce the use of AUTOCAD software to

transfer hand created drawing using primitive drawing objects and MATLAB
software to solve problems in mathematical modeling and numerical
computations. Case studies on different aspects of mathematical modeling and
computer modeling are presented. Independent learning is encouraged as much
as possible to diversify students approach using the software
Learning Outcomes
1. use mathematical tools with competence
2. find information needed to solve a computerized problem
3. analyze a problem and determine if it could feasibly be solved with current
resources, design a solution and implement the solution.
4. Draw curves and solids using 3-D features in AUTOCAD and use shading
technique to render the models
Reference Books
1. Learning AutoCAD 2010, 111 McInnis Parkway, CA94903, USA.
2. Noor Atinah Ahmad, Yahya Abu Hasan, Zarita Zainuddin & Low Heng
Chin (2002). MATLAB: Pendekatan Penyelesaian Masalah Matematik. Mc
Graw Hill.
25. MSG 282/2 Modelling Laboratory II
The objective of these course is to use 3DMAX packages for graphical

animations and use Mathematica packages to perform numerical computations,
symbolic computations (manipulating formulas) and graphical manipulations
(create 2-D and 3-D graphs). Write simple Mathematica programs in procedural,
rule-based and functional-based styles to perform desirable tasks and use
Mathematics as a tool in solving simple mathematical models. Independent
learning is encouraged as much as possible to diversify students approach using
the software
Learning Outcomes
1. understand and use Mathematica to perform numerical computations,
symbolic computations (manipulating formulas) and graphical
manipulations (create 2-D and 3-D graphs)
2. write simple Mathematica programs in procedural, rule-based and
functional-based styles to perform desirable tasks
3. create and document computational models for mathematical experiments
and explorations.
4. developed 3D models using 3DMAX and produce an animation video clip
with low end hardware and software
270
Reference Books
1. Murdock, K.L. (2005) 3Ds Max 7, Wiley Publishing, Inc.
2. Giambrano, (1997). 3D Graphics and Animation: From star up to
standing out, New Riders Publishing.
3. Paul R. Wellin (2005) An Introduction to Programming with Mathematica,
3rd edition. Cambridge University Press.
4. Stephen Wolfram (2003).The Mathematica Book, 5th edition Wolfram
Media.
5. Springer-Verlag (2005). The Mathematica Guide Books, Vol I- IV, New
York.
26. MSG 284/4 Introduction to Geometric Modelling
What is geometric modeling: mathematical methods in geometric modeling.

Some historical background. Data fitting and parametric interpolation.
Geometric smoothness versus parametric smoothness. Representation by
parametric and implicit equations.
Introduction to differential geometry: tangent, normal, binormal, curvature,
torsion, Frenet-Serret formulas, osculating circle, first fundamental and second
fundamental forms, Meusnier theorem, mean and Gaussian curvatures.
Polynomial interpolation: Lagrange polynomial, Hermite polynomial, Aitken
algorithm.
Bernstein polynomial: motivation, partition of unity, positivity, symmetry,
recursive property and derivatives.
Bzier curves and surfaces: derivatives, de Casteljau algorithm, shape preserving
properties, degree reduction and elevation, tensor-product.
B-splines curves and surfaces: B-splines basis, properties of B-splines curves, B-
spline surfaces, relation with Bzier.
Parametric and geometric continuity: definition, differences between parametric
and geometric continuity, application of these continuity to composite curves
and surfaces.
Coons surfaces: Boolean sum, compatibility conditions.
Learning Outcomes
1. have the knowledge of geometric modelling and able to practice them
confidently
2. analyze and interpret the geometric properties of curves and surfaces in
mathematical representations
3. build and manipulate curves and surfaces using computers.
271
Reference Books
1. Faux and Pratt (1980), Computational Geometry for Design and
Manufacture, Chichester, England: Halsted Press.
2. Mortenson (1997), Geometric Modelling, Wiley.
3. David Salamon (1999), Computer Graphics and Geometric Modeling,
Springer Verlag.
27. MSG 285/2 Statistical Laboratory
Expose students on the applications of certain statistical packages such as SPSS,

SAS, Minitab, Statgraphics to analyse data and interpret their results.
Learning Outcomes
1. apply statistical packages to the data set
2. relate the statistical reasoning from the results obtained
3. interpret results in simple case study.
Reference Books
1. Montgomery, D.C. (2000). Designand Analysis of Experiment, Wiley.
2. Conover, W.J. (1999). Practical Nonparametric Statistics. John Wiley.
3. Christensen, R. (1996). Analysis of Variance, Design and Regression,
Chapman & Hall.
28. MSG 286/2 Operations Research Laboratory
Use of operations research packages such as SAS/OR, TORA, LINDO, LINGO,

QM/POM, Microsoft Project and others will be taught. Applications to real
world problem will be emphasised.
Learning Outcomes
1. formulate and interpret outputs of the linear programming problems solved
by the specified softwares
2. use the OR softwares taught to solve LP problems
3. relate to and learn any future OR softwares using the help files and tutorials.
Reference Books
1. Linus Schrage (1997). Optimization Modeling with LINDO 5th edition.
Brooks/Cole Publishing Company.
2. Elaine Marmel (1999). Microsoft Project 2000 Bible, IDG Books
Worldwide.
3. Taha, H.A. (2003). Operations Research: An Introduction. 7th edition.
Prentice Hall.
272
29. MSG 322/4 Fluid Mechanics
Review of vector calculus.

Basic statics.
Basic concept of fluid dynamics and kinematics.
Finite control volume analysis of fluid flow.
Differential analysis of fluid flow.
Two-dimensional motion (potential flow theory).
Flow through pipes.
Basic concept of boundary layer theory.
Open channel flow.
Learning Outcomes
1. state the definition of a fluid and related concepts such as viscosity,
compressibility, laminar/turbulent flows
2. formulate the governing equations of fluid mechanics using a finite control
volume and an infinitesimally small fluid element model
3. distinguish different types of flows and apply the relevant equations to
compute quantities of interest.
Reference Books
1. Merle, C. Potter and David, C. Wiggert (2003). Mechanics of Fluid, 3rd
edition. Brooks/Cole.
2. Fox, R.W. and McDonald, A.T. (2004). Introduction to Fluid Mechanics,
5th edition. John Wiley.
3. Frank, M.W. Fluid Mechanics 5th edition. McGraw Hill.
30. MSG 327/4 Mathematical Modelling
The objective of this course is to enable students to see how mathematical

models are developed from first principles and then to see the consequences
through further mathematical and numerical analysis.
Models (which should be amenable to analysis) from a particular area of applied
mathematics are taken to illustrate the ideas.
References will be provided by the instructor of the course.
Learning Outcomes
1. formulate and solve simple real life problems by ODE by analytical and
numerical methods such as RK2 and RK4
2. formulate and solve real life problem simulations by PDE using analytical
and numerical solution techniques such as FDM and FSM
3. design and implement efficient codes by FORTRAN, MATLAB and
MATHEMATICA to solve real life problem simulations
4. interpret and synthesize simulation results by means of WASP7 and in-
house simulation models I1Disp, E2DISP, TUNA, DEER.
273
31. MSG 354/4 Network Flows
Basic concepts of graphs and network

Minimum spanning tree problem: Kruskal algorithm, Prim algorithm and
applications.
Shortest route problem: tree building program, tree changing algorithm, Floyd
algorithm, Yen algorithm and applications.
Maximum flow problem: cut-set concept, Ford-Fulkerson labelling algorithm
and applications.
Minimum cost flow problem: Busacker & Gowen algorithm, Klein algorithm,
General network simplex method, 'Out-of-Kilter' algorithm and applications.
Chinese postman problem: Eulerian circuit and some solutions methods.
Travelling salesman problem: Hamiltonian circuit and some branch and bound
solution techniques.
Learning Outcomes
1. formulate/translate real life problems as network flow problems
2. comprehend the underlying theorems of network flow problems
3. use appropriate algorithms to solve network flow problems
4. perform economic interpretation of network flow solutions.
Reference Books
1. Ahuja, R.K, Magnanti,T.L & Orlin, J.B . Network Flows: Theory,
Algorithmn and Application. Prentice Hall.
2. Adli Mustafa (1991). Aliran Rangkaian, Pulau Pinang: Penerbit USM.
3. Taha, H.A. (2003). Operation Research: An Introduction, 7th edition. New
Jersey : Prentice Hall.
32. MSG 355/4 Inventory Control

Basic concepts of inventory control. ABC inventory system. General inventory
control model.
Deterministic inventory models: classic EOQ model, buffer stock, price breaks
model, N-period production scheduling model, N-period dynamic EOQ model,
multiple-item with storage limitation model.
Probabilistic models: continuous review model single period model, multiperiod
model.
MRP, JIT system. Use of computer packages to obtain solutions.
Learning Outcomes
1. explain clearly the basic issues in inventory management
2. identify a suitable model for a given inventory problem
3. use a suitable method for finding the optimum solution to a given inventory
problem
4. interprete the solution obtained from a given inventory problem.
274
Reference Books
1. Johnson, L. and D. Montgomery (1974). Operations Research in
Production, Planning, Scheduling and Inventory Control. New York:
Wiley.
2. Love, S. (1979). Inventory Control, New York: MacGraw-Hill.
3. Taha, H.A. (2003). Operations Research: An Introduction. New Jersey :
Prentice Hall.
33. MSG 356/4 Mathematical Programming
Introduction: review of differential calculus, basic concepts in optimisation

theory, including extremum (maximum and minimum), optimality criteria and
convexity.
Nonlinear programming problems (NLPs): definition and formulation,
techniques used to solve NLPs with one and several variables, unconstrained and
constrained problems including the golden section search, the method of steepest
ascent, the Newton-Raphson method, the Lagrange multiplier, the Kuhn-Tucker
method, quadratic programming, separable programming, the method of feasible
directions, geometric programming.
Introduction to dynamic programming and its applications to sequential decision
problems.
Exposure to some relevant software packages. Case studies.
Learning Outcomes
1. recognise the differences between linear programming problems (LPs) and
non-linear programming problems (NLPs)
2. formulate the real problems to NLPs
3. solve NLPs using the appropriate techniques
4. interpret the solutions and making inferences from the results
5. use software packages to solve NLPs and interpret the software output.
Reference Books
1. Winston. W.L. and Venkataramanan, M. (2003). Introduction to
Mathematical Programming, 4th edition. Duxbury.
2. Taha, H.A. (2003). Operations Research: An Introduction, 7th edition New
Jersey: Prentice Hall.
3. Wismer, D.A. and Chattergy, R. (1978). Introduction to Nonlinear
Optimisation: A Problem Solving Approach, North-Holland: Elsevier.
4. Bazaraa, M.S., Sherali, H.D. and Shetty, C.M. (1993). Nonlinear
Programming: Theory and Algorithms, 2nd edition. New York, John Wiley.
275
34. MSG 366/4 Multivariate Analysis
Introduction. Multivariate data. Applications of multivariate techniques.

Revision of matrix algebra and random vectors. Quadratic forms. Sample
geometry. Random sampling.
Multivariate normal distribution. Sampling distributions for X and S .
Inference for the mean vector. Confidence region and simultaneous comparison
of the component means.Comparison of several multivariate means.
MANOVA.
Introduction to principal component analysis. Population and sample principal
components. Applications.
Introduction to factor analysis. Orthogonal factor model. Methods of
estimation. Factor rotation and factor scores. Applications.
Introduction to discrimination and classification. Discriminationtechniques.
Classification for two multivariate normal populations. Fishers discriminant
Function. classification for several populations. Applications.
Introduction to clustering methods. Similarity measures. Hierarchical clustering
methods: single linkage, average linkage and complete linkage. Nonhierarchical
clustering methods: Mac Queens K-mean methods. Applications.
Learning Outcomes
1. define and describe the ideas of multivariate data and techniques
2. apply both graphics and quantitative multivariate techniques to data analysis
3. analyze, interpret and solve multivariate problems
4. work as a team to solve multivariate problems
5. communicate orally and in written form pertaining to multivariate analysis.
Reference Books
1. Johnson, R.A. & Wichern, D.W. (2002). Applied Multivariate Statistical
Analysis, 5th edition. Prentice Hall International, New Jersey.
2. Hair, J.F., Anderson, R.E., Tatham, R.L. & Black, W.C. (1998).
Multivariate Data Analysis, 5th edition. Prentice Hall International, New
Jersey.
3. Manly, B.F.J. (1994). Multivariate Statistical Methods: A primer, 2nd
edition. Chapman & Hall, New York, USA.
276
35. MSG 367/4 Time Series
Introduction: examples of time series data, stationary time series, transformation

(filtering and differencing). Autocorrelation functions and partial autocorrelation
functions.
Probability models for time series: pure random process (white noise), random
walk, moving average process (MA process), autoregressive process (AR
process), mixed model (ARMA process), integrated models (ARIMA process).
Estimation in the time domain, forecasting: Box-Jenkins methods.
Frequency approach to time series. Spectral analysis.
Case studies will be given.
Learning Outcomes
1. fully understand and explain the fundamental time series concepts and
terminologies
2. select appropriate models for the given time series
3. critically differentiate time series elements such as non-stationary, seasonal
and heteroscedasticity
4. apply a group of time series models to any time series data using various
time series statistical packages such as Minitab, SPSS and EViews
5. produce a well-organized report which includes concise explanation of the
steps taken and interpreting results of time series analysis.
Reference Books
1. William W. S. Wei Univariate and Multivariate Methods.
2. John Gottman A Comprehensive Introduction for Social Scientists,
Cambridge University Press.
3. Chatfield, C. (1996). The Analysis of Time Series: An Introduction, hapman
& Hall.
36. MSG 368/4 Sample Survey and Sampling Technique

Sampling design: simple random sampling design for finite population with
and without replacement, stratified sampling design, cluster sampling design,
systematic sampling design, two-stage sampling design. Regression and ratio
estimates. Estimation and bound estimation error.
Sample size determination for the above sampling designs.
Learning Outcomes
1. identify the design of sample survey
2. apply the sampling procedures for selecting the sample from the population
3. differentiate methods for estimating population parameters and the bounds
on the error of estimations
4. generate inferences about a population from the information contained in a
sample.
277
Reference Books
1. Scheaffer, L.R, Mendenhall, W. and Ott, R.L. (1995) Elementary Survey
Sampling, Duxbury Advanced Series.
2. Cochran, W.G. (1977). Sampling Techiques, John Wiley. Sons.
3. Thompson, M.E. (1997). Theory of Sample Surveys, Chapman & Hall,
37. MSG 383/4 Data Structures for Computer Graphics
Introduction to information and data. Ones and twos complements. Ways to

store data in different data types, for example as integers, real numbers and
characters.
Computer memory management. Static and dynamic memory allocations.
Advantages and problems of each allocation.
Introduction to linear data structures, for example, linked list; and non-linear
data structures, for example, binary trees, binary search trees, quadtrees, octtrees
and BSP trees. Representation of the data structures by using both arrays and
linked lists.
Recursion: definitions and processes. Behaviours of recursion and its program
implementation.
Sorting: background in general. Bubble sort, selection sort, quick sort, binary
tree sort and radix sort.
Searching: algorithms and analysis of searching; sequential search, binary search
and binary tree search.
Fractal geometry: descriptions of self-similarities and fractal dimensions by
using Sierpinski triangle and von Koch snow flakes. Comparison of fractals and
L-grammars.
Introduction to graphics file format. Differences between bitmap graphics and
vector graphics. Graphics file compression techniques by using run-length
encoding and Huffman codings. Descriptions of commonly used graphics file
formats, for example, CGM, DXF, BMP, JPG, GIF and PNG.
Learning Outcomes
1. have the knowledge on the fundamental concepts and computational
algorithms of data structures for computer graphics
2. implement the computational algorithms and techniques of data structures
with a high level of confidence and proficiency
3. design, manipulate, combine and compare different types of data structures
used in computer graphics.
278
Reference Books
1. James D. Foley et al. (1993). Introduction to Computer Graphics, Addison-
wesley Publishing Company.
2. Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker (1986). Computer Graphics C.
Version, 2nd edition. Prentice-Hall.
3. Malik,D.S. Data Structures Using C++, (2003). Thomson Course
Technology.
38. MSG 387/4 Computer Graphics
Introduction to computer graphics and its applications. Overview of raster

graphics and transformation pipeline, i.e. transformations between different
coordinate systems, which involve modelling coordinate system, device
coordinate system, world coordinate system, normalized coordinate system,
display window coordinate system and screen coordinate system.
Graphics output primitives in drawing of lines, polygons, triangles, etc. Draw
polylines with different line joining methods. Attributes of graphics primitives
like colour, line style and fill style. Difference between RGB colour code and
colour lookup tables. Constructing pixel mask for line styles and using bit arrays
for fill style.
2D and 3D transformations and viewing. Describing and using viewing
parameters to change the shape of the object, using viewport to change the ratio
of clipping window. Differences in viewing and modelling transformations.
Window clipping by Cohen-Sutherland algorithm.
Explanation on software standards and GKS, logical input devices defined
under GKS. Various interactive picture construction techniques, e.g. basic
positioning methods, dragging, constraints, grids, rubber-band methods and
gravity field.
Raster methods for computer animation, i.e. double buffering and raster
operations. The effect caused by difference in refresh cycle of raster monitors
and object construction time taken by the buffer. Design of animation sequence
in 4 development stages, i.e. storyboard layout, object definitions, key-frame
specifications, generations of in-between frames.
OpenGL functions are used throughout the syllabus to illustrate the computer
graphics concepts.
Learning Outcomes
1. understand the fundamental concepts and standards in computer graphics
2. use graphics pipeline and appropriate transformations involved at each
stage of the pipeline
3. apply the right techniques in producing pictures through programming
4. produce 2-D animations.
279
Reference Books
1. Donald Hearn, M. Pauline Baker (2003). Computer Graphics with OpenGL,
3rd edition. Prentice Hall.
2. James, D. Foley et al. (1993). Introduction to Computer Graphics, Addison-
wesley Publishing Company.
3. Richard, S. Wright, Benjamin Lipchak. OpenGL SuperBible, 3rd edition.
Sams Publishing Company.
39. MSG 388/4 Mathematical Algorithms for Computer Graphics
Bzier curves and surfaces:

Degree elevation and subdivision algorithm, reparameterization, composite
curves and surfaces, rational curves and surfaces. Triangular Bzier surfaces.
Splines:
Splines and natural splines. Basis functions using truncated power functions and
properties.
B-spline curves and surfaces:
Basis functions using convolution method, de Boor Cox algorithm. Uniform and
non-uniform basis functions, subdivision algorithm, knot insertion algorithm,
relation between the number of control points and knots, conversion between
basis functions, NURBS, beta splines and corner-cutting algorithm, subdivision
algorithm for irregular surfaces (Catmull-Clark).
Learning Outcomes
1. have a firm understanding of the mathematical algorithms in computer
graphics, and the principles and theories of computer modelling
2. use mathematical and computational methods to describe and design curves
and surfaces
3. simulate and represent an object geometrically under a computer control.
Reference Books
1. Faux and Pratt (1980). Computational Geometry for Design and
Manufacture, Chichester, England: Halsted Press.
2. Mortenson (1997). Geometric Modelling, Wiley.
3. David Salamon (1999). Computer Graphics and Geometric Modeling,
Springer-Verlag.
40. MSG 389/4 Engineering Computation II
Ordinary Differential Equations

Initial value problems: single step and multi-step methods. System of equations
and higher order equations.
Boundary value problems: shooting method, finite segment and finite difference
methods.
Partial Differential Equations
280
Parabolic equations: FTCS and Crank Nicolson method. Consistency, stability
and convergence.
Hyperbolic equations: method of characteristics and finite difference methods
for the wave equation.
Elliptic equations: standard finite difference schemes for Poisson equation.
Solution of resulting systems of linear equation.
Learning Outcomes
1. recognize and solve IVP for ODE by analytical and numerical methods such
as RK2 and RK4
2. formulate and solve real life problem simulations such as lake and river
pollution by BVP for PDE
3. design and implement efficient codes FORTRAN to solve real life problem
simulations for ODE and PDE
4. interpret and synthesize simulation results.
Reference Books
1. Fausett, L.V. (1999). Applied Numerical Analysis Using MATLAB,
Prentice-Hall.
2. Cheney, E.W. and Kincaid, D.R. (2004). Numerical Mathematics and
Computing, 5th edition. Thomson.
3. Schilling, R.A. and Harris, S.L. (2000). Applied Numerical Methods For
Engineers Using MATLAB, Thomson.
41. MSG 391/6 Project
The aims of this course are

(i) to give an opportunity for students to work on a particular topic relevant to
the program
(ii) to give students an introduction to the methods and experience of research
and to make them better prepared to start a research degree or work in a
research and development environment
(iii) to develop students ability to organize their work in a substantial project
(iv) to develop students ability to present their work in both written and oral
form.
Learning Outcomes
1. carry out a research project
2. conduct a meaningful discussion on the various aspects related to the project
3. write a report and present their research findings.
281
Index to Undergraduate Courses
Advanced Calculus MAT 102/4 257

Algebra for Science Students MAA 111/4 254
Applied Statistical Methods MSG 162/4 260
Calculus for Science Students I MAA 101/4 252
Calculus for Science Students II MAA 102/4 258
Calculus MAT 101/4 251
Computer Graphics MSG 387/4 279
Data Structures for Computer Graphics MSG 383/4 278
Design and Analysis of Experiments MSG 265/4 269
Differential Equations I MAT 122/4 259
Differential Equations II MAT 222/4 263
Elementary Statistics MAT 161/4 254
Engineering Computation I MAT 282/4 265
Engineering Computation II MSG 389/4 280
Fluid Mechanics MSG 322/4 273
Introduction to Analysis MAT 202/4 261
Introduction to Geometric Modelling MSG 284/4 271
Introduction to Modelling MSG 228/4 266
Introduction to Operations Research MAT 251/4 263
Inventory Control MSG 355/4 274
Linear Algebra MAT 111 253
Linear and Integer Programming MSG 252/4 267
Mathematical Algorithms for Computer Graphics MSG 388/4 280
Mathematical Modelling MSG 327/4 273
Mathematical Programming MSG 356/4 275
Modelling Laboratory I MSG 281/2 270
Modelling Laboratory II MSG 282/2 270
Multivariate Analysis MSG 366/4 276
Network Flows MSG 354/4 274
Operations Research Laboratory MSG 286/2 272
Probability Theory MAT 263/4 264
Programming for Scientific Applications MAT 181/4 259
Project MSG 391/6 281
Quality Control MSG 262/4 168
Queueing System and Simulation MSG 253/4 267
Sample Survey and Sampling Technique MSG 368/4 277
Statistical Inference MAT 363/4 265
Statistical Laboratory MSG 285/2 272
Statistics for Science Students MAA 161/4 256
Time Series MSG 367/4 277
Vector Calculus MAT 203/4 262
282
STUDENTS FEEDBACK
The aim of this feedback form is to obtain students response regarding the content
of this guidebook. This information will be useful for the university in improving
this guidebook.
Please respond to items 1 - 5 below based on the following 4-point scale.
1 - Strongly Disagree 2 - Disagree 3 - Agree 4 - Strongly Agree
Please circle the number.
1. This guidebook is very useful.

1 2 3 4
2. The information provided in this guidebook is accurate.

1 2 3 4
If you chose 1 or 2 for question no. 2, please provide the number of the
pages(s) that contain the inaccurate information.
3. The information provided in this guidebook is clear and easy to understand.

1 2 3 4
4. Overall, I would rate the quality of this guidebook as good.

1 2 3 4
5. I prefer to use the CD that is provided compared to this guidebook.

1 2 3 4
6. If there is any other information that you think should be included in the
guidebook, please suggest in the space below.
Please send this feedback form to Schools General Office in the 4th week of
Semester I, Academic Session 2012/2013
283

Bo Applied Science PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bo Applied Science PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bachelor of

Identity Card (IC)/Passport No.

Telephone No. (Residence)

Mobile Phone No.

2.0 ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION

COURSES OFFERED DURING THE INTER-ACADEMIC SESSION BREAK (KSCP)

43 - 45 3 weeks Break Saturday, 29/06/13 - Sunday, 21/07/13

1.1 General Information

1.2 Areas Of Specialization

Type of Course School

Type of Course Code Type Credit Units Required

1.4 Courses Offering

The registration procedures for courses on an audit basis are as follows :-

B School of Biological Sciences

Y&Z - represent classification of courses in each school

1.6 Classification of year equivalent

First Second Third

1.7 Graduation Requirements

Students must fulfil the following requirements to graduate:

2.1 Course Registration

Student Data & Records Section (SDRP)

Tel. No. : 04-6532925/3169/4195

SDRP office is the secretariat / manager / coordinator of course registration

2.1.2 Course Registration Platform

E-Daftar is a platform for course registration through website. The

Co-Curriculum courses will be included in the students course

ii) Access to E-Daftar System

a)E-Daftar System can be accessed through Campus Online portal

iii) Online Course Registration (OCR)

OCR activities are conducted in the Schools/Centres and are applicable

i) Normal Study Semester

2.1.4 General Guidelines Before Students Register for Courses

Academic Status Minimum Unit Maximum Unit

- Determination for an academic status in a semester is based on the

T = Core courses Grade and number of units

Two (2) other course codes are:-

iv) Advice and approval of the Academic Advisor.

2.1.5 Information/Document Given To All Students Through Campus Online

i) The information of Academic Advisor.

a) Registration for Language courses through E-Daftar is allowed.

Engineering Campus Programme Chairperson : 04-5995407

a) Registration for Co-Curriculum courses through E-Daftar is not allowed.

Registration for Co-Curriculum courses is either done through pre-registration

All approval / registration / dropping / adding of the Co-Curriculum courses are

b) Dropping of Language and Co-Curriculum courses, if necessary, must be

Registration for the Audit course (Y code) is not allowed in the E-

Registration on Audit courses (Y code) is not included in the calculation of

2.1.8 Registration of Prerequisite Course (Z code)

Registration of the Prerequisite courses (Z code) is included in the total

2.1.9 Late Course Registration / Late Course Addition

2.1.10 Dropping Courses

i) Dropping Course Form must be completed by the student and signed by

2.1.11 Course Registration Confirmation Slip

2.1.12 Revising and Updating Data / Information / Students Personal and

- Any application / notification for correction / updating of personal data

- Any application / notification for correction of academic data such as

2.1.13 Academic Advisor

2.2 Interpretation of Unit/Credit

Type of Course Definition of Unit

Contact is defined as formal face-to-face meeting between an academic staff and

2.3 Examination System

Evaluated Courses Examination Duration

Barring from Examination